Lucent Technologies Answering Machine 107970212 User Manual

Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
PARTNER MAIL VS®  
Voice Messaging System  
Release 4  
Installation and Programming  
585-322-521  
Comcode 107970212  
Issue 1  
March 1997  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important Safety Instructions  
WARNING:  
The following list provides basic safety precautions that should always be  
followed when using the system:  
1. Read and understand all instructions.  
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.  
2.  
3.  
Unplug all telephone connections before cleaning. DO NOT use liquid  
cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.  
4. This product should be serviced by (or taken to) a qualified repair  
center when service or repair work is required.  
DO NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement  
location.  
5.  
DO NOT place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table.  
6.  
7.  
Never push objects of any kind into slots or openings as they may  
touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in  
a risk of fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the  
product.  
Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There may be a  
remote risk of electric shock from lightning.  
8.  
DO NOT use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the  
leak.  
9.  
The product is provided with a three-wire grounding type plug. This is  
a safety feature. DO NOT defeat the safety purpose of the grounding  
type plug. DO NOT staple or otherwise attach the AC power supply  
cord to building surfaces.  
10.  
CAUTION:  
DO NOT block or cover the ventilation slots and openings. They prevent  
the product from overheating. DO NOT place the product in a separate  
enclosure unless proper ventilation is provided.  
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figures  
2-1. Voice Messaging System Extensions for  
2-3  
2-2. Sample Voice Messaging System Extensions for  
PARTNER Advanced Communications Systems  
2-4  
5-4. Dial Plan for PARTNER Plus, PARTNER II, and  
PARTNER 48  
5-39  
5-5. Dial Plan for PARTNER Advanced  
Communications Systems  
5-40  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About This Guide  
Purpose  
This guide provides instructions for installing, upgrading, programming,  
and managing the PARTNER MAIL VS® Voice Messaging System on the  
PARTNER® Plus, PARTNER II, PARTNER 48, or PARTNER Advanced  
Communications System (ACS). It is intended for the technician who installs the  
hardware and programs the initial system settings and for the System Manager,  
the person who is responsible for managing the system on an on-going basis.  
Terminology  
This guide uses the following terms:  
Voice messaging system (VMS): the PARTNER MAIL VS Voice  
Messaging System.  
Subscribers: a user who has a mailbox on the voice messaging system.  
Communications system (CS): in most countries, Release 3.1 or later  
of the PARTNER Plus, PARTNER II, and PARTNER 48 systems, or  
Release 1.0 of the PARTNER Advanced Communications System.  
In the U.K., Release 2.0 or later of the PARTNER Plus and PARTNER 48  
systems.  
System phones: the telephones specifically designed to work with the  
communications system, including (where available) the PARTNER-34D,  
PARTNER-18D, PARTNER-18, PARTNER 6, MLS-34D, MLS-18D,  
MLS-12D, MLS-12, MLS-6, MLC-6, MDC 9000, MDW 9000, MDW 9010,  
and MDW 9030P.  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
About This Guide  
Key Sequences  
This guide instructs you to press key sequences on the telephone’s dialpad to  
perform tasks. Each sequence includes a number. If the keys on your dialpad  
also have letters, the number in the sequence is equivalent to a letter  
associated with the task in English. For example, to delete a message from your  
mailbox, you press [  
] [  
3
], which is equivalent to [  
] [  
D
] on the dialpad. The  
numerical key sequences and their associated letter sequences are listed below  
for your reference:  
Delete  
Help  
[
[
[
] [  
] [  
] [  
D
H
]
]
[
] [  
] [  
3
]
[
4
]
Restart  
Transfer  
Exit  
R
]
[
] [  
7
]
[
] [  
] [  
8
]
[
[
] [  
] [  
T
]
] [  
X
]
[
] [  
9
]
xi i  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About This Guide  
How to Use This Guide  
lf you are the technician, refer to the appropriate chapters to help you:  
Install the voice messaging system hardware. Chapter 2 provides  
instructions for installing and upgrading the voice messaging system  
module in the communication system’s control unit. It also provides  
instructions for installing the Mailbox Expansion Card.  
Refresh your memory about programming. Chapter 3 offers general  
programming information for both the communications system and the  
voice messaging system.  
Perform initial programming. Chapter 4 provides step-by-step  
programming instructions for integrating the voice messaging system  
with the communications system. It also provides test procedures that  
you should use after installation to ensure that the system is working  
properly.  
and correct problems you may have with the voice messaging system.  
If you are the System Manager, refer to the appropriate chapters to help you:  
Learn about the voice messaging system. Chapter 1 describes the  
voice messaging system’s features and services.  
information for both the communications system and the voice  
messaging system.  
Manage the voice messaging system. Chapter 5 provides instructions  
for changing system settings to accommodate the changing needs of the  
business. It also offers guidelines for setting up and using the  
receptionist’s extension.  
and correct problems you may have with the voice messaging system.  
to locate the information you need.  
This guide contains some information about communications system features as  
well as voice messaging system features. For detailed information about a  
specific communications system feature, refer to the Programming and Use  
guide for the communications system.  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
About This Guide  
Product Safety Statements  
Product safety statements are identified in this guide by a  
CAUTION:  
Indicates the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal  
injury or properly damage if the hazard is not avoided.  
WARNING:  
Indicates the presence of a hazard that can cause severe or fatal  
personal injury if the hazard is not avoided.  
How to Comment on This Guide  
A feedback form is located at the end of this guide, after the appendixes.  
If the form is missing, send your comments and recommendations for  
changes to Publications Manager, Lucent Technologies, 211 Mount Airy Road  
(Room 2W-226), Basking Ridge, NJ 07920 (FAX 1 908 953-6912).  
xi v  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About This Guide  
Reference Materials  
In addition to this guide, the following materials are available (the order  
numbers are in parentheses) for the voice messaging system:  
Using the PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System (585-322-523)  
Tutor Labels (585-322-510)  
To order these materials, call the Lucent Technologies’ BCS Publications Center  
at 1 800 457-1235 in the continental U.S. or at 1 317 361-5353.  
Some of these materials also are available in other languages. For more  
information about these materials or about communications system materials,  
contact the BCS Publications Center, your Lucent Technologies’ Representative  
or local Authorized Dealer.  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Overview  
1
The PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System is designed to work with the  
communications system to automate the call handling needs of the business.  
The voice messaging system:  
Expands easily and supports four configurations to accommodate growth  
and ensure optimal performance. The basic system configuration  
consists of 2 voice channels (ports) and 10 mailboxes. Any one of three  
optional Mailbox Expansion Cards may be installed to increase the  
number of ports and/or subscribers. These configurations include:  
2 ports and 20 mailboxes, 4 ports and 20 mailboxes, and 4 ports and  
40 mailboxes.  
Handles up to two calls (in the 2-port configuration) or four calls (in the  
4-port configuration) simultaneously and provides service for a  
predetermined number of subscribers.  
Answers outside calls, plays a customized message prompting the caller  
to press digits for the party with whom the caller wants to speak, and  
efficiently routes the call to the appropriate party—all without the aid of a  
receptionist.  
Allows outside callers to hear all voice prompts and customized  
messages in the language selected for the system. And in bilingual  
mode, callers can choose between two languages selected for the  
system.  
Allows you to create up to two Automated Attendant Announcements  
(in each language selected for the system). For example, you can offer  
callers a choice of a standard business hours/location announcement or  
a frequently updated announcement featuring special offers.  
Allows callers to leave a private message if the called party does not  
answer or is busy on another call, or to transfer to another system  
extension or the receptionist’s extension for assistance.  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Overview  
Allows subscribers to retrieve messages from any touch-tone phone on  
the premises or from a remote location. And the system informs  
subscribers how many of these messages are new and how many are  
old (previously saved) messages.  
Allows subscribers to forward messages with comment to one or more  
mailboxes on the system.  
Allows System Managers to implement the language that subscribers  
choose for their own mailbox use.  
Allows subscribers to have the system “outcall” a specific telephone or  
pager number according to a predefine schedule whenever a new  
message is received. (Note that this feature is available to subscribers  
only when it is administered for them by their System Manager.)  
Provides after-hours service in addition to daytime service.  
NOTE:  
Outcalling, Automated Attendant Announcements, and Message Forward  
features are introduced with this new release of PARTNER MAIL VS. The  
ability to expand the standard 2-port, 10-mailbox configuration to any one  
of three other configurations with the installation of the appropriate  
Mailbox Expansion Card is also a new feature of Release 4.  
In addition, the voice messaging system offers a built-in Tutor feature, which is  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview  
Tutor Feature  
Tutor is an “on-line help” feature that allows users to easily access and listen to  
information about commonly-used communications system features. Any user  
can access the Tutor—users do not have to be voice messaging system  
subscribers.  
Tutor provides information about the following subjects:  
System phone features such as ringing patterns, volume control,  
speakerphone, display, buttons, and lights.  
Various types of internal calls including group paging calls, voice  
interrupt on busy calls, and hands-free answer on intercom calls.  
System features such as Conference, Transfer, Auto Dialing, Personal  
Speed Dialing, Last Number Redial, and Save Number Redial.  
To access the Tutor menu, users simply make a call to the voice messaging  
system. The system plays:  
Please enter extension  
Welcome to PARTNER MAIL VS.  
to access PARTNER Tutor, press * 4.  
and #. Otherwise,  
When users dial [  
] [ ], they hear instructions for using Tutor, followed by a list of  
4
topics and subtopics. The user can then enter the topic and subtopic numbers  
and subtopic numbers.  
Instruction labels, which are designed for placement in the handset cradle on  
the base of the system phone, are shipped with the voice messaging system  
hardware.  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Overview  
Languages  
The voice messaging system supports multiple languages. You can choose to  
have outside callers hear all voice prompts and customized messages in one of  
the supported languages (Monolingual Mode) or you can let outside callers  
choose between two languages preselected for the system by the System  
Manager (Bilingual Mode).  
When the system operates in Monolingual Mode, the language you choose for  
voice prompts is referred to as the System Language. When the system  
operates in Bilingual Mode, the language you choose for voice prompts when  
calls are first answered is referred to as the Primary Language. Outside callers  
then have the option of switching to the Secondary Language for the remainder  
of the call.  
Voice Messaging Services  
The voice messaging system provides three types of service:  
Automated Attendant Service. Answers outside calls and transfers  
them to the destination selected by the caller or plays an Announcement  
selected by the caller.  
Call Answer Service. Allows the caller to leave a message or to transfer  
to another extension if the called party is busy or does not answer.  
Voice Mail Service. Allows subscribers to listen to messages and  
manage their own mailbox.  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Overview  
PARTNER MAIL VS  
Voice Messaging System  
Automated Attendant Service  
Call Answer Service  
Voice Mail Service  
Prompts caller to make a choice  
from a menu of options, then  
transfers the call to the selected  
destination, or announcements.  
Prompts caller to leave a message  
or transfer to another extension  
when the called party does not  
answer.  
Allows subscribers to:  
Listen to messages  
Forward messages with  
comment to other mailboxes  
Delete messages  
Set up outcalling to a pager or  
telephone number  
Record personal greeting(s)  
Change their password  
VMS Hunt Schedule  
Always  
VMS Extension  
Coverage  
VMS Line  
Coverage  
Day Only  
Voice Mailbox  
Transfer  
Night Only  
Communications  
Communications  
system routes  
Calls to Auto-  
mated Attendant  
Service when  
Night Service is  
off.  
Communications  
system routes  
calls to Auto-  
mated Attendant  
Service when  
Night Service is  
on.  
Caller hears the  
called party’s  
personal greet-  
ing and can leave  
a message.  
Caller hears the  
line owner’s  
personal greet-  
ing and can leave  
a message.  
System users  
press a button to  
transfer callers  
directly to a  
voice  
mailbox without  
ringing the  
system always  
routes calls to  
Automated  
Attendant  
Service.  
extension first.  
VMS Hunt Delay  
Send All Calls  
Immediate  
Delayed  
Manual  
Automatic  
Call Handling  
VMS Coverage  
VMS Coverage  
Call Handling  
Automated Attendant  
The receptionist answers  
outside calls. Calls not  
answered by the third ring  
go to the Automated  
Subscribers  
Subscribers can  
turn voice mail  
coverage on and  
off at their  
Subscribers can use Do  
Not Disturb in conjunc-  
tion with automatic or  
manual VMS coverage.  
Doing so enables callers  
to receive Call Answer  
Service immediately—  
calls do not ring the  
extension first  
Service answers outside  
calls immediately. The  
receptionist acts as a back  
-up for unanswered calls.  
have voice mail  
coverage on all  
the time at their  
Extension.  
Attendant Service.  
Extension.  
Figure 1-1. Voice Messaging Services  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview  
Automated Attendant Service  
The Automated Attendant Service can answer and route outside calls without  
assistance from a receptionist. After an outside call is answered, the Automated  
Attendant Service plays a customized message (called the menu prompt).  
Typically the message welcomes callers—to let them know they have reached  
the correct number—then offers callers a menu of options for transferring to the  
desired party or listening to an Announcement. (It is recommended that the  
menu offer not more than five options to avoid confusing callers.)  
You can record up to two Announcements in Monolingual Mode (or up to two  
Announcements for each language in Bilingual Mode). Announcements are  
often used to answer frequently asked questions, such as business hours and  
location, emergency service, special offers, etc. Each Announcement can be up  
to four minutes in length. Callers can choose to listen to these Announcements,  
so your staff has more time to answer other calls and perform other tasks.  
You can customize the menu prompt for use during normal business hours  
(called the Day Menu Prompt) and for use after normal business hours (called  
the Night Menu Prompt). For example, you can set up Automated Attendant  
Service so that callers hear the following prompt during the day if the system is  
set for Monolingual Mode and the System Language is U.S. English:  
Thank you for calling the ANY Travel Agency.  
If you  
dial it now or press 0 to  
For information on this  
know the extension you want,  
speak with the receptionist.  
month’s special travel package, press 3.  
to ANY Travel Agency, press 4.  
For directions  
To speak to an agent  
about Corporate Travel, press 5. Press * 4 to replay  
this message.  
Note that callers who want general information regarding the current discount  
travel package or agency location can choose to listen to an Announcement.  
For example, when callers press [ 3 ] they hear the following Announcement:  
Are you tired of battling the ice, snow, and after-  
Christmas sale crowds? Take advantage of our January  
sunny escape package-3 days and 2 nights in San Juan,  
Puerto Rico for $439 per person, including hotel and  
To speak to an agent about this package or  
airfare.  
other winter getaways, press * 8 and extension 13.  
For after-hours callers, you can set up Automated Attendant Service to play this  
prompt:  
Our hours are 8  
Please press 9 to leave a  
You have reached the ANY Travel Agency.  
to 5, Monday through Friday.  
message and we will return your call when the office  
opens.  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Overview  
For a system set for Bilingual Mode, the Day Menu Prompt should let callers  
know that they can switch from the Primary Language to the Secondary  
Language. Note that callers can also press [  
] [ ] while listening to an  
1
Automated Attendant Announcement to switch between the Primary and  
Secondary Languages. In the following example, the Primary Language is Latin  
American Spanish and the Secondary Language is U.S. English:  
Gracias por llamar a Software México. For English,  
press * 1. Si usted tiene teléfono de tonos y conoce  
el número de extensión, marquelo ahora. De lo contrario,  
espere a ser atendido por nuestra operadora.  
For after-hours callers, you can set up Automated Attendant Service to play this  
prompt:  
Gracias por llamar a Software México. For English, press  
* 1. Nuestro horario de oficina es de 9 a 14:30 horas y  
de 16 a 18 horas.  
Si usted tiene teléfono de tonos y  
conoce el número de la extensión a la que desea llamar,  
marquelo ahora. De lo contrario, espere y deje un  
mensaje con la operadora.  
NOTE:  
When the system is installed initially, Automated Attendant Service has  
this factory-set Day Menu Prompt:  
Hello, welcome to PARTNER MAIL VS. Please enter the  
extension number of the person you wish to reach or  
press 0 to reach the receptionist.  
ln addition, Automated Attendant Service has this factory-set Night Menu  
Prompt:  
Good Evening. Welcome to PARTNER MAIL VS. Please enter  
the extension number of the person you wish to reach, or  
press 9 to leave a message with the receptionist.  
Automated Attendant Service is useful for many businesses, such as car  
dealerships, insurance agencies, and stores. For example, a car dealership can  
use Automated Attendant Service to allow its customers to reach the customer  
service department directly. This frees sales people to handle customer  
transactions while the Automated Attendant Service transfers service calls to the  
appropriate department. ln this case, the Automated Attendant Service can be  
programmed to prompt the caller to enter a single digit to reach any available  
customer service representative.  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Overview  
Communications System Features Affecting  
Automated Attendant Service  
When planning Automated Attendant Service, you must choose settings for the  
following communications system features:  
Group Call Distribution. Specifies the outside lines that are to be  
answered by Automated Attendant Service.  
VMS Hunt Schedule. Specifies when the communications system is to  
route calls to the Automated Attendant Service.  
VMS Hunt Delay. Specifies whether the Automated Attendant Service is  
to provide immediate or delayed call handling.  
Transfer Return Extension. Specifies how unanswered calls are  
transferred by the voice mail system.  
Each of these features is explained briefly below. For more information about  
these communications system features, see the Programming and Use guide  
for your communications system.  
Group Call Distribution  
This feature lets you specify the outside lines for which you want Automated  
Attendant Service coverage. You can specify some or all of your lines.  
VMS Hunt Schedule  
This feature determines when the communications system is to route calls to the  
Automated Attendant Service. VMS Hunt Schedule works in conjunction with  
the communication system’s Night Service feature so that the voice messaging  
system can play the appropriate menu prompt. In other words, the menu  
prompt the caller hears depends on the VMS Hunt Schedule setting you select  
and the status of the Night Service button at the receptionist’s extension.  
You can choose one of the following VMS Hunt Schedule settings:  
Always (factory setting). Routes outside calls to Automated Attendant  
Service all the time. When Night Service is off, the Day Menu Prompt  
plays; when Night Service is on, the Night Menu Prompt plays.  
Day Only. Routes outside calls to Automated Attendant Service only  
when Night Service is off. The Day Menu Prompt plays.  
Night Only. Routes outside calls to Automated Attendant Service only  
when Night Service is on. The Night Menu Prompt plays.  
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Overview  
VMS Hunt Delay  
This option specifies either immediate or delayed call handling(see Figure 1-2):  
Immediate (factory setting). The Automated Attendant Service answers  
outside calls on the second ring and plays the Day or Night Menu  
Prompt. The receptionist can act as backup. Callers using rotary phones  
or callers requesting assistance can be transferred to the receptionist’s  
extension.  
Delayed. The Automated Attendant Service answers outside calls after  
the fourth ring. This delay gives the receptionist time to answer the call.  
The VMS Hunt Delay setting you select is used for both day and night  
operation.  
Immediate Call Handling  
Incoming Calls  
Control Unit  
PARTNER MAIL VS  
answers on  
the second ring  
Receptionist  
backs up  
PARTNER MAIL VS  
Delayed Call Handling  
Incoming Calls  
Control Unit  
Receptionist  
answers incoming  
PARTNER MAIL VS  
picks up unanswered  
calls on the fourth ring  
calls  
Figure 1-2. Immediate and Delayed Call Handling  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Overview  
Transfer Return Extension  
For extensions associated with the mail system unit, this option specifies how  
unanswered calls are transferred by the voice mail system.  
If the mail system transfers a call to an extension that has no Voice Mail  
coverage, or if Voice Mail coverage is Off, and that extension does not answer,  
the communications system transfers the call to the Transfer Return Extension.  
For extensions that do not have Voice Mail coverage, this option can be  
programmed to ensure that unanswered calls transferred by the mail system  
return to the designated extension, where they ring until answered.  
Automated Attendant Service Scenarios  
The following sample scenarios illustrate typical ways in which Automated  
Attendant Service is set up with the communications system features:  
Case 1: The receptionist is the primary call handler. Automated  
Attendant Service handles overflow.  
a.  
Use Group Call Distribution (#206) Setting 1 to identify the lines to be  
answered by Automated Attendant Service.  
Set VMS Hunt Schedule (#507) to Always.  
b.  
c. Set VMS Hunt Delay (#506) to Delayed.  
Case 2: Automated Attendant Service is the primary call handler.  
a.  
Use Group Call Distribution (#206) Setting 1 to identify the lines to be  
answered by Automated Attendant Service.  
b. Set VMS Hunt Schedule (#507) to Always.  
c.  
d.  
Set VMS Hunt Delay (#506) to Immediate.  
Set Automatic Extension Privacy (#304) to Assigned for all PARTNER  
MAIL VS extensions. (When VMS Hunt Delay is set to Immediate, you  
can use this feature to prevent users from accidentally picking up  
calls sent to the voice mail system.)  
Case 3: The receptionist answers calls during the day; Automated  
Attendant Service answers calls at night.  
a.  
Use Group Call Distribution (#206) Setting 1 to identify the lines to be  
answered by Automated Attendant Service.  
b.  
c.  
Set VMS Hunt Schedule (#507) to Night Only.  
Set VMS Hunt Delay (#506) to Immediate.  
1-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Overview  
Music On Hold  
If you use Automated Attendant Service, you also may want to use the  
communications system’s Music On Hold feature. When Music On Hold is  
Active and an audio source is connected to the system, callers waiting to be  
transferred hear music or recorded material. If Music On Hold is Not Active,  
callers hear tones, ringing, or silence (depending on how the communications  
system is set up) while they are being transferred.  
For more information, see Music On Hold and Ring on Transfer in the  
Programming and Use guide for the communications system.  
Call Answer Service  
This service offers callers the following options when they reach an extension  
that is unable to answer their call:  
If the system is in Bilingual Mode, press [  
] [ ] while listening to the  
1
personal greeting to switch between the Primary and Secondary  
Languages.  
Leave a detailed, confidential message in the called party’s mailbox.  
Press [  
Press [  
0
] to transfer to the receptionist’s extension for assistance.  
] [ ] to transfer to another system extension.  
8
Callers can press [  
0
] or [  
] [ ] before, during, or after leaving a message.  
8
NOTE:  
Until subscribers record a personal greeting for their mailbox, outside  
callers hear this factory-set message in either the System Language  
(Monolingual Mode) or the Primary Language (Bilingual Mode):  
To leave a message,  
After recording hang up or press 1  
Extension XX is not available.  
wait for the tone.  
for more options.  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Overview  
Communications System Features Affecting Call  
Answer Service  
Call Answer Service works with the following communications system features:  
VMS Extension Coverage  
Do Not Disturb  
Line Coverage  
Each of these features is explained briefly below. For more information on these  
communications system features, see the Programming and Use guide for your  
communications system.  
VMS Extension Coverage  
VMS Extension Coverage may be either automatic or manual.  
Automatic VMS Coverage: When the communications system’s  
Automatic VMS Cover feature is Assigned for an extension, intercom and  
transferred callers can leave messages or transfer to another extension  
when the called person does not answer by the fourth ring (or by the  
number of rings specified with the communications system’s VMS Cover  
Rings (#117)* feature). The system greets the caller with the subscriber’s  
personal greeting (or with the system greeting if a personal greeting is  
not recorded). If the system is in Bilingual Mode and the subscriber  
recorded a personal greeting in two languages, the caller can switch  
between the two languages by pressing [  
] [ ].  
1
Manual VMS Coverage: Regardless of the Automatic VMS Cover  
setting, the communications system allows subscribers to press a  
programmed button to turn voice mail coverage on and off at their  
extension. To make this possible, the VMS Cover feature must be  
programmed on a button with lights on the subscriber’s system phone.  
Do Not Disturb  
The Do Not Disturb button can be used to prevent calls for the extensions from  
audibly alerting (lights still flash). Subscribers (with communications system 4.0  
or later) who have VMS Extension Coverage—either automatic or manual—can  
use this communications system feature when they want calls sent to their  
mailboxes immediately.  
Line Coverage  
Line Coverage lets callers who call in on a covered line leave messages in the  
mailbox of a specific subscriber (known as the owner of the covered line). When  
a call comes in on a covered line, the system routes the caller directly to the line  
owner’s mailbox if the call is not answered. The caller has the option of leaving a  
message or transferring to another extension.  
*
VMS Cover Rings (#117) is not available on all systems. Check the Programming and Use guide  
for the communications system.  
1-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Overview  
Line ownership typically is assigned to personal lines or to lines to be used for  
outside access to the voice messaging system when Automated Attendant  
Service is not used. (Lines in the system can be assigned either Line Coverage  
or Automated Attendant Service coverage—a single line cannot be assigned  
both types of coverage.)  
Voice Mailbox Transfer  
A Voice Mailbox Transfer button can be programmed on a user’s phone to  
transfer callers directly to a subscriber’s mailbox without ringing the extension  
first. This feature is useful when a user is handling calls for a subscriber who is  
not at his or her desk.  
Voice Mail Service  
This service allows subscribers to manage their own mailboxes. With it, a  
subscriber can:  
Listen to messages, then save or delete them.  
Record a personal greeting (in Bilingual Mode, the user may record his  
or her personal greeting in both the Primary and Secondary Languages)  
Change the default password for his or her mailbox to ensure that  
messages are kept confidential.  
Forward messages with comment to another subscriber’s mailbox  
Have the system outcall a specified telephone or pager number  
according to a predefined schedule whenever a new message is  
received.  
Transfer to another extension or to the receptionist’s extension.  
A subscriber’s extension number and mailbox number are the same. When a  
caller leaves a message, the voice messaging system places the message in  
the subscriber’s mailbox and turns on the message light (if available) at the  
subscriber’s phone. If the subscriber has Outcalling privileges, the system will  
call the programmed telephone or pager number if the message is received  
during the hours specified in the subscriber’s Outcalling schedule and  
Outcalling is turned on.  
Subscribers can retrieve messages at their convenience from any touch-tone  
phone either while on-site or from an off-site location. The system informs  
subscribers of the number of new and old (saved) messages in their mailboxes,  
and plays new messages first. Subscribers can refer to Using PARTNER MAIL  
VS® for instructions on recording a personal greeting, changing a password,  
forwarding a message, specifying a telephone or pager number and schedule  
for Outcalling, and performing other Voice Mail Service procedures.  
Voice Mail Service also allows the System Manager to program the voice  
for more information.  
1-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Overview  
When subscribers call into the Voice Mail Service, they hear this factory-set  
prompt in either the System Language (Monolingual Mode) or the Primary and  
Secondary Language (Bilingual Mode):  
Welcome to PARTNER MAIL VS.  
Please enter extension  
and #. Otherwise,  
to access PARTNER Tutor, press * 4.  
The System Manager can change, on a per mailbox basis, the language  
subscribers hear after they access their mailboxes. The Mailbox Language is  
used for voice prompts for recording a personal greeting, retrieving messages,  
and other Voice Mail services. The Mailbox Language can be different from the  
System Language selected in Monolingual Mode or the Primary and Secondary  
Languages selected in Bilingual Mode.  
Mailboxes  
The voice messaging system provides a predetermined number of mailboxes  
which are assigned to extensions in order beginning with extension 10.  
For example, the system may have 10 default mailboxes for extensions 10  
through 19. If a Mailbox Expansion Card is installed, the number of default  
mailboxes is increased; for example, installation of a Mailbox Expansion Card  
could increase the number of default mailboxes to 20, for extensions 10 through  
29. Mailbox Expansion Cards can also allow for configurations consisting of four  
ports and 20 mailboxes, and four ports and 40 mailboxes.  
The System Manager can change default mailbox assignments. First, delete  
mailboxes for any extensions that do not require voice mail coverage. Then,  
create mailboxes for extensions that need them. Note that the mailbox assigned  
to extension 10, the receptionist’s extension, cannot be deleted.  
NOTE:  
Mailboxes should be deleted from extensions that connect auxiliary  
equipment (such as fax machines or doorphones) to keep the maximum  
number of mailboxes available for users and to safeguard system  
security.  
Guest Mailboxes  
The System Manager can create guest mailboxes for users who do not have  
their own phone, but still require mailboxes. If this is the case, either the  
Automated Attendant Service or system users can transfer a caller directly to  
the guest mailbox where the caller can leave a message. Guests can call the  
voice messaging system from any touch-tone phone to retrieve their messages.  
1-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Overview  
Security  
The System Manager is responsible for the security of the system. It is important  
that you fully understand and appropriately administer this product to reduce  
your risk of incurring charges that result from unauthorized use of the system.  
Under the law, you, the customer are responsible for paying part or all of those  
unauthorized calls.  
Be aware that criminals called hackers may attempt to gain unauthorized  
access to your communications system and your voice mail system. Hackers  
often try to trick a company’s employees into providing them with access to an  
outside line or an outside operator. They may also concentrate their activities in  
two areas related to the mail system:  
They try to dial into a mailbox, then execute a transfer by dialing [  
] [ ].  
8
Then they dial an access code, followed by a digit string to either direct  
dial or access a network operator to complete the call.  
They try to locate unused or unprotected mailboxes and use them as  
drop-off points for their own messages.  
System Security Guidelines  
To reduce the risk of unauthorized use of your communications and voice mail  
systems, you should  
require that the System Manager’s Password be changed from the  
factory setting. Use a hard-to-guess value.  
delete any unused mailboxes immediately.  
require all employees who have voice mailboxes to use passwords to  
protect their mailboxes.  
permit no Outcalling or permit this privilege only for those with legitimate  
business need.  
advise subscribers to change their passwords (a 4-digit password is  
recommended) when they log into the Voice Mail Service for the first time  
and frequently thereafter. Subscribers can refer to the instructions for  
changing their passwords in Using the PARTNER MAIL VS®.  
familiarize yourself with the impact of the Outcalling feature on system  
performance and security. If Outcalling is not permitted on the system,  
Outgoing Call Restriction should be set to Inside Only for the voice mail  
system extensions. It is strongly recommended that you use the  
communications system Call Restriction features (that is, Outgoing Call  
Restriction used with Allowed and Disallowed Lists) to restrict Outcalling  
monitor your call reporting system records of outgoing calls to identify  
possible system abuse.  
1-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Overview  
You should also  
provide effective physical security for the room containing your  
telecommunications equipment and the room with administrative tools,  
records, and System Administration information. These areas should be  
locked when unattended.  
provide a secure trash disposal for all sensitive information, including  
your company’s telephone directories, call accounting records, or  
anything that may supply information about your communications system.  
This trash should be shredded.  
Security Policy and User Education  
As part of your responsibility for protecting system security, you should  
establish and communicate security policies for all system users. You should  
let users know what measures they should take to protect system security and  
explain how hackers may try to gain access to the system. In particular, you  
should provide users with the following information:  
All reports of trouble, requests to move extensions, or any other  
administrative details associated with the communications system or the  
voice mail system should be handled by one person (the System  
Manager) or within one department. Anyone claiming to be a telephone  
company representative should be referred to this person or department.  
If a caller claims to be an authorized telephone company representative,  
verify his or her identity before permitting that person any access to the  
system.  
Establish well-controlled policies for passwords:  
— Establish a specific date for changing passwords (for example, the  
first of each month) and help users remember to do it.  
— Advise subscribers to use a 4-digit password.  
— Tell users that passwords should not be recycled. They should be  
hard to guess and should not contain:  
all the same numbers (for example, 4444)  
sequential characters (for example, 1234)  
personal information that can be associated with them (such as  
their name, birthdate, telephone number, or social security number)  
— Discourage the practice of writing down passwords. If a password  
needs to be written down, keep it in a secure place and never discard  
it while it is still active.  
Tell users never to program passwords onto Auto Dial buttons. Display  
phones reveal the programmed numbers.  
Educate employees that hackers may try to trick them into providing  
them with dial tone or dialing a number for them.  
1-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Overview  
Ask users to tell you if any of the following suspicious activity occurs:  
inability to log into Voice Mail  
lost mail messages or altered greetings  
inability to get an outside line  
series of calls where there is silence on the other end or the caller  
hangs up  
sudden increase in wrong numbers  
— caller complaints that your lines are busy  
callers claiming to represent the “phone” company. Ask for a callback  
number.  
callers trying to obtain sensitive information or asking for assistance in  
placing outside or long-distance calls. Ask for a callback number.  
increases in internal requests for assistance in making outside calls  
(particularly international calls or requests for dial tone).  
Make users with Outcalling privileges aware of the potential risks and  
their responsibilities.  
Never distribute the office telephone directory to anyone outside the  
company.  
Collect old office telephone directories and shred them.  
Never discuss your telephone system’s numbering plan with anyone  
outside your company.  
Any time a call appears to be suspicious, call the Technical Service  
Center at 1 800 628-2888 (in the U.S.).  
1-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
2
Contents  
2-i  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
2
This chapter provides instructions for installing the voice messaging system’s  
hardware in the communications system’s control unit.  
Before You Start  
system and communications system hardware. Then  
Make sure the communications system control unit, processor module(s),  
and line/extension modules have been installed.  
Make sure this installation meets the environmental and electrical  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Installation  
Installing the PARTNER MAIL VS  
Module  
To install the voice messaging system module in the communications system’s  
control unit:  
1.  
Turn off power to the communications system’s control unit: either pull out  
the main circuit breaker on the upper right rear corner of the control unit  
or move the on/off switch to the “off” position, or remove the power cord  
from the AC outlet.  
CAUTION:  
Failure to turn off power may damage the control unit and/or the  
voice messaging system.  
Install the voice messaging system module in the first available slot to the  
right of the last installed 206 or 400 module. Do not install the voice  
messaging system module in the first slot of the PARTNER Plus system  
control unit or the PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 system primary carrier  
2.  
NOTE:  
The voice messaging system module should always be installed  
after the 206 and 400 modules to ensure consecutive extension  
numbering. If the control unit is upgraded with more 206 or 400  
modules, the voice messaging system module should be removed,  
the new modules should be installed, and the voice messaging  
system module should be replaced in the first available slot after  
the 206 and 400 modules. The VMS Hunt Group Extensions  
and Transfer Return Extensions must then be reprogrammed  
On the PARTNER Advanced Communications System, you must install  
the voice messaging system module in the slot to the right of the  
PARTNER ACS module in the 2-slot carrier. If your system has a 5-slot  
carrier, you may install the voice messaging system module in any slot  
Push slowly but firmly in the center of the module until the module locks  
into place, and is attached to the rear of the backplane. Do not force the  
module. If it does not insert easily, remove the module, clear any  
obstruction, and reinsert it.  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installation  
the System Planner for the communications system.  
3.  
PARTNER Plus Control Unit or  
PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 Primary Carrier  
PARTNER II or PARTNER 48  
Expansion Carrier  
If PARTNER MAIL VS  
Is Installed In Slot:  
1
4
4
2
3
3
2
2-port  
Systems  
Then Assign These  
Exts. To Hunt Group 7:  
26,27 32,33 38,39 44,45 50,51 56,57  
20,21  
If PARTNER MAIL VS  
Is Installed In Slot:  
2
3
2
3
4
1
4
4-port  
Systems  
42, 43, 48, 49, 54, 55,  
30, 31, 36, 37,  
24, 25,  
Then Assign These  
Exts. To Hunt Group 7:  
18, 19,  
20,21  
38, 39 44, 45  
56, 57  
50, 51  
26, 27 32, 33  
Figure 2-1. Voice Messaging System Extensions for PARTNER Plus,  
PARTNER II, and PARTNER 48  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Installation  
2-Slot Carrier  
5-Slot Carrier  
ACS  
ACS  
Processor  
Module  
Processor  
Module  
Line  
Jacks  
Line  
Jacks  
Extension  
Jacks  
Extension  
Jacks  
If PARTNER MAIL VS  
Is Installed In Slot:  
If PARTNER MAIL VS  
Is Installed In Slot:  
3
2
4
2
1
2-port  
Systems  
2-port  
Systems  
34, 35 40, 41  
28, 29  
Then Assign These  
Exts. To Hunt Group 7:  
22, 23  
22,23  
Then Assign These  
Exts. To Hunt Group 7:  
If PARTNER MAIL VS  
Is Installed In Slot:  
If PARTNER MAIL VS  
Is Installed In Slot:  
1
4
2
3
2
4-port  
Systems  
4-port  
Systems  
32, 33, 38, 39,  
34, 35 40, 41  
Then Assign These  
Exts. To Hunt Group 7:  
20, 21, 26, 27,  
22, 23 28, 29  
Then Assign These  
Exts. To Hunt Group 7:  
20, 21,  
22, 23  
Figure 2-2. Sample Voice Messaging System Extensions for PARTNER  
Advanced Communications Systems  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installation  
(Reserved for  
Future Use)  
RS-232 Port  
(Factory Use Only)  
Power Indicator  
(Green) LED  
Slot for Optional Mailbox  
Expansion Card  
Test (Yellow) LED  
Status (Red) LED  
Hard Disk Drive  
(Green) LED  
Figure 2-3. Installing the Mailbox Expansion Card  
4. To install the Mailbox Expansion Card, insert the card in the vertical  
slot on the lower front of the voice messaging system module  
(see Figure 2-3). Make sure the arrows on the Mailbox Expansion Card  
label face up and in. Also make sure the card is pushed in all the way.  
Turn on power to the control unit. The green Power LED should light—if it  
does, skip to Step 6. If the green Power LED does not light, power down  
the control unit, reseat the voice messaging system module, then power  
up the control unit again. If the green Power LED still does not light, call  
for support as indicated on the inside front cover of this guide.  
5.  
6.  
Next, the voice messaging system module performs self-diagnostic tests.  
The LEDs work as follows:  
S t a t e  
ON  
ON  
LED  
Green Power  
Yellow Test  
Red Status  
ON for approximately 2 seconds  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installation  
7. After approximately 10 seconds when the tests are completed, the yellow  
Test LED goes off. When this occurs, check the red Status LED:  
If the red Status LED is not lit, the module passed the tests. Continue  
with Step 8.  
— If the red Status LED is lit, power down the control unit, re-install the  
Mailbox Expansion Card if it was installed in Step 4, then power up the  
control unit again. If the red Status LED comes on again, call for  
support as indicated on the inside front cover.  
After the module passes the self-diagnostic tests, the extensions  
associated with the voice messaging system module go off-hook. Two  
outside lines show red steady on system phones with those lines for  
about one minute. When the lines become idle, the voice messaging  
system is ready to receive calls.  
8.  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding Programming  
3
This chapter provides general programming information for the communications  
system and the voice messaging system. Both systems must be programmed  
so they can work together as an integrated unit. Before you begin any  
programming, you must ensure that all required communications system and  
voice messaging system planning forms described in this chapter are  
completed. You will refer to these forms during programming.  
Communications System  
Programming  
When the communications system is installed, it uses factory settings that  
reflect the most common usage of the equipment. You can change these  
settings as required to customize them for the business.  
You can program the communications system from extension 10. Some systems  
also allow programming from extension 11. Check the Programming and Use  
guide for the communications system for more information. If your system  
supports programming from both extensions, you may find it more convenient  
to program from extension 11. This capability allows the receptionist to continue  
handling calls at extension 10 while you program.  
System Programming changes settings for the system as a whole, or for  
individual lines or extensions. (Refer to the Programming and Use guide for the  
communications system for more information about System Programming  
options.)  
On some communications systems, a password may be required to enter  
System Programming mode. Check the Programming and Use guide for the  
communications system for more information.  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Understanding Programming  
Planning Forms  
Refer to the communications system’s System Planner when you are changing  
system settings, and be sure to record any changes you make. The following  
forms from the System Planner contain information about the voice messaging  
system:  
Form A: System Configuration. Contains basic information about the  
system including the line number and type of voice messaging service  
required for each line.  
Form B1: System Extensions. Contains basic information about each  
extension. This includes the type of phone or auxiliary equipment at the  
extension, and the name of the user or a description of how the extension  
is used.  
Form B2: Customized Extension Settings. Contains feature settings,  
such as Automatic VMS Cover and Automatic Extension Privacy, and  
group assignments for each extension.  
Form C: Button Assignments. Specifies which features are  
programmed on buttons for each extension. This includes VMS Cover,  
Do Not Disturb, Voice Mailbox Transfer, and Voice Mail Messages  
buttons.  
Samples of these forms and instructions for completing them are included in  
Using System Programming  
System Programming requires a system display phone at extension 10  
(or 11 if available), with a programming overlay placed over the phone’s  
dialpad. System Programming procedures are identified by # and a 3-digit  
code (for example, the procedure code for System Date is #101).  
You can program the system in one of two ways:  
Direct Method. You access a programming procedure directly by  
dialing the code for that procedure. This method works best when you  
are using only a few procedures during the programming session, and  
you know the codes. For example, press [  
system date.  
#
] [  
1
] [  
0
] [ ] to change the  
1
Cycle Method. You cycle through a sequence of procedures in  
numerical order by pressing [ Next Procedure ] or [ Prev Procedure ]. You should  
use this method when programming the communications system for the  
first time, or when you are changing a series of related settings.  
However, procedures #399, #609, and #728 are skipped when you cycle  
through procedures.  
NOTE:  
You can talk on the telephone while you program. This is useful if you  
need to call for support while programming. However, you must place the  
call before you enter programming mode, and you must use the handset  
(not the speakerphone) to talk.  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Understanding Programming  
The Programming Overlays  
During System Programming, the normal functions of several buttons on the  
phone at extension 10 (or 11 if available) change. For example, left [ Intercom ]  
becomes [ System Program ], which is the button used to enter programming mode.  
To identify these buttons while programming, place the appropriate  
programming overlay provided with the system over the dialpad of the phone at  
extension 10 or 11.  
Use the following special buttons while programming:  
[
Next Procedure ] and [ Prev Procedure ] cycle forward and backward through the  
programming procedures.  
[
Next Item ] and [ Prev Item ] cycle forward and backward through a procedure's  
parameters. A parameter is typically an outside line, an extension, or a  
telephone list entry.  
[
Next Data ] and [ Prev Data ] cycle forward and backward through the valid list  
entries. These buttons work only for fixed data, such as a line or  
extension number. They do not work for variable data such as date, time,  
password, telephone numbers, or doorphone assignments.  
[
Remove ] returns the current setting to the factory setting.  
[ Enter ] ends an entry of variable length, such as a telephone number in an  
Allowed Phone Number List.  
[
System Program ] starts the System Programming process.  
[
Central Tel Program ] starts the Centralized Telephone Programming process  
(that is, customizing individual telephones from extension 10, or 11  
if available).  
[
Feature ], when followed by [  
0
] [ ], enters or exits programming mode.  
0
Programming Mode  
To enter programming mode:  
1. At extension 10 (or 11 if available), make sure the programming overlay  
is in place over the system phone’s dialpad.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [ ].  
0
Press [ System Program ] [ System Program ].  
Enter the System Password, if required.  
Enter specific programming procedure codes.  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Understanding Programming  
Voice Messaging System  
Programming  
Before you program the voice messaging system, obtain completed copies of  
planning forms for the communications system and the voice messaging  
system. These forms provide the names, extensions, mailboxes and other  
information required to program the voice messaging system.  
Planning Forms  
You need the following forms for the voice messaging system:  
Form 1: Language. Shows the Language Mode, Monolingual or  
Bilingual. Also specifies the System Language for Monolingual Mode or  
the Primary and Secondary Language for Bilingual Mode.  
Form 2: Mailbox Assignments. Shows factory-set mailbox assignments  
with and without the Mailbox Expansion Card. Allows you to change  
mailbox assignments, to indicate whether Outcalling capability is  
assigned, and to identify the language used for each mailbox.  
Form 3: Menu Definition. Shows transfer options for Automated  
Attendant Service. Allows you to specify the extension or group number  
for a selector code transferor announcement number and to provide a  
description of that extension or group.  
or Primary Language. Shows the announcement number(s) and the  
script used to record the associated announcement(s) in the System  
Language for Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language for Bilingual  
Mode. You can record up to two announcements in Monolingual Mode  
and in the Primary Language for Bilingual Mode.  
Language. Used only if the system is set for Bilingual Mode. Shows the  
announcement number(s) and the script used to record the associated  
announcement(s) in the Secondary Language for Bilingual Mode. You  
can record up to two announcements in Bilingual Mode.  
Shows the script used to record the Day Menu Prompt in the System  
Language for Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language for Bilingual  
Mode.  
system is set for Bilingual Mode. Shows the script used to record the Day  
Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language.  
Language. Shows the script used to record the Night Menu Prompt in  
the System Language for Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language for  
Bilingual Mode.  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Understanding Programming  
system is set for Bilingual Mode. Shows the script used to record the  
Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language.  
Form 6: Line Ownership. Identifies the lines assigned VMS Line  
Coverage. Also shows for each owned line, the associated telephone  
number, the name of the subscriber who owns the line, and the owner’s  
mailbox number.  
Samples of these forms and instructions for completing them are included in  
Using System Programming  
A special login number is required to program the voice messaging system.  
The following information applies to this login:  
The login number is 99.  
99 is not an extension number.  
This login does not have an associated mailbox.  
The language associated with this login is either the System Language  
chosen for Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language chosen for  
Bilingual Mode; it cannot be changed.  
This login’s factory-set Password is 1234. If you are the System Manager,  
before you begin to program the system.  
NOTE:  
Although this login has a Password, it does not have an associated  
mailbox.  
To begin programming the voice messaging system, you make a call to the  
Voice Mail Service, enter the login and password, and select option 9 (you are  
not prompted for this option). This takes you to the Programming Main Menu  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Understanding Programming  
The Programming Main Menu  
The Programming Main Menu allows you to access the Language Mode and the  
language(s) associated with that mode, the Automated Attendant Service Menu,  
mailbox assignments, and line ownership assignments.  
Intercom  
7 7 7 )  
Call Voice Mail Service (Press  
Enter Login (Press  
9 9 #  
)
1 2 3 4 #  
)
(Press  
Enter Mailbox Password  
Select  
Programming  
Main Menu  
9 )  
(Press  
Line  
Ownership  
(Press [ 6 ])  
Mailboxes  
(Press [ 4 ])  
Automated  
Attendant  
(Press [ 3 ])  
Language  
(Press [ 1 ])  
Figure 3-1. Programming Menus  
Accessing the Programming Main Menu  
To access the Programming Main Menu:  
1. Press [ Intercom ] [  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or a programmed VMMsgs button.  
The system plays:  
Welcome to PARTNER MAIL VS. Please enter extension  
and #. Otherwise, to access PARTNER Tutor, press * 4.  
2.  
Press [  
9
] [  
9
] [ # ].  
The system plays:  
Enter password and #.  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Understanding Programming  
3.  
Enter the Password and press #. (The factory-set Password is 1234.)  
The system plays:  
System Manager.  
PARTNER MAIL VS Release 4.  
The system plays the available programming options. It does not play  
option 9 (the Programming Main Menu), which only the System Manager  
can access.  
Press [  
9
] to access the Programming Main Menu.  
4.  
The system plays:  
To program the System Language press 1, for Automated  
Attendant press 3, for mailboxes press 4, for line  
ownership press 6. If finished press * #.  
Programming Guidelines  
Once you are familiar with the voice messaging system, use these shortcuts to  
save time while programming:  
You do not have to wait for a prompt to play before entering digits for the  
next step.  
Press [  
Press [  
Press [  
] [  
] [  
] [  
#
4
] to return to the previous menu.  
] to repeat the current menu options.  
] at any point during programming to restart at the  
7
Programming Main Menu.  
Use the handset rather than the speakerphone to record prompts and  
greetings to avoid background noise in your recordings.  
To ensure that you hear voice prompts, turn off your microphone when  
programming the system using the speakerphone.  
Hang Up to exit programming.  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Initial Programming  
4
Overview  
This chapter identifies the four possible voice messaging system configurations.  
It tells you how to perform initial programming of the voice messaging and  
communications systems. The first two procedures allow you to access and  
program the voice messaging system—you must perform these procedures first  
for every installation. The next set of procedures covers voice messaging  
system programming. The last section covers how to program the  
communications system.  
The order of the procedures in this chapter enables you to program the Menu  
Definition and to record the Day and/or Night Prompts and Automated  
Attendant Announcements before the voice messaging system begins to  
handle calls—this order is recommended for voice messaging systems that are  
being added to existing communications systems. If this is a new installation,  
however, you can program the communications system first, then the voice  
messaging system if you prefer.  
In addition, you can either follow the step-by-step instructions or use the  
flowchart at the end of this manual as a quick guide. If you use the step-by-step  
instructions, note that Step 1 of each procedure for the voice messaging system  
is logging in. However, if you are already logged in, you can skip Step 1.  
Finally, some features and procedures in this chapter may not be available on  
your communications system. If you are not sure, check the Programming and  
Use guide for that system.  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Initial Programming  
Voice Mail System Configurations  
The PARTNER Mail VS supports the following configurations:  
2 voice channels (ports), 10 mailboxes (standard)  
2 ports, 20 mailboxes (requires a Mailbox Expansion Card)  
4 ports, 20 mailboxes (requires a Mailbox Expansion Card)  
4 ports, 40 mailboxes (requires a Mailbox Expansion Card)  
configurations.  
Upgrading Your Voice Mail System  
If you are upgrading your voice mail system with the addition of a Mailbox  
Expansion Card, when you return power to the system the appropriate number  
of mailboxes is activated. For example, if you are upgrading to a 4-port,  
20-mailbox configuration, the first 20 mailboxes are activated. And previously  
existing programming (including existing mailbox assignment information,  
personal greetings, and passwords) is saved. You do not need to reprogram  
the system; however, you should:  
Delete any unused mailboxes and create new ones following the  
NOTE:  
the voice messaging system. You can also play existing mailbox  
numbers and receive information on the number of existing  
mailboxes, as well as the maximum mailbox capacity for the  
current system configuration. At the Programming Main Menu,  
press [ 4 ] to receive the message indicating how many mailboxes  
currently exist and how many are allowed. For more information,  
For 4-port configurations: Add two extensions to the VMS Hunt Group  
(Extension Hunt Group 7). These additional extensions correspond to the  
middle two extensions. For example, if you are upgrading from two to  
four ports, extensions 18 and 19 would be added to extensions 20 and  
21. You must perform this task to ensure that the system functions  
instructions on how to assign the additional VMS Hunt Group Extensions.  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Initial Programming  
Initial Communications System Setup  
You must perform the first two procedures for every installation. The procedure  
for Outgoing Call Restriction is strongly recommended to ensure system  
security. For the following procedures, you need to know the extension numbers  
(in Chapter 2) show the possible extension numbers. For the extension numbers  
communications system.  
VMS Hunt Group Extensions  
You must use this procedure to assign the extensions associated with the voice  
messaging system module to Hunt Group 7. This Hunt Group, which is called  
the VMS Hunt Group, is used exclusively for the voice messaging system.  
Group 7:  
1.  
At extension 10*, press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [  
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ].  
2. Enter the System Password, if required.  
3. Press [  
#
] [  
5
] [  
0
] [ 5 ].  
4. At the Group: prompt, press [  
7
].  
5. At the Extension: prompt, enter the first PARTNER MAIL VS extension  
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned.  
6.  
7. Press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] until the next PARTNER MAIL VS extension  
8. Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned.  
repeat Steps 7 and 8 for each one.  
9.  
10.  
*
Some systems also allow programming from extension 11. Check the Programming and Use  
guide for the communications system.  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Initial Programming  
Transfer Return Extensions  
For extensions associated with the voice mail system unit, use the following  
procedure. If the voice mail system transfers a call to an extension that has no  
Voice Mail coverage, or if Voice Mail coverage is Off, and that extension does  
not answer, the communications system transfers the call to the Transfer Return  
Extension.  
For extensions that do not have Voice Mail coverage, this procedure ensures  
that unanswered calls transferred by the voice mail system return to the  
designated extension, where they will ring until they are answered.  
To assign extension 10 as the transfer return extension for the PARTNER  
1. Press [  
#
] [  
3
] [  
0
] [ 6 ]*.  
At the Extension: prompt, enter the first PARTNER MAIL VS extension  
2.  
At the Data: prompt, press [  
1
] [ ].  
0
3.  
4.  
Press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] until the next PARTNER MAIL VS extension  
5. At the Data: prompt, press [  
1
] [  
0
].  
repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each one.  
6.  
Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [ ] to exit programming.  
0
7.  
8.  
voice messaging system.  
Outgoing Call Restriction  
Use this procedure to restrict all extensions associated with the voice mail  
system unit from making outside calls. Outgoing call restriction is strongly  
recommended, in particular, to protect system security when Outcalling  
Press [  
#
] [  
4
] [  
0
] [ ].  
1
1.  
2.  
At the Extension: prompt, enter the first PARTNER MAIL VS extension  
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 2 Inside Only.  
3.  
4.  
Press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] until the next PARTNER MAIL VS extension  
Press [ Next Data ] until the appropriate value displays.  
5.  
6.  
Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each PARTNER MAIL VS extension.  
*
In some countries, the procedure code for Transfer Return Extension is #309. Check the  
Programming and Use guide for the communications system.  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Initial Programming  
7.  
Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [ 0 ] to exit programming.  
messaging system.  
NOTE:  
If Outcalling is permitted, be sure to create Allowed and Disallowed  
instructions.  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initial Programming  
Voice Messaging System  
Programming  
Language  
if any of the Language settings are changed from the factory defaults:  
If none of the Language settings is changed, skip to “Automated  
Attendant Service” and follow the instructions for Monolingual Mode.  
If any of the Language settings are changed, follow the appropriate  
procedure for either Monolingual Mode or Bilingual Mode.  
Monolingual Mode  
1. If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are already at  
the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2.  
a.  
b.  
c.  
d.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
9
9
#
Enter the Mailbox Password and press [ # ].  
Press [ ].  
9
2. Press [  
Press [  
1
2
] for Language.  
] for System Language.  
3.  
4. Press [ 6 ] to modify System Language.  
5.  
Enter the number corresponding to the System Language specified on  
Press [ 9 ] to confirm your selection.  
6.  
7. Press [  
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu.  
7
8.  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Initial Programming  
Bilingual Mode  
To change the Language Mode and the Primary and Secondary Languages as  
1.  
If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are already at  
the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2.  
a.  
b.  
c.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
9
9
#
Enter the Mailbox Password and press [ # ].  
].  
d. Press [  
9
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
Press [  
Press [  
Press [  
Press [  
Press [  
1
] for Language.  
1
] for Language Mode.  
] for Bilingual Mode.  
] for System Language.  
] for Primary Language or [  
] to modify the language.  
2
2
1
6
2
] for Secondary Language.  
7. Press [  
9.  
Press [  
9
] to confirm your selection.  
10.  
To modify the other language, press [  
Otherwise, skip this step.  
] [  
#
] and repeat Steps 6 through 9.  
11. Press [  
] [  
7
] to return to the Programming Main Menu.  
12.  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Initial Programming  
Automated Attendant Service  
Service.” Otherwise, to program Automated Attendant Service:  
If the system is set for Monolingual Mode, use the procedures below.  
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, use the procedures later in this  
chapter.  
Monolingual Mode  
Menu Definition, Day Menu Prompt, and Announcements  
It is important to understand that you must approve each element (that is, the  
Menu Definition, the Day Menu Prompt, and any Announcements, as well as  
save all of these entries (in Step 15). If you exit at any point before saving  
your approved entries, your entries will be lost. This procedure is designed  
to ensure that callers do not hear the incomplete menu while you are in the  
process of building/modifying it.  
1.  
If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are already at  
the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2.  
a. Press [ Intercom ] [  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
b.  
c.  
d.  
Press [  
9
] [  
9
] [ ].  
#
Enter the Mailbox Password and press [ # ].  
Press [ ].  
9
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
Press [  
Press [  
3
] for Automated Attendant.  
] for Day Menu.  
1
Press [ 6 ] to modify the Menu Definition and/or Day Menu Prompt.  
Enter a Selector Code for which information is specified in Column C of  
6.  
Press [ 9 ] to confirm that you are modifying this Selector Code action.  
7. Do one of the following:  
Press [  
Press [  
Press [  
1
3
5
] for Selector Code Transfer.  
] for Announcement.  
] for Direct Extension Transfer (factory-default setting).  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Initial Programming  
8. Do one of the following:  
If you chose Selector Code Transfer in Step 7, enter the extension,  
Hunt Group, or Calling Group number specified in Column C of  
Step 5. Then, press [ # ]. Go to Step 10.  
— If you chose Announcement in Step 7, enter the Announcement  
corresponds to the Selector Code entered in Step 5. Go to Step 9.  
9. To record an Announcement, lift the handset, press [ 1 ], and record the  
10.  
Repeat Steps 5 through 8 for each Selector Code for which there is  
information in Column C.  
11. Press [  
] [  
#
] to approve your entries and finish modifying the Menu  
Definition.  
12.  
If you do not want to record a Day Menu Prompt or Announcement,  
press [ # ] to approve the Menu Definition and go to Step 16.  
13. To record a Day Menu Prompt, lift the handset, press [ 1 ], and record the  
Menu Prompt from Form 4. Press [ 1 ] after recording.  
14.  
Choose an option or skip this step:  
Press [  
2
] [  
1
] to immediately re-record this Menu Prompt or  
Announcement. Begin recording immediately after the beep; press [ 1 ]  
after recording. Repeat, if desired.  
Press [  
Press [  
2
] [  
] [  
3
] to play back this Menu Prompt or Announcement.  
3
] to delete this Menu Prompt or Announcement and return  
to Step 12 to be prompted for re-recording.  
15.  
Press [ ] [ ] to approve and save the Menu Definition, the Day Menu  
#
Prompt, and any Announcements.  
16. Press [ ] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu.  
7
17.  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initial Programming  
Night Menu Prompt  
1.  
If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. if you are already at  
the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2.  
a.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
9
9
#
c.  
d
Enter the Mailbox Password and press [ # ].  
Press [ ].  
9
2.  
Press [  
3
2
6
] for Automated Attendant.  
] for Night Menu.  
3. Press [  
4. Press [  
] to modify the Night Menu Prompt.  
5.  
6.  
Press [ ] after recording.  
1
7. Choose an option or skip this step:  
Press [  
2
] [  
1
] to immediately re-record this Menu Prompt. Begin  
recording immediately after the beep; press [ 1 ] after recording.  
Repeat, if desired.  
Press [  
2
] [  
3
] to play back this Menu Prompt.  
Press [  
] [  
3
] to delete this Menu Prompt and return to Step 5 to be  
prompted for re-recording.  
8. Press [  
9.  
] [  
] [  
#
7
] to approve the Night Menu Prompt.  
Press [  
] to return to the Programming Main Menu.  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Initial Programming  
Bilingual Mode  
Menu Definition, Day Menu Prompts, and Announcements  
record the Day Menu Prompts for the Primary and Secondary Languages  
It is important to understand that you must approve each element (that is, the  
Menu Definition, the Day Menu Prompt, and any Announcements, as well as  
save all of these entries (in Step 22). If you exit at any point before saving  
your approved entries, your entries will be lost. This procedure is designed  
to ensure that callers do not hear the incomplete menu while you are in the  
process of building/modifying it. Be sure to allow yourself enough time to  
complete this procedure in its entirety.  
1. If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are already at  
the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2.  
a. Press [ Intercom ] [  
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
9
9
#
c. Enter the Mailbox Password and press [ # ].  
d. Press [ ].  
Press [ 3 ] for Automated Attendant.  
9
2.  
3.  
Press [  
1
] for Day Menu.  
4. Press [ 6 ] to modify the Menu Definition and/or Day Menu Prompts.  
5. Enter a Selector Code for which information is specified in Column C of  
Press [ 9 ] to confirm that you are modifying this Selector Code action.  
6.  
7. Do one of the following:  
Press [  
Press [  
1
3
] for Selector Code Transfer.  
] for Announcement.  
— Press [ 5 ] for Direct Extension Transfer (factory-default setting).  
8. Do one of the following:  
— If you chose Selector Code Transfer in Step 7, enter the extension,  
Hunt Group, or Calling Group number specified in Column C of  
Step 5. Then, press [ # ]. Go to Step 10.  
If you chose Announcement in Step 7, enter the Announcement  
corresponds to the Selector Code entered in Step 5. Go to Step 9.  
9. To record an Announcement, lift the handset, press [ 1 ], and record the  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Initial Programming  
10.  
Repeat Steps 5 through 8 for each Selector Code for which there is  
information in Column C.  
11. Press [  
] [ ] to approve your entries and finish modifying the Menu  
#
Definition.  
12. At this point, do one of the following:  
If you do not want to record a Day Menu Prompt or Announcement,  
press [ # ] to approve the Menu Definition and go to Step 22.  
— If you want to record the Day Menu Prompt in the Primary Language,  
continue with Step 13.  
If you want to record the Announcement in the Secondary Language,  
return to Step 17.  
— If you want to record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement in the  
Secondary Language, skip to Step 17.  
13.  
Lift the handset, press [ 1 ] and record the Menu Prompt from Form 4.  
Press [  
14. Press [  
15.  
1
] after recording.  
1
] after recording.  
Choose an option or skip this step:  
Press [  
2
] [  
1
] to immediately re-record this Menu Prompt. Begin  
recording immediately after the beep; press [ 1 ] after recording.  
Repeat, if desired.  
Press [  
Press [  
2
] [  
3
] to play back this Menu Prompt.  
] [  
3
] to delete this Menu Prompt and return to Step 13 to be  
prompted for re-recording.  
16.  
Press [ ] [ ] to approve this Day Menu Prompt.  
#
17. If you want to record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement in the  
Secondary Language, continue with Step 18; otherwise, skip to Step 21.  
Press [ 2 ] and record the Menu Prompt from Form 4A (or Announcement  
18.  
19. Press [  
1
] after recording.  
20.  
Choose an option or skip this step:  
Press [  
2
] [  
1
] to immediately re-record this Menu Prompt or  
Announcement. Begin recording immediately after the beep; press [ 1 ]  
after recording. Repeat, if desired.  
Press [  
Press [  
2
] [  
] [  
3
] to play back this Menu Prompt or Announcement.  
3
] to delete this Menu Prompt or Announcement and return  
to Step 18 to be prompted for re-recording.  
21. Press [ ] [ ] to approve this Day Menu Prompt or Announcement.  
#
22.  
Press [ # ] to approve and save all entries. The Menu Definition, Day Menu  
Prompts, and Announcements (if any) now take effect.  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initial Programming  
23.  
24.  
Press [  
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu.  
7
Night Menu Prompt  
To record the Night Menu Prompt in the Primary and Secondary Languages  
1.  
If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are already at  
the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2.  
a.  
b.  
c.  
d.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
9
9
#
Enter the Mailbox Password and press [ # ].  
Press [ ].  
9
2. Press [  
3
] for Automated Attendant.  
] for Night Menu.  
3.  
4.  
Press [  
Press [  
2
6
] to modify the Night Menu Prompt.  
5. At this point, do one of the following:  
If you want to record the Night Menu Prompt in the Primary Language,  
continue with Step 6.  
To record the Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language, skip to  
Step 11.  
6.  
7.  
8.  
Press [ ] after recording.  
Choose an option or skip this step:  
1
Press [  
2
] [ ] to immediately re-record this Menu Prompt. Begin  
1
recording immediately after the beep; press [ 1 ] after recording.  
Repeat, if desired.  
Press [  
Press [  
2
] [  
3
] to play back this Menu Prompt.  
] [  
3
] to delete this Menu Prompt and return to Step 6 to be  
prompted for re-recording.  
9. Press [ ] [ ] to approve this Night Menu Prompt.  
#
10. If you want to record the Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language,  
continue with Step 11; otherwise, skip to Step 15.  
11.  
Press [ 2 ] and record the Menu Prompt from Form 5A.  
12. Press [ ] after recording.  
1
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Initial Programming  
13.  
Choose an option or skip this step:  
Press [  
2
] [  
1
] to immediately re-record this Menu Prompt. Begin  
recording immediately after the beep; press [ 1 ] after recording.  
Repeat, if desired.  
Press [  
Press [  
2
] [  
] [  
3
] to play back this Menu Prompt.  
3
] to delete this Menu Prompt and return to Step 11 to be  
prompted for re-recording.  
14. Press [ ] [ ] to approve this Night Menu Prompt.  
#
15. Press [ # ] to approve all changes. The Night Menu Prompts now take  
effect.  
Press [  
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu.  
7
16.  
17.  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initial Programming  
Voice Mail Service  
if mailboxes are numbered differently from the factory defaults, if any mailbox is  
to be deleted, or if a Mailbox Language is changed for any mailbox.  
If mailboxes are not numbered differently, no mailbox is deleted, no  
mailbox’s language is changed, and no Outcalling is assigned, skip to  
“Line Ownership.”  
If any mailbox is to be deleted, use the procedure below.  
If mailboxes are numbered differently, first use the procedure below to  
delete all mailboxes from extensions that do not require coverage; then  
extensions that require coverage.  
section.  
Deleting a Mailbox  
NOTE:  
The receptionist’s mailbox (at extension 10) cannot be deleted.  
1. If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are already at  
the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2.  
a.  
b.  
c.  
d.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
] [  
7
] [ ] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
7
9
9
#
Enter the Mailbox Password and press [  
Press [ ].  
] for Mailboxes.  
#
].  
9
Press [  
4
2.  
followed by [ ].  
#
Press [ ] [ ] to delete the mailbox.  
3
4.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
8.  
Press [ 9 ] to confirm mailbox deletion.  
Repeat Steps 3 through 5 for each mailbox to be deleted.  
Press [  
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu.  
7
this chapter.  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Initial Programming  
Creating a Mailbox  
1. If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are already at  
the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2.  
a. Press [ Intercom ] [  
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
9
9
#
c.  
d.  
Enter the Mailbox Password and press [ # ].  
Press [ ].  
] for Mailboxes.  
9
2. Press [  
4
3.  
followed by [ # ].  
4.  
Press [  
4
] to create this mailbox.  
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each mailbox to be created.  
6.  
7.  
Press [  
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu.  
7
Modifying a Mailboxs Language  
1.  
If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are already at  
the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
a.  
b.  
Press [  
9
] [  
9
] [ # ].  
c. Enter the Mailbox Password and press [ # ].  
d. Press [  
9
].  
2. Press [ ] for Mailboxes.  
4
3.  
4.  
Enter the number of a mailbox whose language is to change as indicated  
Press [  
6
] for Mailbox Language.  
5. Press [ 6 ] to modify Mailbox Language.  
6.  
Enter the number corresponding to the Mailbox Language specified on  
7. Press [  
9
] to confirm.  
8. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 for each mailbox whose language is to be  
changed.  
9. Press [  
10.  
] [  
7
] to return to the Programming Main Menu.  
in this chapter.  
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Initial Programming  
Assigning Outcalling Privileges  
When the system is first installed, the Outcalling feature is not assigned to any  
mailbox.  
CAUTION:  
Before you assign mailboxes Outcalling privileges, you should consider  
the several system performance and security issues: If the privilege is  
assigned to a majority of users and their message traffic is heavy, system  
performance could be adversely affected. Outcalling attempts could be  
delayed. in rare instances, an Outcall may not be performed if it is  
delayed beyond the scheduled Outcalling period.  
Additionally, there are no restrictions on the Outcalling numbers entered  
by subscribers. Therefore, it is strongly recommended that you limit the  
number of subscribers who have the Outcalling privilege. And call  
restrictions should be used for the communications system. See  
1. If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are already at  
the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2.  
a.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
9
9
#
Enter the Mailbox Password and press [ # ].  
c .  
d . Press [  
Press [ ] for Mailboxes.  
9
].  
4
2.  
3.  
Enter the number of a mailbox whose Outcalling permission is to change  
4.  
Press [  
5
9
] for Outcalling Administration.  
5. Press [  
] to turn on the Outcalling feature.  
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 5 for each mailbox whose Outcalling permission  
is to be changed.  
7. Press [  
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu.  
7
8.  
NOTE:  
Although you have assigned Outcalling for a specific mailbox, the  
subscriber must specify a telephone or pager number, and turn  
outcalling on before this feature will function. Subscribers may also  
establish an Outcalling schedule (optional).  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Initial Programming  
Line Ownership  
Assigning Line Ownership  
1. If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are already at  
the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2.  
a. Press [ Intercom ] [  
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
9
9
#
Enter the Mailbox Password and press [ # ].  
c.  
d.  
Press [  
9
].  
Press [  
Press [  
6
4
] for Line Ownership.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
] to assign Line Ownership.  
followed by [ # ].  
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each owned line.  
7. Hang up to exit voice messaging system programming.  
4-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Initial Programming  
Communications System  
Programming  
Automated Attendant Service  
communications system.  
VMS–AA. If so, use this section to program Automated Attendant Service;  
Group Call Distribution  
Use this procedure to specify the outside lines on which Automated Attendant  
Service is required.  
Group 7:  
1. At extension 10*, press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [  
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ].  
2. Enter the System Password if required.  
.
Press [  
#
] [  
2
] [  
0
] [  
6
]
3.  
4. At the Group: prompt, press [  
7
].  
At the Line: prompt, enter the first VMS-AA line specified in the Line  
5.  
6.  
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned.  
7. To program another line, press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] until the appropriate  
line number displays.  
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 ASSigned.  
8.  
10.  
*
Some systems also allow programming from extension 11. Check the Programming and Use  
guide for the communications system.  
In some cuntries, the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is #205. Check the  
Programming and Use guide for the communications system.  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Initial Programming  
VMS Hunt Delay  
To change the VMS Hunt Delay setting from Immediate to Delayed as specified  
1.  
2.  
Press [  
#
] [  
5
] [  
0
] [ ].  
6
Press [ Next Data ] until the appropriate value displays.  
3. Continue with “VMS Hunt Schedule” on the next page.  
Automatic Extension Privacy  
If VMS Hunt Delay is set to Immediate, use this procedure to prevent users from  
accidentally picking up calls sent to the voice messaging system.  
To set Automatic Extension Privacy (#304) to Assigned for the PARTNER MAIL  
1. Press [  
#
] [  
3
] [  
0
] [ 4 ].  
2. Enter the first PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on  
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned.  
3.  
4. Press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] until the next PARTNER MAIL VS extension  
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned.  
5.  
repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each one.  
7.  
Continue with “VMS Hunt Schedule” below.  
VMS Hunt Schedule  
To change the VMS Hunt Schedule setting from Always to Day Only or Night  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Press [  
#
] [  
5
] [  
0
] [ ].  
7
Press [ Next Data ] until the appropriate value displays.  
4-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Initial Programming  
Night Service  
procedure below.  
To program Night Service on a button with lights at extension 10 as specified on  
1. Press [  
#
] [  
5
] [  
0
] [ 3 ].  
2. At this point, do one of the following:  
— If you want to assign Night Service to the first available button on the  
system phone, press [ Next Data ] until the display reads:  
Night Service  
1 Assigned-Ext10  
Go to Step 3.  
— If you want to assign Night Service to a specific button*, press [ 3 ].  
The display reads:  
Night Service  
3 Select Button  
Press the desired programmable button with lights to assign Night  
Service to that button.  
3.  
Label the Night Service button at extension 10.  
4. Continue with “Music On Hold” below.  
Music On Hold  
If desired, program Music On Hold. See the Programming and Use guide for  
the communications system for instructions.  
*
Select button (option 3) is not available on all systems. Check the Programming and Use guide  
for the communications system.  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Initial Programming  
Disallowed Phone Numbers  
If Outcalling is permitted, a Disallowed Phone Number List (#404) can be  
created to restrict calls.  
Creating a Disallowed Phone Number List  
Number List is needed for Outcalling. If so, continue with the procedures in this  
To create a list of Disallowed Phone Numbers:  
1. Press [  
#
] [  
4
] [  
0
] [ 4 ].  
At the List Number: prompt, enter the list number (1-4).  
2.  
At the Entry: prompt, select a list entry (01-10).  
3.  
prompt, enter the first number.  
4. At the Data---------------  
5.  
To save the number in memory, you must press [ Enter ].  
6. At this point:  
— To change the number you just entered, press [ Remove ] and repeat  
Steps 4 and 5.  
— To delete the number you just entered, press [ Remove ].  
— To enter other numbers in this list, press [ Next Item ] and repeat Steps 4  
and 5.  
Assigning the Disallowed Phone Number List  
The Disallowed Phone Number List that was created for Outcalling should be  
assigned to the extension(s) that are connected to the Outcalling port.  
To assign a Disallowed Phone Number List to the extensions:  
1. Press [  
#
] [  
4
] [  
0
] [ 5 ].  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
Enter the number of the extension to be programmed.  
Enter the list number (1-4).  
To assign the list, press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned.  
To save the number in memory, you must press [ Enter ].  
To program another extension, press [ Next Procedure ] [ Prev Procedure ] and  
repeat from Step 2.  
4-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Initial Programming  
Allowed Phone Numbers  
If Outcalling is permitted, an Allowed Phone Number List (#407) can be created  
to identify numbers to which Outcalling is allowed.  
Creating an Allowed Phone Number List  
Number List is needed for Outcalling. If so, continue with the procedures in this  
NOTE:  
If the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions were restricted to Inside Only using  
Outgoing Call Restriction (#401), Outcalling will not work unless an  
Allowed Phone Number List is created and assigned. Outcalls can be  
made only to the numbers included in the list.  
To create a list of Allowed Phone Numbers:  
Press [  
#
] [  
4
] [  
0
] [ ].  
7
1.  
2.  
At the List Number: prompt, enter the list number (1-4).  
3. At the Entry: prompt, select a list entry (01-10).  
prompt, enter the first number.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
At the Data---------------  
To save the number in memory, you must press [ Enter ].  
At this point:  
— To change the number you just entered, press [ Remove ] and repeat  
Steps 4 and 5.  
To delete the number you just entered, press [ Remove ].  
To enter other numbers in this list, press [ Next Item ] and repeat Steps 4  
and 5.  
Assigning the Allowed Phone Number List  
The Allowed Phone Number List that was created for Outcalling should be  
assigned to the extension(s) that are connected to the Outcalling port.  
To assign the Allowed Phone Number List to the extensions:  
1. Press [  
#
] [  
4
] [  
0
] [ 8 ].  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
Enter the list number (1-4).  
To assign the list, press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned.  
To save the number in memory, you must press [ Enter ].  
To program another extension, press [ Next Procedure ] [ Prev Procedure ] and  
repeat from Step 2.  
7.  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Initial Programming  
Call Answer Service  
communications system.  
extension numbers appear in the VMS-Mail column, use “Line Coverage”  
on the next page to program personal lines for Call Answer Service.  
to see if Automatic VMS Cover is assigned to any extensions. If it is, refer  
If neither VMS-Mail for personal lines or Automatic VMS Cover is  
specified, skip to “Telephone Button Programming.”  
Line Coverage  
If check marks appear for any lines in this column, use the procedure in  
“VMS Line Coverage” below.  
If extension numbers are specified for any lines in this column, use the  
procedure in “Line Coverage Extension” below.  
VMS Line Coverage  
Group 7:  
1. Press [  
#
] [  
2
] [  
0
] [ 6 ]*.  
At the Group: prompt, press [  
7
].  
2.  
3.  
At the Line: prompt, enter the first line checked in the VMS-Mail  
column.  
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 3 VMS Line Cover.  
4.  
5. To program another line, press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] until the appropriate  
line number displays.  
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 3 VMS Line Cover.  
6.  
7.  
8. If extension numbers are specified for any lines in this column, use the  
*
In some countries, the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is #205. Check the  
Programming and Use guide for the communications system.  
4-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Initial Programming  
Line Coverage Extension  
To assign line coverage for the extension numbers specified in the VMS-Mail  
1.  
2.  
Press [  
#
] [  
2
] [  
0
] [ ]*.  
8
At the Line: prompt, enter the first line for which an extension is  
3. At the Data: prompt, enter the number of the extension specified in the  
VMS-Mail column.  
4.  
To program another line, press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] until the appropriate  
line number displays.  
5. At the Data: prompt, enter the number of the extension specified in the  
VMS-Mail column.  
6.  
7.  
Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each VMS-Mail line for which an extension  
Continue with the next section, “Automatic VMS Cover.”  
Automatic VMS Cover  
it is, follow the procedure below. If not, skip to “VMS Cover Rings.”  
To change the Automatic VMS Cover setting for an extension to Assigned as  
1. Press [  
#
] [  
3
] [  
1
] [  
0
].  
2. Enter the number of the first extension to which Automatic VMS Cover is  
to be assigned.  
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned.  
3.  
4.  
To program another extension, press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] until the  
extension number shows on the display.  
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned.  
5.  
6.  
Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each extension to which Automatic VMS Cover  
is to be assigned.  
7.  
*
Extension Line Coverage (#208) is not available on all systems. Check the Programming and Use  
guide for the communications system.  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Initial Programming  
VMS Cover Rings  
factory setting of 3. If it is, follow the procedure below beginning with  
Step 1. If not, skip to Step 3 of the procedure below.  
To change the number of times calls ring before they are sent to the voice  
Press [  
#
] [  
1
] [  
1
] [ 7 ].  
1.  
] [ ] to exit programming mode.  
Continue with the next section, “Telephone Button Programming.”  
3. Press [ Feature ] [  
0
0
4.  
Telephone Button Programming  
Before you begin, locate Form C of the System Planner for the communications  
system. Be sure you have a version of the form for each subscriber’s phone.  
Use this section to program buttons on subscribers’ phones, including the  
receptionist’s phone. This section uses Centralized Telephone Programming.  
When you are finished programming, be sure to label all buttons on  
subscribers’ phones.  
VMS Cover  
This button allows the subscriber to turn voice mail coverage on and off.  
Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [  
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ] [ Central Tel Program ].  
1.  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed.  
Press a programmable button with lights.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
Press [ Feature ] [  
1
] [  
].  
5
At this point, do one of the following:  
Go to Step 3 of the next procedure to program another button for this  
extension.  
Press [ Central Tel Program ] and go to Step 2 of any button programming  
procedure in this section to program a button for a different extension.  
Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [ 0 ] to exit.  
*
VMS Cover Rings (#117) is not available on all systems. Check the Programming and Use guide  
for the communications system.  
In some countries, the feature code for Voice Mailbox Transfer is [ 1 ] [ 6 ]. Check the Programming  
and Use guide for the communications system.  
4-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Initial Programming  
Do Not Disturb  
Used in conjunction with either automatic VMS cover or manual VMS cover, this  
button lets subscribers send callers immediately to his or her mailbox (instead  
of ringing the extension first).  
1. Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [  
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ] [ Central Tel Program ].  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
Press a programmable button with lights.  
Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [ 1 ].  
At this point, do one of the following:  
Go to Step 3 of the next procedure to program another button for this  
extension.  
Press [ Central Tel Program ] and go to Step 2 of any button programming  
procedure in this section to program a button for a different extension.  
Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [  
0
] to exit.  
Voice Mailbox Transfer  
This button lets any system user transfer calls directly to a subscriber’s mailbox,  
without ringing the extension first.  
1.  
2.  
Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [  
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ] [ Central Tel Program ].  
Enter the number of the extension to be programmed.  
3. Press a programmable button.  
4.  
5.  
Press [ Feature ] [  
1
] [ ]*.  
4
At this point, do one of the following:  
Go to Step 3 of the next procedure to program another button for this  
extension.  
Press [ Central Tel Program ] and go to Step 2 of any button programming  
procedure in this section to program a button for a different extension.  
Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [ 0 ] to exit.  
*
In some countries, the feature code for Voice Mailbox Transfer is [ 1 ] [ 5 ]. Check the Programming  
and Use guide for the communications system.  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Initial Programming  
Voice Mail Messages  
This intercom Auto Dial button allows the subscriber to access the voice  
messaging system with the touch of one button.  
Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [  
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ] [ Central Tel Program ].  
1.  
2. Dial the number of the extension to be programmed.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
Press a programmable button.  
Press left [ Intercom ] [  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
].  
At this point, do one of the following:  
Press [ Central Tel Program ] and go to Step 2 of any button programming  
procedure in this section to program a button for a different extension.  
Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [ 0 ] to exit.  
4-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Initial Programming  
Verifying System Operation  
After you finish programming the voice messaging system and the  
communications system, you should perform the tests described in this section  
to verify system operation.  
If your system allows programming from extension 11*, you should perform  
these tests from extension 11 to keep extension 10 free for the receptionist to  
handle calls.  
Voice Mail Service  
Make a call to the VMS Hunt Group by pressing [ Intercom ] [  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the  
programmed VMMsgs button. You should hear the Voice Mail Service greeting:  
Welcome to PARTNER MAIL VS. Please enter extension  
and #. Otherwise, to access PARTNER Tutor, press * 4.  
Automated Attendant Service  
If the VMS Hunt Schedule is set for Day Only or Always, follow the  
procedure for Day Menu.  
If the VMS Hunt Schedule is set for Night Only, follow the procedure for  
Night Menu.  
Day Menu  
1. Make sure the Night Service button at extension 10 is off.  
2. Call in on a line answered by the Automated Attendant Service.  
3. If the system is set for:  
Immediate, Automated Attendant Service should answer the call on  
the second ring.  
Delayed, Automated Attendant Service should answer the call after  
the fourth ring.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
Listen for the Day Menu Prompt.  
After the prompt, choose an option from the day menu.  
Make sure your call is transferred to the appropriate extension or group,  
or the correct Announcement is played.  
7. Repeat Steps 2 through 6 for each option on the day menu.  
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, press [ ] [ ] to check the Day  
1
8.  
Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language. You should also hear any  
recorded Announcement.  
*
Some systems allow programming from extension 11. Check the Programming and Use guide  
for the communications system.  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Initial Programming  
9.  
Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each line that has Automated Attendant  
Service coverage.  
10.  
If the VMS Hunt Schedule is set for Always, continue with “Night Menu”  
below.  
Night Menu  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Make sure the Night Service button at extension 10 is on.  
Call in on a line answered by the Automated Attendant Service.  
If the system is set for:  
Immediate, Automated Attendant Service should answer the call on  
the second ring.  
Delayed, Automated Attendant Service should answer the call after  
the fourth ring.  
Listen for the Night Menu Prompt.  
4.  
5.  
If you already tested the Day Menu, go to Step 8. Otherwise, after the  
prompt, choose an option from the night menu.  
6.  
Make sure your call is transferred to the appropriate extension or group,  
or the correct announcement is played.  
7.  
8.  
Repeat Steps 2 through 6 for each option on the night menu.  
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, press [  
] [ ] to check the Night  
1
Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language. You should also hear any  
recorded Announcement.  
4-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Initial Programming  
Call Answer Service  
VMS Extension Coverage  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Press the Do Not Disturb button at the appropriate destination extensions  
to quickly route your test calls to Call Answer Service.  
For extensions that do not have Automatic VMS Cover, turn on coverage  
by pressing the VMS Cover button at those extensions.  
Call the first extension that has VMS coverage (either automatic or  
manual). If Do Not Disturb is on at the extension, Call Answer Service  
should answer the call after one ring and you should hear the default  
greeting for that mailbox. (If Do Not Disturb is not on, the call rings at the  
extension before Call Answer Service answers it.)  
4. Repeat this procedure for every extension that has voice mail coverage.  
VMS Line Coverage  
Call in on the first line that is programmed for VMS Line Cover.  
Call Answer Service should answer the call on the fifth ring and the  
factory-set greeting should prompt you to leave a message in that line  
owner’s mailbox.  
1.  
2.  
Repeat this procedure for every line that has VMS Line Cover.  
Line Coverage Extension  
1. Make sure VMS Cover is on at the owner’s extension.  
2.  
Call in and make sure the call goes to VMS Cover by the number of rings  
specified by VMS Cover Rings (#117)*.  
3.  
Verify that you hear the factory-set mailbox greeting for the line owner.  
4. Repeat this procedure for every Line Coverage extension.  
*
VMS Cover Rings (#117) is not available on all systems. Check the Programming and Use guide  
for the communications system.  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
System Management  
5
This chapter provides the programming procedures you can use to make  
changes to the voice messaging system to reflect changes in your company.  
Most changes you make will occur because of personnel changes. The  
following list identifies areas of system programming that you are likely to  
change as you manage the system on an on-going basis:  
Language. Allows you to change the Language Mode (Monolingual or  
Bilingual) and the language(s) supported by that mode.  
Automated Attendant Service. Allows you to change the prompt that  
outside callers hear when the Automated Attendant answers calls and to  
redefine menu options for transferring outside callers to specific  
destinations and for changing announcements that callers can choose to  
hear. Also allows you to specify new lines for Automated Attendant  
Service coverage, if you add new lines to your system.  
Mailbox Assignments. Allows you to delete and create mailboxes, reset  
mailboxes and subscriber’s passwords to factory settings, assign/ cancel  
Outcalling privileges for a subscriber’s mailbox, and change the  
language a subscriber hears when using Voice Mail Service.  
Line Coverage. Allows you to modify line coverage using either VMS  
Line Coverage or Extension Line Coverage.  
Telephone Button Programming. Allows you to program buttons on  
subscriber’s system phones for convenient use of voice messaging  
system features.  
If you are a new System Manager, you should review the following section for  
rest of this chapter on an as-needed basis. Also, if you have not done so  
messaging system and communications system programming.  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
System Management  
General Information  
This section tells you how to change the System Manager’s password, which is  
required for changing voice messaging system settings. It also provides  
information that you should share with all system users and other information  
that is specifically for the receptionist at extension 10.  
Changing Your Password  
The factory setting for Iogin 99’s (the System Manager’s) Password is 1234.  
To prevent unauthorized programming of the system, you should change the  
default password immediately after installation or any time the password has  
been reset. You can assign up to four digits for a Password. It is recommended  
that you create a Password from random, non-sequential digits.  
If you change the Password and forget it, you must contact the BCS Technical  
Service Center at 1 800 628-2888 or call your Lucent Technologies’  
Representative or local Authorized Dealer for instructions on how to reset the  
Password.  
To change the Password for login 99:  
1.  
2.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
9
9
#
3. Enter the existing password (for example, 1234) and press [ # ].  
4. Press [ ] to change the password.  
5
The prompt asks you to enter your new password.  
Enter up to four digits for the new password and press [ # ].  
The prompt asks you to re-enter your new password.  
5.  
6. Enter your new password again followed by [ # ].  
The new password is now active.  
7. Hang up to quit.  
5-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Management  
Training Co-Workers  
Language  
You should let system users know about the following language options:  
You can change the language of voice prompts that a subscriber hears  
when recording a personal greeting, retrieving messages, and other  
Voice Mail services. This language can be different from the System  
Language set for Monolingual Mode or the Primary and Secondary  
Languages set for Bilingual Mode.  
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, subscribers can record two  
personal greetings: one in the Primary Language and a second in the  
Secondary Language. They should include a sentence early in the  
greetings that lets callers know that they can switch to the other language  
by pressing [  
] [ ] while the greeting is playing.  
1
Outcalling  
You should let system users know that they can turn this feature on or off,  
retrieve their messages from a touch-tone phone, as well as enter and change  
their Outcalling number and schedule. Instructions for performing these tasks  
are provided in Using the PARTNER MAIL VS® Voice Messaging System.  
In addition, you should provide users with the following information about the  
Outcalling feature:  
Although you are responsible for assigning Outcalling privileges to a  
subscriber’s mailbox, the subscriber must turn on Outcalling and specify  
an Outcalling number. Otherwise, the system does not notify subscribers  
when new messages have arrived in their mailboxes.  
If the subscriber is logged into the system, the system does not place an  
outcall.  
If the subscriber disconnects from the system without listening to a new  
message, the outcall is placed according to schedule.  
The Outcalling number may contain up to 60 digits, including the * and #  
symbols. (The * represents a 1.5-second pause.)  
The “9” dialed to get an outside line must be included in the Outcalling  
number. And a pause (*) should be included after the “9.”  
Subscribers may also specify a schedule (that is, a start time and end  
time) for Outcalling. For example, they may direct the system to outcall  
only during the hours of 7:30 p.m. to 8:00 a.m. Otherwise, the default  
schedule is 24 hours.  
The start and end times entered by a user are based on a 24-hour clock;  
however, the voice playback of these times is based on the system  
language selection of 12 or 24-hour format. In the example above,  
the subscriber would enter the start time of 7:30 p.m. as 1930# and  
8:00 a.m. as 0800#.  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
System Management  
If a message arrives at a subscriber’s mailbox after the specified  
Outcalling time interval, Outcalling notification for that message is not  
initiated at the next Outcalling time interval.  
The system attempts to outcall three times within a minimum time interval  
of 15 minutes between attempts. However, during heavy message traffic  
periods the time interval may be longer.  
For a pager/beeper number:  
Subscribers can program a callback number as part of the Outcalling  
number.  
— Subscribers are advised to enter several pauses (where each pause  
is represented by a * sign) after the Outcalling number (before  
entering their PIN and/or callback number) to allow the paging system  
sufficient time to answer. Subscribers should experiment to determine  
the correct number of pauses needed after the pager service number.  
It is important to ensure that enough time is allowed for the call to be  
dialed and answered before additional information (such as the PIN or  
callback number) is dialed.  
It is strongly recommended that subscribers verify that the system can  
function properly with the Outcalling number as it is entered.  
Subscribers should leave a message in their own mailbox during a  
scheduled Outcalling period to ensure that the system places the call  
to their beeper.  
For a telephone number:  
After the system has sent all the digits of the Outcalling number, the  
system plays a message that announces the subscriber’s mailbox  
number and notification that a new message has arrived. It also  
instructs the subscriber how to access the new message and how to  
cancel the Outcalling notification. This message is repeated five times  
unless it is interrupted by the subscriber.  
The subscriber may make up to three attempts to log in during the  
outcall before the system disconnects.  
A subscriber can cancel Outcalling for a new message without  
logging in or listening to the new message by pressing [  
listening to the Outcalling notification message.  
] [ ] when  
#
5-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Management  
Using the Tutor Feature  
Tutor is an “on-line help” feature that allows all system users (not just voice  
messaging system subscribers) to easily access and listen to information on  
commonly-used communications system features. You should let system users  
know about this feature and recommend that users stick the Tutor Service label  
(provided with the voice messaging system hardware) into the depression for  
the handset mouthpiece on the base of their system phone.  
To access the Tutor menu, users simply call the voice messaging system by  
dialing [ Intercom ] [  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] and enter [  
] [ 4 ] after they hear the Please enter  
extension prompt. Voice prompts request the user to enter topic and  
subtopic numbers. The available topics are:  
1 Autodial Features  
3 Fixed Features  
1
2
Transfer  
1 Last Number Redial  
2 Save Number Redial  
3 Personal Speed Dial  
4 Intercom Auto Dial  
5 Outside Auto Dial  
Conference  
4 About Your Phone  
1 Buttons and Lights  
2 Display  
2 Internal Calls  
3 Speakerphone  
4
5
Volume  
1 Hands Free Answer on Intercom  
2 Voice Interrupt On Busy  
3 Group Paging  
Ring Patterns  
Information about each subtopic is presented in short, easy to understand  
segments. After a segment plays, the user hears one beep or two beeps:  
One beep means that there is more information about the subtopic. The  
user can press [  
next segment.  
] [  
4
] to replay the previous segment or [  
#
] to play the  
Two beeps indicate the end of the information about the subtopic. The  
user can press [ ] [ ] to replay the previous segment or [ ] to return to  
4
#
the Tutor Main Menu.  
NOTE:  
Tutor’s prompts play in either the System Language selected for  
Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language selected for Bilingual Mode.  
This cannot be changed.  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Management  
Receptionists Responsibilities  
After the voice messaging system is installed, the receptionist at extension 10  
should be aware of certain interactions between the voice messaging system  
and the receptionist’s extension. Use the following list as a guide when you  
explain these interactions to the receptionist:  
The receptionist’s extension is factory set as extension 10 and cannot be  
changed. The mailbox for this extension can handle up to 60 minutes of  
stored messages (or 120 messages).  
When the Automated Attendant Service answers outside calls, the  
receptionist will receive calls from any caller who presses [ 0 ] or stays on  
the line after hearing the menu prompt. “VMS” shows on the display of  
the receptionist’s phone to identify calls transferred by the voice  
messaging system.  
The personal greeting recorded at the receptionist’s mailbox should be  
more general than personal, since this mailbox is the destination for  
business calls when the receptionist is not available.  
If the receptionist requests a personal mailbox, you can create a guest  
instructions. Once the guest mailbox is created, the receptionist should  
tell people who might call to dial the extension number of the guest  
mailbox to leave personal messages when they call and hear the  
Automated Attendant Service prompt.  
Additionally, the receptionist can record a note on the personal greeting  
at extension 10 to notify callers of the guest mailbox. For example, the  
personal greeting for extension 10 can also say “If you would like to leave  
a personal message for Ms. Smith, dial [  
] [  
8
] [  
3
] [ 3 ].” In this example, 33  
represents the 2-digit extension number of the guest mailbox. Remind  
the receptionist to log in to the guest mailbox regularly to check for  
messages, since the guest mailbox does not have an associated phone  
with a message waiting light.  
If Automatic VMS Cover is not assigned to extension 10, you should  
program a VMS Cover button and a Do Not Disturb button on the system  
phone at extension 10. Then instruct the receptionist to press both the  
VMS Cover and Do Not Disturb buttons (to turn the features on)  
whenever the receptionist leaves the desk or leaves for the day. This  
ensures that any calls routed to extension 10 when the receptionist is  
away are immediately covered by the voice messaging system. If the  
receptionist has Automatic VMS Cover, program only the Do Not Disturb  
button at the extension.  
If selector code 9 on the Automated Attendant Service menu is left at the  
factory setting (which is highly recommended), callers can be routed  
directly to the receptionist’s mailbox to leave a message. If this is the  
case, let the receptionist know that he or she should review the  
messages each morning and distribute them to the appropriate people.  
5-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management  
Group Calling Tips  
It is important to note that voice mail coverage is not provided for group calls. If  
your system is set up for group transfer, be sure that the receptionist is aware of  
the following items:  
If the Automated Attendant Service transfers a call to a Hunt Group or  
Calling Group*, and all members in the group are busy (members are  
either on the phone or have Do Not Disturb on), the call is transferred to  
the receptionist’s extension. When callers transfer to a busy group, they  
hear Music On Hold, tones, ringing, or silence (depending on how the  
communications system is set up) until the receptionist answers.  
If the Automated Attendant Service transfers a call to a Calling Group  
and the call is not answered, the call is transferred to the receptionist’s  
extension after the programmed number of transfer return rings. The call  
will not be sent to the voice mailbox.  
If the Automated Attendant Service transfers a call to a Hunt Group that  
has only one available member and that member does not answer the  
call, the call is transferred to the receptionist’s extension after the  
programmed number of transfer return rings. The call will not be sent to  
the voice mailbox.  
*
Calling Groups are not available on all systems. Check the Programming and Use guide for the  
communications system.  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
System Management  
Language  
You can choose the Language Mode, either Monolingual or Bilingual, and the  
Language(s) used by that mode (see Figure 5-1). Monolingual Mode supports a  
single System Language that callers hear when they call in to the voice  
messaging system. Bilingual Mode supports two languages, a Primary  
Language and a Secondary Language. Callers who call in to a voice messaging  
system set for Bilingual Mode, hear the Automated Attendant Service menu  
prompt, announcements, and mailbox greetings in the Primary Language, but  
have the option of switching to the Secondary Language by pressing [ ] [ 1 ].  
Programming  
Main Menu  
(Press 9 )  
Language  
(Press [ 1 ])  
System  
Language  
Language  
Mode  
(Press [ 2 ])  
(Press [ 1 ])  
Monolingual  
Bilingual  
Mode  
(Press [ 2 ])  
Mode  
Yes  
No  
Bilingual  
Mode?  
(Press [ 1 ])  
Play System  
Language  
(Press [ 2 ])  
Modify System  
Language  
(Press [ 6 ])  
Modify Primary  
Language  
(Press[ 1 ][ 6 ])  
Play Primary  
Language  
(Press[ 1 ][ 2 ])  
Modify  
Play Secondary  
Secondary  
Language  
(Press[ 2 ][ 6 ])  
Language  
(Press[ 2 ][ 2 ])  
Figure 5-1. Language Menu  
5-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management  
If you need to change current programming for Language, you can use the  
instructions presented in this section. For example:  
If you want to change the Language Mode from Monolingual to Bilingual  
or Bilingual to Monolingual, use “Modifying the Language Mode.”  
If you want to change the current System Language used in Monolingual  
Mode, use “Modifying the System Language.”  
If you want to change the current Primary and/or Secondary Language  
used in Bilingual Mode, use “Modifying the Primary Language” and/or  
“Modifying the Secondary Language.”  
Modifying the Language Mode  
Language Mode.  
When you change the Language Mode, the system continues to use any  
recorded messages associated with the selected language. For example, if you  
change from Monolingual to Bilingual Mode and the System Language in  
Monolingual Mode was Latin American Spanish callers will hear Latin American  
Spanish as the Primary Language. Also, when you change the mode, listen to  
the Automated Attendant Service Day and Night Menu Prompts to make sure  
they are still relevant, and re-record them if necessary.  
To change the Language Mode:  
1.  
Access the Programming Main Menu:  
a.  
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
9
9
#
c.  
d.  
Enter the Password and press [  
Press [ ].  
#
].  
9
The system plays the system programming options.  
2.  
3.  
Press [ ] for Language.  
1
The system plays:  
To program System  
If finished, press * #.  
Mode, press 1.  
To program Language  
Language, press 2.  
Press [  
The system plays the current Language Mode then:  
For Bilingual Mode,  
1
] for Language Mode.  
For Monolingual Mode, press 1.  
If finished, press * #.  
press 2.  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Management  
4.  
Either:  
Press [  
1
] for Monolingual Mode.  
The system plays:  
To program Language  
To program System Language, press 2.  
System is in Monolingual Mode.  
Mode, press 1.  
If finished, press * #.  
Press [ ] for Bilingual Mode.  
2
The system plays:  
To program Language  
To program System Language, press 2.  
System is in Bilingual Mode.  
Mode, press 1.  
If finished, press * #.  
5.  
At this point, do one of the following:  
To change the System Language if the system is set for Monolingual  
Mode, go to Step 3 of “Modifying the System Language.”  
To change the Primary Language if the system is set for Bilingual  
Mode, go to Step 3 of “Modifying the Primary Language.”  
Press [  
quit.  
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to  
7
Monolingual Mode  
Playing the System Language  
To listen to the current System Language:  
1.  
Access the Programming Main Menu:  
a.  
] [ ] or the progrmmed VMMsgs button.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
] [  
7
7
9
9
#
c.  
d.  
Enter the Password and press [ # ].  
Press [ ].  
9
The system plays the system programming options.  
2.  
3.  
Press [  
1
] for Language.  
The system plays:  
To program Language Mode, press 1. To program System  
Language, press 2. If finished, press * #.  
Press [  
2
] for System Language.  
The system plays:  
To play System Language, press 2. To modify System  
Language, press 6. If finished press * #.  
5-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management  
4. Press [ ].  
2
The system plays:  
System language is LANGUAGE (where LANGUAGE is the  
To play System Language, press 2.  
To modify System Language, press 6.  
press * #.  
current language).  
If finished,  
5.  
At this point, do one of the following:  
To change the System Language, go to Step 4 of “Modifying the  
System Language.”  
Press [  
quit.  
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to  
7
Modifying the System Language  
System Language selected for Monolingual Mode.  
When you change the System Language, the system uses any recorded  
messages already associated with the new System Language. After changing  
the System Language, listen to the Automated Attendant Service Day and Night  
Menu Prompts to make sure they are still relevant, and re-record them if  
necessary.  
NOTE:  
When you change the System Language, the Mailbox Language for any  
mailboxes that were left at the factory setting also change to reflect the  
new System Language. Any mailboxes that were assigned a different  
language do not change.  
To change the System Language:  
1.  
Access the Programming Main Menu:  
a.  
b.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
] [  
7
] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
9
9
#
c. Enter the Password and press [ # ].  
d.  
Press [  
9
].  
The system plays the system programming options.  
2.  
3.  
Press [  
1
] for Language.  
The system plays:  
To program System  
To modify System  
To program Language Mode, press 1.  
Language, press 2.  
If finished, press * #.  
Press [ ] for System Language.  
2
The system plays:  
To play System Language, press 2.  
Language, press 6.  
If finished press * #.  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Management  
4. Press [  
6
].  
The system plays the current System Language, then prompts you to  
enter the number corresponding to the desired language.  
Press the number for the language you want to use.  
The system plays:  
5.  
6.  
For LANGUAGE (where LANGUAGE is the current language),  
press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel.  
Either:  
Press [  
6
] to cancel your selection.  
The system plays:  
System Language has not been changed.  
Press [  
9
] to confirm your selection.  
The system plays:  
System Language has been changed.  
Press [  
] [  
7
] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.  
7.  
5-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Management  
Bilingual Mode  
Playing the Primary Language  
To listen to the current Primary Language:  
1.  
Access the Programming Main Menu:  
] [ ] [ ] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
a. Press [ Intercom ] [  
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
7
7
9
9
#
Enter the Password and press [ # ].  
c.  
d.  
Press [  
9
].  
The system plays the system programming options.  
2. Press [ ] for Language.  
1
The system plays:  
To program Language Mode, press 1. To program System  
Language, press 2. If finished, press * #.  
3. Press [  
2
] for System Language.  
The system plays:  
To program  
If finished press * #.  
To program Primary Language, press 1.  
Secondary Language, press 2.  
4.  
Press [  
1
] for Primary Language.  
The system plays:  
2.  
To modify Primary  
To play Primary Language, press  
Language, press 6.  
If finished press * #.  
5. Press [ 2 ] to play the Primary Language.  
The system plays:  
Primary Language is LANGUAGE (where LANGUAGE is the  
To play Primary Language, press 2.  
current language).  
If finished,  
To modify Primary Language, press 6.  
press * #.  
6. At this point, do one of the following:  
To change the Primary Language, go to Step 5 of “Modifying the  
Primary Language.”  
Press [  
quit.  
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to  
7
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management  
Modifying the Primary Language  
Primary Language selected for Bilingual Mode.  
When you change the Primary Language, the system uses any recorded  
messages already associated with the new Primary Language. After changing  
the Primary Language, listen to the Automated Attendant Service Day and Night  
Menu Prompts to make sure they are still relevant; re-record them if necessary.  
NOTE:  
When you change the Primary Language, the Mailbox Language for any  
mailboxes that were left at the factory setting also change to reflect the  
new Primary Language. Any mailboxes that were assigned a different  
language do not change.  
To change the Primary Language:  
1.  
Access the Programming Main Menu:  
a.  
b.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
Press [  
9
] [  
9
] [ # ].  
c. Enter the Password and press [  
d.  
#
].  
Press [  
9
].  
The system plays the system programming options.  
2.  
3.  
Press [ ] for Language.  
1
The system plays:  
To program System  
If finished, press * #.  
To program Language Mode, press 1.  
Language, press 2.  
Press [ ] for System Language.  
2
The system plays:  
To program  
If finished, press * #.  
To program Primary Language, press 1.  
Secondary Language, press 2.  
4. Press [ ] for Primary Language.  
1
The system plays:  
To modify Primary  
If finished, press * #.  
To play Primary Language, press 2.  
Language, press 6.  
5.  
Press [  
6
].  
The system plays the current Primary Language, then prompts you to  
enter the number corresponding to the desired language.  
5-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Management  
6.  
Press the number for the language you want to use.  
The system plays:  
For LANGUAGE (where LANGUAGE is the current language),  
press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel.  
7. Either:  
Press [  
6
] to cancel your selection.  
The system plays:  
Primary Language has not been changed.  
Press [  
9
] to confirm your selection.  
The system plays:  
Primary Language has been changed.  
8.  
Press [  
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.  
7
Playing the Secondary Language  
To listen to the current Secondary Language:  
1.  
Access the Programming Main Menu:  
] [ ] [ ] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
a. Press [ Intercom ] [  
7
7
7
b.  
c.  
d.  
Press [  
9
] [  
9
] [ ].  
#
Enter the Password and press [ # ].  
Press [ ].  
9
The system plays the system programming options.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Press [ ] for Language.  
1
The system plays:  
To program System  
If finished, press * #.  
To program Language Mode, press 1.  
Language, press 2.  
Press [ ] for System Language.  
2
The system plays:  
To program  
If finished, press * #.  
To program Primary Language, press 1.  
Secondary Language, press 2.  
Press [ ] for Secondary Language.  
2
The system plays:  
To modify  
If finished, press * #.  
To play Secondary Language, press 2.  
Secondary Language, press 6.  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Management  
5. Press [ ].  
2
The system plays:  
Secondary language is LANGUAGE (where LANGUAGE is  
the current language). To play Secondary Language,  
press 2. To modify Secondary Language, press 6.  
If finished, press * #.  
6.  
At this point, do one of the following:  
— To change the Secondary Language, go to Step 5 of “Modifying the  
Secondary Language.”  
Press [  
quit.  
] [  
7
] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to  
Modifying the Secondary Language  
Secondary Language selected for Bilingual Mode.  
When you change the Secondary Language, the system uses any recorded  
messages already associated with the new Secondary Language. After  
changing the Secondary Language, listen to the Automated Attendant Service  
Day and Night Menu Prompts to make sure they are still relevant; re-record  
them if necessary.  
To change the Secondary Language:  
1.  
Access the Programming Main Menu:  
a.  
b.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
9
9
#
c. Enter the Password and press [ # ].  
d.  
Press [  
9
].  
The system plays the system programming options.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Press [  
1
] for Language.  
The system plays:  
To program System  
If finished, press * #.  
To program Language Mode, press 1.  
Language, press 2.  
Press [ 2 ] for System Language.  
The system plays:  
To program  
If finished, press * #.  
To program Primary Language, press 1.  
Secondary Language, press 2.  
Press [ 2 ] for Secondary Language.  
The system plays:  
To modify  
If finished, press * #.  
To play Secondary Language, press 2.  
Secondary Language, press 6.  
5-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Management  
5.  
Press [  
6
].  
The system plays the current Secondary Language, then prompts you to  
enter the number corresponding to the desired language.  
6. Press the number for the language you want to use.  
The system plays:  
For LANGUAGE (where LANGUAGE is the current language),  
press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel.  
7.  
Either:  
Press [  
6
] to cancel your selection.  
The system plays:  
Secondary Language has not been changed.  
Press [ 9 ] to confirm your selection.  
The system plays:  
Secondary Language has been changed.  
8.  
Press [  
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.  
7
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Management  
Automated Attendant Service  
operation so callers can hear an appropriate prompt in either the System or  
Primary Language when they call your company. The voice messaging system  
switches to day or night operation depending on the setting of the Night Service  
button at extension 10—the receptionist’s extension. You can customize the day  
and/or night menu to welcome the caller and offer the caller a list of options for  
transferring to a system extension or group, or for hearing an Announcement  
that you record. These Announcements can tell callers about your business  
hours and location, emergency cover information, and seasonal or special  
offers.  
You can record up to two Announcements (of up to four minutes each). If the  
system is set for Bilingual Mode, you can record up to two Announcements in  
each language. Be sure to record the Day and Night Menu Prompts in both the  
Primary and Secondary Languages as well. Then callers can press [  
switch between the languages.  
] [ ] to  
1
5-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management  
Programming  
Main Menu  
(Press  
9 )  
Automated  
Attendant  
3 )  
(Press  
Night Menu  
(Press [ 2 ])  
Day Menu  
(Press [ 1 ])  
Yes  
Yes  
N o  
N o  
Bilingual  
Mode?  
Bilingual  
Mode?  
Play Night  
Prompt  
Modify Night  
Prompt  
Play Day  
Prompt  
Modify Menu  
Definition and/or  
Day Prompt  
(Press [ 6 ])  
(Press [ 2 ][ 1 ])  
(Press [ 2 ][ 1 ])  
(Press [ 6 ])  
Play Menu  
Definition and  
Announcement  
(Press[ 2 ][ 2 ][ 1 ])  
Play Primary  
Night Prompt  
(Press[ 2 ][ 1 ][ 1 ])  
Modify Primary  
Night Prompt  
(Press[ 6 ][ 1 ])  
Modify Secondary  
Night Prompt  
(Press[ 6 ][ 2 ])  
Play Secondary  
Night Prompt  
(Press[ 2 ][ 1 ][ 2 ])  
Modify Menu  
Play Primary  
Day Prompt  
(Press [ 2 ][ 1 ][ 1 ])  
Definition  
and/or Primary  
Day Prompt  
(Press [ 6 ])  
Play Secondary  
Day Prompt  
Play Menu  
Definition and  
Announcement  
(Press[ 2 ][ 2 ])  
(Press [ 2 ][ 1 ][ 2 ])  
Play Secondary  
Play Primary  
Announcement  
Announcement  
(Press [ 1 ])  
(Press [ 2 ])  
Figure 5-2 Automated Attendant Service Menu  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Management  
If you need to change current programming for the Automated Attendant  
Service, you can use the instructions presented in this section. For example:  
If you want to change the transfer options available for outside callers,  
use “Modifying the Menu Definition, Day Menu Prompt, and  
Announcements” and “Modifying the Night Menu Prompt” for either  
Monolingual Mode or Bilingual Mode to update the options, prompts,  
and/or Announcements callers hear.  
If you add a line to the system that requires Automated Attendant  
Service, use “Group Call Distribution” to include the new line.  
If you want to change the way Automated Attendant Service handles  
calls, use “VMS Hunt Delay” and/or “VMS Hunt Schedule.”  
Menu Definition, Prompt, and Announcements  
When the Automated Attendant Service answers a call, the caller hears a menu  
prompt that requests the caller to press one or more buttons on the dialpad to  
transfer to a specific extension or group of extensions, or to hear an  
Announcement. After the caller presses the button(s), the system transfers the  
call to the appropriate extension or group, and the caller hears Music On Hold,  
tones, ringing, or silence, or an Announcement (depending on how the  
communications system is set up). Menu Definition lets you specify the  
extensions or groups to which outside callers are transferred or the  
Announcements that callers hear.  
The voice messaging system uses the Menu Definition for both day and night  
operation. To set up the menu, you define digits 1 through 9, called Selector  
Codes, for the following types of call transfer:  
Direct Extension Transfer. This is the factory setting for selector codes  
1 through 8. If you use the factory setting, callers can enter an extension  
number directly from the menu. For direct extension transfer, the selector  
code represents a range of extensions. For example, selector code 1  
allows outside callers to transfer directly to any extension that begins with  
a 1—extensions 10–19. For selector code 2, outside callers can transfer  
directly to any extension that begins with a 2—extensions 20–29, and so  
on.  
Selector code 9 is different from selector codes 1 through 8. If you leave  
selector code 9 at the factory setting, outside callers are transferred  
directly to the receptionist’s mailbox where they can leave a message.  
This is especially useful for night operation. If you use it, callers are  
routed directly to the receptionist’s mailbox—the system does not ring  
the extension first.  
Selector Code Transfer. You can assign any of the selector codes to  
one specific extension or group. Then when a caller presses the single-  
digit selector code, the system transfers the call to the specific extension  
or Calling Group or Hunt Group that you assigned to that digit.  
5-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management  
Announcement. You can assign any of the selector codes to an  
Announcement number. When a caller presses the single-digit selector  
code, the system plays an Announcement (primary or secondary) that  
you assigned to that digit. Each Announcement can be up to four  
minutes in length. You can set the system to play the Announcement and  
hang up or prompt the caller to press [  
] [  
8
] and an extension number.  
NOTE:  
Depending on your business, you can define the menu so that some options  
accommodate callers during normal business hours and other options  
accommodate after-hours callers. For example: the ANY Travel Agency wants  
to give outside callers the ability to transfer directly to any employee in their  
system by dialing the employee’s 2-digit extension number. The company has  
employees assigned at extensions 10 through 25. Therefore, the company  
leaves Selector Codes 1 and 2 at the factory setting (Direct Extension Transfer).  
This leaves Selector Codes 3 through 9 available for Selector Code Transfer. In  
this case, ANY Travel Agency assigns Selector Code 3 to extension 21 and  
Selector Codes 4 and 5 to Hunt Groups 1 and 2, respectively.  
A sample Day Menu Prompt for the ANY Travel Agency follows:  
Thank you for calling the ANY Travel Agency.  
know the extension of the person you are calling, enter  
If you  
the extension number now.  
To speak with a cruise  
specialist, press 3.  
For personal travel, press 5.  
For corporate travel, press 4.  
For assistance, press 0  
or,  
if you have a rotary phone, stay on the line.  
A sample night menu prompt for the ANY Travel Agency follows:  
You have reached the ANY Travel Agency. Our business  
To leave a  
hours are 9 to 5, Monday through Friday.  
message, press 9 and we will return your call as soon as  
possible. If this is an emergency, press 6 for our  
special traveler’s assistance information.  
In this case, the caller who needs after-hours assistance can press [ 6 ] to hear  
the following Announcement:  
If you have misplaced your airline tickets or passport,  
missed your flight or limousine pickup, or have any  
other travel emergency after ANY Travel’s standard  
call 1 800 555 6060 to speak with our  
business hours,  
special traveler’s assistance program representative.  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Management  
Other Options  
Automated Attendant Service provides the following built-in options—no  
programming required—for use in your menu prompt:  
A third type of transfer option, which is always available to outside and  
inside callers, may be useful in certain situations. With this type of  
transfer, when callers press [  
] [  
8
], the system prompts them to enter an  
extension number. Using the example above, if you assigned Selector  
Code Transfer to Selector Codes 1 and 2 (rather than starting the  
assignment from 3), you could request callers to press [  
them to transfer to extensions 10 to 25.  
] [ ], to allow  
8
As shown in the sample Day Menu Prompt, you can also instruct a caller  
to stay on the line for assistance. If so, the voice messaging system  
automatically transfers the call to the receptionist’s extension. This option  
is especially important for callers who have rotary phones.  
As shown in the sample Day Menu Prompt, callers can press [ 0 ] at any  
time to transfer automatically to the receptionist’s extension for  
assistance.  
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, callers can press [  
] [ ] to switch  
1
between the Primary and Secondary Languages. In this case, you must  
record two messages for the Day and Night Menu Prompts and  
Automated Attendant Announcements: one each in the Primary and  
Secondary Languages.  
Monolingual Mode  
Playing the Menu Definition and  
Announcements  
This procedure lets you listen to the current Menu Definition and any  
Announcement associated with a Selector Code. The Menu Definition is  
accessed through the Day Menu.  
To play the current menu definition:  
1.  
Access the Programming Main Menu:  
] [ ] [ ] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
a. Press [ Intercom ] [  
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
7
7
9
9
#
c. Enter the Password and press [ # ].  
d. Press [ ].  
The system plays the system programming options.  
9
2. Press [ 3 ] for Automated Attendant.  
The system plays:  
For the Night Menu,  
To program the Day Menu, press 1.  
press 2.  
5-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
System Management  
Press [ ] for the Day Menu.  
1
3.  
4.  
The system plays:  
To play the menu, press 2; to modify the menu, press 6.  
If finished, press * #.  
Press [  
2
].  
The system plays:  
To play the Menu  
If finished, press * #.  
To play the menu prompt, press 1.  
Definition, press 2.  
Press [  
2
] to play the Menu Definition.  
5.  
6.  
The system plays the current Menu Definition. lf an Announcement is  
recorded, the system plays the Selector Code number and associated  
Announcement number.  
Press [ 1 ] to play or [ # ] to skip the recorded Announcement assigned to  
the Selector Code.  
The system plays the recorded Announcement and goes to the next  
Selector Code.  
7. Press [  
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.  
7
Playing the Day or Night Menu Prompt  
To listen to the current Day or Night Menu Prompt:  
1.  
Access the Programming Main Menu:  
a.  
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
9
9
#
c.  
Enter the Password and press [ # ].  
d. Press [ ].  
The system plays the system programming options.  
9
2. Press [ 3 ] for Automated Attendant.  
The system plays:  
For the Night Menu,  
To program the Day Menu, press 1.  
press 2.  
If finished, press * #.  
3.  
Either:  
Press [  
Press [  
1
2
] for the Day Menu.  
] for the Night Menu.  
The system plays:  
TO play the menu, press 2; to modify the menu, press 6.  
If finished, press * #.  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management  
4. Press [  
2
].  
The system plays:  
To play the menu prompt, press 1.  
To play the Menu  
Definition, press 2. If finished, press * #.  
5. To play the Menu Prompt, press [ 1 ].  
The system plays the Day or Night Menu Prompt depending on your  
choice in Step 3.  
6.  
Press [  
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.  
7
Modifying the Menu Definition, Day Menu  
Prompt, and Announcements  
voice messaging system to show modifications to the Announcements, if any.  
Then use the updated forms while performing the following procedure.  
CAUTION:  
It is important to understand that you must approve each element (that is,  
the Menu Definition, the Day Menu Prompt, and any Announcements, as  
well as save all of these entries (in Step 15). If you exit at any point  
before saving your approved entries, your entries will be lost. This  
procedure is designed to ensure that callers do not hear the incomplete  
menu while you are in the process of modifying it.  
To change the Menu Definition, Day Menu Prompt, and/or Announcements:  
1. Access the Programming Main Menu:  
a.  
b.  
c.  
d.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
9
9
#
Enter the Password and press [ # ].  
Press [ ].  
9
The system plays the system programming options.  
Press [ 3 ] for Automated Attendant.  
The system plays:  
2.  
3.  
For the Night Menu,  
To program the Day Menu, press 1.  
If finished, press * #.  
press 2.  
Press [  
1
].  
The system plays:  
press 2; to modify the menu, press 6.  
To play the menu,  
If finished, press * #.  
5-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management  
4.  
Press [ ].  
6
The system plays:  
Please enter a selector code from 1 to 9. When  
finished modifying the Menu Definition, press * #.  
5.  
6.  
lf you want to modify only the Day Menu Prompt, go to Step 10.  
Otherwise, continue with Step 6.  
Enter a Selector Code from 1 through 9.  
The system plays the current Selector Code Action (or Announcement  
Number and Announcement), then asks:  
Press 9 to confirm  
Do you want to make a modification?  
or 6 to cancel.  
7.  
8.  
Press [ 9 ] to confirm that you want to modify this Selector Code.  
The system plays:  
For selector code transfer, press 1; for announcement,  
for direct extension transfer, press 5.  
press 3;  
At this point, do one of the following:  
If you want to return the Selector Code to the factory setting (direct  
extension transfer for Selector Code 1 through 8 and transfer to  
receptionist’s mailbox for Selector Code 9), press [ 5 ]. Repeat Steps 6  
through 8 for each Selector Code you want to modify. Go to Step 10.  
If you want to assign a different extension or group to the Selector  
Code, press [ 1 ] then enter the desired extension or group number,  
followed by [ # ]. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for each Selector Code you  
want to modify. Go to Step 10.  
— If you want to change an Announcement, press [ 3 ]. Go to Step 9.  
Enter an Announcement number (1 or 2). Go to Step 11.  
The system plays:  
9.  
press 1; to use existing  
To record a new announcement,  
press #.  
announcement,  
10.  
Press [  
] [  
#
] to approve your entries and finish modifying the Menu  
Definition.  
The system plays:  
To use  
To record a new prompt for this menu, press 1.  
the existing prompt and save any Menu Definition  
changes, press #.  
11. If you do not want to record a new Day Menu Prompt or Announcement,  
press [ # ] and go to Step 16; otherwise, continue with Step 12.  
12.  
To record a new Day Menu Prompt or Announcement, lift the handset,  
press [ 1 ], and record after the beep. The prompt or Announcement can  
be up to four minutes long.  
13. Press [  
1
] when you are finished recording.  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Management  
14.  
Choose an option or skip this step:  
Press [  
2
] [  
1
] to immediately re-record the Day Menu Prompt or  
Announcement. Begin recording immediately after the beep; press [ 1 ]  
after recording. Repeat, if desired. Otherwise, go to Step 15.  
Press [  
Repeat, if necessary.  
2
] [  
3
] to play back the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement.  
Press [ ] [ ] to delete the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement.  
Return to Step 11.  
Press [ ] [ ] to approve and save the Day Menu Prompt or  
3
#
15.  
16.  
Announcement.  
The system plays:  
Menu Definition saved.  
] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.  
Approved.  
Press [ ] [  
7
Modifying the Night Menu Prompt  
Night Menu Prompt; then use the updated form while performing the following  
procedure.  
To change the Night Menu Prompt:  
1. Access the Programming Main Menu:  
a.  
b.  
c.  
d.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
9
9
#
Enter the Password and press [  
Press [ ].  
#
].  
9
The system plays the system programming options.  
Press [ ] for Automated Attendant.  
3
2.  
3.  
The system plays:  
To program the Day Menu, press 1. For the Night Menu,  
If finished, press * #.  
press 2.  
Press [ ].  
2
The system plays:  
To play the menu, press 2; to modify the menu, press 6.  
If finished, press * #.  
Press [ ].  
6
4.  
The system plays:  
To use  
To record a new prompt for this menu, press 1.  
the existing prompt, press #.  
5. Lift the handset, press [ 1 ], and record the Night Menu Prompt.  
5-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Management  
6. Press [  
1
] when you are finished recording.  
7.  
Choose an option or skip this step:  
Press [  
2
] [ ] to immediately re-record the Night Menu Prompt. Begin  
1
recording immediately after the beep; press [ 1 ] after recording.  
Repeat, if desired.  
Press [  
Press [  
2
] [  
] [  
3
] to play back the Night Menu Prompt.  
] to delete the Night Menu Prompt.  
3
The system plays:  
Deleted. To record a new prompt for this menu,  
To use the existing prompt, press #.  
press 1.  
Return to Step 5.  
Press [ ] [ ] to approve the Night Menu Prompt.  
#
8.  
9.  
The system plays:  
Approved.  
Press [  
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.  
7
Bilingual Mode  
Playing the Menu Definition and  
Announcements  
This procedure lets you listen to the current Menu Definition and any  
Announcement associated with a Selector Code. The Menu Definition is  
accessed through the Day Menu.  
To play the current Menu Definition:  
1. Access the Programming Main Menu:  
a.  
b.  
c.  
d.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
9
9
#
Enter the Password and press [ # ].  
Press [ ].  
9
The system plays the system programming options.  
2. Press [ ] for Automated Attendant.  
3
The system plays:  
For the Night Menu,  
To program the Day Menu, press 1.  
If finished, press * #.  
] for the Day Menu.  
The system plays:  
press 2.  
3.  
Press [  
1
To play the menu, press 2; to modify the menu, press 6.  
If finished, press * #.  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Management  
4.  
Press [ ].  
2
The system plays:  
To play the menu prompt, press 1. To play the Menu  
Definition, press 2. If finished, press * #.  
Press [ 2 ] to play the Menu Definition.  
5.  
6.  
The system plays the current Menu Definition. lf an Announcement is  
recorded, the system plays the Selector Code and associated  
Announcement number.  
Either:  
— Press [ # ] if you do not want to listen to the Announcement and go to  
the next Selector Code.  
Press [ 1 ] to play the Primary Language Announcement assigned to  
the Selector Code.  
Press [ 2 ] to play the Secondary Language Announcement assigned to  
the Selector Code.  
The system plays the recorded Announcement.  
7. Press [  
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.  
7
Playing the Day and Night Menu Prompts in the  
Primary and Secondary Languages  
To listen to the current Day or Night Menu Prompts in the Primary and  
Secondary Languages selected for Bilingual Mode:  
1. Access the Programming Main Menu:  
a. Press [ Intercom ] [  
b . Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
9
9
#
c .  
d.  
Enter the Password and press [  
Press [ ].  
#
].  
9
The system plays the system programming options.  
Press [ 3 ] for Automated Attendant.  
2.  
3.  
The system plays:  
To program the Day Menu, press 1. For the Night Menu,  
If finished, press * #.  
press 2.  
Either:  
Press [  
Press [  
1
2
] for the Day Menu.  
] for the Night Menu.  
The system plays:  
To play the menu, press 2; to modify the menu, press 6.  
If finished, press * #.  
5-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management  
4.  
5.  
Press [  
2
].  
The system plays:  
To play the Menu  
If finished, press * #.  
To play the menu prompt, press 1.  
Definition, press 2.  
Press [  
1
] to play the menu prompt.  
The system plays:  
To play  
If finished,  
To play Primary Language prompt, press 1.  
Secondary Language prompt, press 2.  
press * #.  
6.  
Either:  
— Press [ 1 ] for the Primary Language prompt.  
— Press [ 2 ] for the Secondary Language prompt.  
The system plays the Day or Night Menu Prompt (depending on your  
choice in Step 3) in either the Primary or Secondary Language  
(depending on your choice in Step 6).  
7.  
8.  
Repeat Step 6 to play the Day or Night Menu Prompt in the other  
language.  
Press [  
] [  
7
] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.  
5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Management  
Modifying the Menu Definition, Day Menu  
Prompts, and Announcements  
for the voice messaging system to show modifications to the Automated  
Attendant Announcements. Then use the updated forms while performing the  
following procedure.  
CAUTION:  
It is important to understand that you must approve each element (that is,  
the Menu Definition, the Day Menu Prompt, and any Announcements, as  
well as save all of these entries (in Step 21). If you exit at any point  
before saving your approved entries, your entries will be lost. This  
procedure is designed to ensure that callers do not hear the incomplete  
menu while you are in the process of modifying it.  
To change the Menu Definition, Day Menu Prompts, and Announcements:  
1. Access the Programming Main Menu:  
a. Press [ Intercom ] [  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
b.  
c.  
d.  
Press [  
9
] [  
9
] [  
#
].  
Enter the Password and press [ # ].  
Press [ ].  
9
The system plays the system programming options.  
Press [ ] for Automated Attendant.  
3
2.  
3.  
The system plays:  
1. For the Night Menu,  
#.  
To program the Day Menu, press  
press 2. If finished, press *  
Press [  
1
].  
The system plays:  
To play the menu, press 2; to modify the menu, press 6.  
If finished, press * #.  
4. Press [  
6
].  
The system plays:  
When  
Please enter a selector code from 1 to 9.  
finished modifying the Menu Definition, press * #.  
If you want to modify only the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement, go to  
Step 10. Otherwise, continue with Step 6.  
5.  
5-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management  
6. Enter a Selector Code from 1 through 9.  
The system plays the current Selector Code Action (or Announcement  
number and Announcement), then asks:  
Do you want to make a modification?  
or 6 to cancel.  
Press 9 to confirm  
Press [ 9 ] to confirm that you want to modify this Selector Code.  
7.  
8. At this point, do one of the following:  
If you want to return the Selector Code to the factory setting (Direct  
Extension Transfer for Selector Code 1 through 8 and transfer to  
receptionist’s mailbox for Selector Code 9), press [ 5 ]. Repeat Steps 6  
through 8 for each Selector Code you want to modify. Go to Step 10.  
If you want to assign a different extension or group to the Selector  
Code, press [ 1 ] then enter the desired extension or group number,  
followed by [ # ]. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for each Selector Code you  
want to modify. Go to Step 10.  
If you want to change an Announcement, press [ 3 ]. Go to Step 9.  
Enter an Announcement number (1 or 2). Go to Step 11.  
The system plays:  
9.  
to use existing  
To record a new announcement, press 1;  
announcement,  
press #.  
] to finish modifying the Menu Definition.  
Press [  
] [  
#
10.  
The system plays:  
To record  
To save Menu  
To record Primary Language prompt, press 1.  
Secondary Language prompt, press 2.  
Definition changes, press #.  
If you do not want to record a Day Menu Prompt or Announcement, press  
[ # ] to approve the Menu Definition and go to Step 21; otherwise, continue  
with Step 12.  
11.  
12. Lift the handset and:  
Press [ 1 ] to record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement in the  
Primary Language.  
Press [ 2 ] to record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement in the  
Secondary Language.  
Record the prompt or Announcement (up to four minutes in length) after  
the beep.  
13.  
14. Press [  
1
] when you are finished recording.  
5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Management  
15.  
Choose an option or skip this step:  
Press [  
2
] [ ] to immediately re-record this Day Menu Prompt or  
1
Announcement. Begin recording immediately after the beep; press [ 1 ]  
after recording. Repeat, if desired. Otherwise, go to Step 16.  
Press [  
Press [  
2
] [  
] [  
3
] to play back this Day Menu Prompt or Announcement.  
] to delete this Day Menu Prompt or Announcement.  
3
Return to Step 12.  
16. Press [ ] [ ] to approve this Day Menu Prompt or Announcement.  
#
The system plays:  
Approved.  
17. To record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement in the other language,  
repeat Steps 12 through 16.  
18.  
Do one of the following:  
If you approved the Day Menu Prompt, go to Step 21.  
If you approved an Announcement, go to Step 19.  
19. Press [  
#
] [  
] [  
#
#
] to move up a menu level.  
Press [  
Press [  
] to move up another menu level.  
20.  
21.  
] to approve and save all changes.  
The new Day Menu Prompts, Announcements, and Selector Code  
changes now take effect.  
Press [  
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.  
7
22.  
Modifying the Night Menu Prompts  
the Night Menu Prompts; then use the updated form while performing the  
following procedure.  
To change the Night Menu Prompts:  
1.  
Access the Programming Main Menu:  
a.  
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
b. Press [  
9
] [  
9
] [  
#
].  
c. Enter the Password and press [ # ].  
d.  
Press [  
9
].  
The system plays the system programming options.  
Press [ 3 ] for Automated Attendant.  
The system plays:  
2.  
For the Night Menu,  
To program the Day Menu, press 1.  
If finished, press * #.  
press 2.  
5-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management  
Press [ ].  
2
3.  
The system plays:  
To play the menu, press 2; to modify the menu, press 6.  
If finished, press * #.  
4. Press [  
6
].  
The system plays:  
To record  
To save any  
To record Primary Language prompt, press 1.  
Secondary Language prompt, press 2.  
recordings, press #.  
5. Lift the handset:  
Press [ 1 ] to record the Night Menu Prompt in the Primary Language.  
— Press [ 2 ] to record the Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary  
Language.  
6. Record the prompt after the beep.  
7.  
8.  
Press [  
1
] when you are finished recording.  
Choose an option or skip this step:  
Press [  
2
] [  
1
] to immediately re-record this Night Menu Prompt. Begin  
recording immediately after the beep; press [ 1 ] after recording.  
Repeat, if desired.  
Press [  
Press [  
2
] [  
] [  
3
] to play back this Night Menu Prompt.  
] to delete this Night Menu Prompt.  
3
The system plays:  
To record Primary Language prompt,  
To record Secondary Language prompt,  
To save any recordings, press #.  
Deleted.  
press 1.  
press 2.  
Return to Step 5.  
Press [ ] [ ] to approve this Night Menu Prompt.  
#
9.  
The system plays:  
Approved.  
10. To record the Night Menu Prompt in the other language, repeat Steps 5  
through 9.  
Press [ # ] to approve all changes.  
11.  
The new Night Menu Prompts now take effect.  
12. Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.  
5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Management  
Group Call Distribution  
Use this communications system procedure to specify a new outside line on  
which you want Automated Attendant Service.  
communications system to show modifications to VMS-AA lines before you  
begin.  
To assign VMS-AA lines to Hunt Group 7:  
Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [  
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ].  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
Enter the System Password, if required.  
Press [  
#
] [  
2
] [  
0
] [ ]*.  
6
At the Group: prompt, press [  
7
].  
At the Line: prompt, enter the first VMS-AA line to be programmed as  
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned. (Be careful not to  
choose 3 VMS Line Cover because you will assign VMS Line  
Coverage rather than Automated Attendant Service to the line.)  
6.  
7. To program another line, press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] until the appropriate  
line number displays.  
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned.  
8.  
9.  
Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for each VMS-AA line.  
10. Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [ 0 ] to exit programming.  
VMS Hunt Delay  
Use this communications system procedure to specify either immediate or  
delayed call handling.  
Update Form A, Page 2 of the System Planner for the communications system  
to show modifications to the VMS Hunt Delay setting before you begin.  
To change the VMS Hunt Delay setting:  
1. Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [  
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ].  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
Enter the System Password, if required.  
Press [  
#
] [  
5
] [  
0
] [ 6 ].  
Press [ Next Data ] until the appropriate value displays.  
] [ ] to exit programming.  
Press [ Feature ] [  
0
0
*
In some countries, the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is #205. Check the  
Programming and Use guide for the communications system.  
5-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Management  
Automatic Extension Privacy  
If VMS Hunt Delay is set to Immediate, use this procedure to prevent users from  
accidentally picking up calls sent to the voice messaging system.  
Update Form B1 of the System Planner for the communications system to show  
Automatic Extension Privacy (#304) as Assigned for the PARTNER MAIL VS  
extensions.  
To change the Automatic Extension Privacy setting:  
1. Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [  
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ].  
Enter the System Password, if required.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Press [  
#
] [  
3
] [  
0
] [ 4 ].  
Enter the first PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on  
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned.  
5.  
6.  
Press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] until the next PARTNER MAIL VS extension  
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned.  
7.  
8.  
repeat Steps 6 and 7 for each one.  
Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [ 0 ] to exit programming.  
9.  
VMS Hunt Schedule  
Use this communications system procedure to specify when the  
communications system is to route calls to the voice messaging system.  
Update Form A, Page 2 of the System Planner for the communications system  
to show modifications to the VMS Hunt Schedule setting before you begin.  
To change the VMS Hunt Schedule setting:  
Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [  
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ].  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
Enter the System Password, if required.  
Press [  
Press [ Next Data ] until the appropriate value displays.  
] [ ] to exit programming.  
#
] [  
5
] [  
0
] [  
7
].  
Press [ Feature ] [  
0
0
5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Management  
Modifying Mailboxes  
The voice messaging system is shipped with mailboxes already created for a  
predetermined number of extensions. If a Mailbox Expansion Card is installed,  
mailbox capacity is increased. The characteristics of mailboxes are as follows:  
Receptionist’s Extension. Extension 10 has a maximum storage  
capacity of 60 minutes (or 120 messages). Each message has a  
maximum length of four minutes.  
All Other Extensions. Other extensions each have a maximum storage  
capacity of 20 minutes (or 40 messages).  
5-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management  
Programming  
Main Menu  
(Press 9 )  
Mailboxes  
(Press [ 4 ])  
Mailbox Number  
(Enter Number  
+[ # ])  
Mailbox  
Number  
Exists?  
No  
Yes  
Create  
Mailbox  
(Press [ 4 ])  
Reinitialize  
Main Menu  
(Press [ 3 ])  
Reinitialize  
Mailbox  
(Press [ 4 ])  
Administer  
Outcalling  
(Press [ 5 ])  
Program  
Mailbox  
Language  
(Press [ 6 ])  
Delete  
Mailbox  
(Press[ * ][ 3 ])  
Figure 5-3. Modifying Mailboxes  
5-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Management  
If you need to change current mailbox programming, you can use the  
instructions presented in this section. For example:  
If an employee leaves the company, you can set up the previously  
assigned mailbox number for a new employee. To do so, use  
“Reinitializing a Mailbox,” which returns the mailbox to its factory settings  
and deletes any messages that were in the mailbox.  
If you want to reassign a mailbox (move a mailbox from the current  
extension to a different one), first use “Deleting a Mailbox” then use  
“Creating a Mailbox.” You may also need to perform these procedures  
when you increase the number of mailboxes as the result of upgrading  
the PARTNER MAIL VS configuration. Keep in mind that you should  
always delete mailboxes from extensions to which you connect auxiliary  
equipment (such as doorphones and fax machines) to keep the  
maximum number of mailboxes available for subscribers.  
If a subscriber forgets his or her password, use “Reinitializing a  
Password” to return the password to the factory setting (1234).  
If a subscriber would like to interact with Voice Mail Service using a  
language different from the one assigned to his or her mailbox, use  
“Modifying a Mailbox’s Language.”  
If you want to activate or deactivate Outcalling for a subscriber’s mailbox,  
Outcalling privileges are denied. Even after you activate Outcalling for a  
subscriber’s mailbox, the subscriber must also turn on this feature and  
specify an Outcalling number by following the procedure in Using the  
PARTNER MAIL VS® Voice Messaging System.  
Before you change mailbox assignments, you should review the next two  
5-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Management  
Hardware Considerations  
After you delete a mailbox, you can reassign that mailbox to another  
subscriber’s extension using the “Creating a Mailbox” procedure. Remember  
that mailbox numbers and extension numbers are the same. You can also  
assign available mailboxes to extensions that do not have phones connected to  
them so that guests—employees who work off-premises most of the time, such  
After initial installation, you have default mailboxes for a predetermined number  
of extensions. When you reassign mailboxes, you can use any mailbox in your  
system’s dial plan. The dial plan is the maximum number of extensions  
supported by your system. This means on a PARTNER Plus system, you can  
create mailboxes for extensions 11 through 33; on a PARTNER Advanced  
Communications System, you can create mailboxes for extensions 11 through  
41 (on the 5-slot carrier); on a PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 system, you can  
create mailboxes for extensions 11 through 57. (Note that the mailbox at  
extension 10 cannot be deleted.) Figures 5-4 and 5-5 shows the dial plan for  
each system.  
PARTNER Plus Control Unit or  
PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 Primary Carrier  
PARTNER II or PARTNER 48  
Expansion Carrier  
Line  
Jacks  
Line  
Jacks  
Extension  
Jacks  
Extension  
Jacks  
206 Modules  
206 Modules  
Figure 5-4. Dial Plan for PARTNER Plus, PARTNER II, and PARTNER 48  
5-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
System Management  
PARTNER ACS  
2-Slot Carrier  
PARTNER ACS  
5-Slot Carrier  
Line  
Jacks  
Line  
Line  
Jacks  
Jacks  
Line  
Jacks  
Extension  
Jacks  
Extension  
Jacks  
Extension  
Jacks  
Extension  
Jacks  
Extension  
Jacks  
206  
Module  
206  
Modules  
Figure 5-5. Dial Plan for PARTNER Advanced Communications Systems  
Keep in mind that the modules you have installed in your carrier may differ from  
these figures, and will determine the number of extension jacks to which you  
can connect phones.  
Guest Mailboxes  
You can assign available mailboxes to extensions in the dial plan that do not  
have phones connected to them. Guest mailboxes are useful for employees  
who work off-premises most of the time. Guest mailboxes provide all the  
benefits of a regular mailbox (including Outcalling privileges) except the  
subscriber does not receive visual indication of a message deposited in the  
mailbox since there is no phone (and therefore no message waiting light)  
associated with the mailbox. Guests can call the voice messaging system from  
any touch-tone phone to retrieve their messages.  
5-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Management  
Review the following notes before you program guest mailboxes:  
If you have empty slots in the carrier, you can assign guest mailboxes to  
those extensions in the dial plan that correspond to the empty slot(s).  
When you assign guest mailboxes, it is recommended that you start  
assignments from the high end of the dial plan. (On a PARTNER Plus  
system, work backwards from extension 33; on a PARTNER II or  
PARTNER 48 system, work backwards from extension 57; on a PARTNER  
Advanced Communications System, work backwards from extension 41.)  
this section, to assign automatic coverage to the guest mailbox. Calls to  
these extensions are routed immediately to the mailbox—the call does  
not try ringing the extension first.  
If you do not have empty slots in the carrier, you can assign guest  
mailboxes to the unused extension numbers associated with the voice  
messaging system module. You also need to assign automatic coverage  
to these guest mailboxes. You can use any of the six extensions on the  
voice messaging system module for guest mailbox assignments.  
Calls routed to these extensions are routed to the subscriber’s mailbox  
depending on the extension used. Refer to the table below to determine  
whether calls are routed on an immediate or delayed basis.  
For a 2-port system:  
If the bottom two extensions are used, calls are routed to the  
subscriber’s mailbox on an immediate basis.  
If the remaining four extensions are used, calls are routed to the  
subscriber’s mailbox after four rings (or after the number of rings  
programmed in the VMS Cover Ring Interval).  
For a 4-port system:  
If the bottom four extensions are used, calls are routed to the  
subscriber’s mailbox on an immediate basis.  
If the remaining two extensions are used, calls are routed to the  
subscriber’s mailbox after four rings (or after the number of rings  
programmed in the VMS Cover Ring Interval).  
A 2-port voice messaging system uses the bottom two extension  
numbers associated with the slot in which the module is installed (see  
and 33. In this case, you can use extensions 28 through 33 for guest  
mailboxes.  
A 4-port system uses the bottom four extensions (for example, 30, 31, 32,  
and 33). In this case, you can use extensions 28 through 33 for guest  
mailboxes.  
5-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Management  
Checking a Mailboxs Status  
Use this procedure to determine if a mailbox exists:  
1.  
Access the Programming Main Menu:  
a.  
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
9
9
#
c.  
d.  
Enter the Password and press [ # ].  
Press [ ].  
9
The system plays the system programming options.  
2.  
Press [  
4
] to program mailboxes.  
The system tells you how many mailboxes currently exist and how many  
are allowed, then:  
Please enter the mailbox number followed by # or  
press # for the next mailbox.  
3. Enter the number of the mailbox whose status you want to check followed  
by [ ], or simply press [ ].  
#
#
The system responds as follows:  
If you entered a mailbox number followed by [ # ], the system tells you  
whether or not the mailbox exists.  
— If you entered [ # ], the system tells you the number of the first existing  
mailbox.  
4. Press [ # ] repeatedly to hear the next existing mailbox number.  
5.  
Press [  
] [  
7
] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.  
Deleting a Mailbox  
deleted; then use the updated form while performing the following procedure.  
Review the following notes before you delete a mailbox:  
The receptionist’s mailbox (at extension 10) cannot be deleted.  
Any messages in the mailbox are lost when a mailbox is deleted. The  
message light is turned off. The personal greeting is lost.  
If you delete a mailbox from an extension that has VMS Cover assigned,  
unassign Automatic VMS Cover or remove the VMS Cover button. This  
action prevents unanswered intercom and transferred calls to this  
extension from being transferred to the receptionist’s extension.  
If you delete a mailbox that was assigned a line owner using VMS Line  
Cover, either delete line ownership from that line or assign a different  
mailbox as the owner of that line. Similarly, if you delete a mailbox that  
was assigned a line owner using Extension Line Coverage, either  
unassign coverage or assign a different extension as the owner.  
5-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Management  
SECURITY ALERT:  
As a safeguard against toll fraud, delete unused mailboxes.  
To delete a mailbox:  
1. Access the Programming Main Menu:  
a.  
b.  
c.  
d.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
9
9
#
Enter the Password and press [  
Press [ ].  
#
].  
9
The system plays the system programming options.  
2. Press [ ] to program mailboxes.  
4
The system tells you how many mailboxes exist and how many are  
allowed, then:  
Please enter the mailbox number followed by # or  
press # for the next mailbox.  
3.  
Enter the number of the mailbox you want to delete followed by [ # ].  
The system says whether or not the mailbox exists, then:  
To reinitialize  
To administer Outcalling,  
To program the Mailbox Language, press 6.  
To reinitialize the password, press 3.  
the mailbox, press 4.  
press 5.  
To delete the mailbox, press * D.  
4. Press [  
] [  
3
].  
The system plays:  
Mailbox XX has YY new messages and ZZ old messages. Do  
Press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel.  
you want to delete?  
Press [ ] to confirm mailbox deletion.  
9
5.  
6.  
The system plays:  
Deleted.  
Press [  
] [  
7
] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.  
5-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Management  
Creating a Mailbox  
created; then use the updated form while performing the following procedure.  
The system is shipped with mailboxes for a predetermined number of  
extensions. If you already have the maximum amount of mailboxes, you must  
delete an unused mailbox before you can create a new one.  
Review the following notes before you create a mailbox:  
Mailboxes can be created for extensions 11 through 33 for the PARTNER  
Plus, 11 through 41 for PARTNER Advanced systems, and 11 through 57  
When a mailbox is created, it uses the factory set password (1234) and  
the factory set Mailbox Language in either the System Language (in  
Monolingual Mode) or Primary Language (in Bilingual Mode). The  
Mailbox Language can be changed on a per mailbox basis. See  
You can create a guest mailbox for an extension that does not have a  
details.  
To create a mailbox:  
Access the Programming Main Menu:  
1.  
a.  
b.  
c .  
d.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
9
9
#
Enter the Password and press [ # ].  
Press [ ].  
9
The system plays the system programming options.  
Press [ ] to program mailboxes.  
4
2.  
3.  
The system tells you how many mailboxes exist and how many are  
allowed, then:  
Please enter the mailbox number followed by # or  
press # for the next mailbox.  
Enter the number of the mailbox you want to create followed by [ # ].  
The system plays:  
To create this mailbox,  
If finished with this mailbox, press * #, or  
Mailbox XX does not exist.  
press 4.  
press # for the next mailbox.  
5-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management  
4.  
Press [ ].  
4
The system plays:  
Created.  
5. Press [  
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.  
7
Reinitializing a Password  
If a subscriber forgets the password for his or her mailbox, you can reinitialize  
the password to the factory setting of 1234 so the user can retrieve messages.  
Remind the subscriber to change the password immediately after logging in for  
the first time.  
To reinitialize a password to 1234:  
1.  
Access the Programming Main Menu:  
a.  
b.  
c.  
d.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
9
9
#
Enter the Password and press [ # ].  
Press [ ].  
9
The system plays the system programming options.  
2. Press [ ] to program mailboxes.  
4
The system tells you how many mailboxes exist and how many are  
allowed, then:  
Please enter the mailbox number followed by # or  
press # for the next mailbox.  
3.  
Enter the number of the mailbox whose password you want to reinitialize  
followed by [ ].  
#
The system plays:  
Mailbox XX exists. To reinitialize the password,  
press 3. To reinitialize the mailbox, press 4. To  
administer Outcalling, press 5. To program the Mailbox  
To delete the mailbox, press * D.  
If finished with this mailbox, press * #, Or press #  
Language, press 6.  
for the next mailbox.  
Press [  
3
].  
4.  
5.  
The system plays:  
The password has been reinitialized.  
Press [  
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.  
7
5-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management  
Reinitializing a Mailbox  
To prepare a previously used mailbox for a new subscriber, you can reinitialize  
the mailbox. This procedure deletes any messages left in the mailbox and turns  
off the phone’s message light (if lit), erases the personal greeting (if recorded),  
changes the password back to the factory setting (1234), and changes the  
Mailbox Language back to either the System Language (Monolingual Mode) or  
the Primary Language (Bilingual Mode).  
To reinitialize a mailbox:  
1. Access the Programming Main Menu:  
a.  
b.  
c.  
d.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
9
9
#
Enter the Password and press [ # ].  
Press [ ].  
9
The system plays the system programming options.  
2.  
Press [ 4 ] to program mailboxes.  
The system tells you how many mailboxes exist and how many are  
allowed, then:  
Please enter the mailbox number followed by # or  
press # for the next mailbox.  
3. Enter the number of the mailbox you want to reinitialize followed by [ # ].  
The system plays:  
To reinitialize the password,  
To reinitialize the mailbox, press 4. To  
Mailbox XX exists.  
press 3.  
administer Outcalling, press 5. To program the Mailbox  
Language, press 6. To delete, press * D. If finished  
with this mailbox, press * #, or press # for the next  
mailbox.  
Press [  
4
].  
4.  
5.  
The system plays:  
Do you want  
Press 9 to confirm or 6  
Mailbox XX has YY new and ZZ old messages.  
to reinitialize this mailbox?  
to cancel.  
Press [ ].  
9
The system plays:  
Reinitialized.  
6. Press [  
] [  
7
] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.  
5-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management  
Playing a Mailboxs Language  
To play the language currently used for a mailbox:  
Access the Programming Main Menu:  
1.  
a.  
b.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
9
9
#
c.  
d.  
Enter the Password and press [  
Press [ ].  
#
].  
9
The system plays the system programming options.  
2.  
3.  
Press [  
4
] to program mailboxes.  
The system tells you how many mailboxes exist and how many are  
allowed, then:  
Please enter the mailbox number followed by # or  
press # for the next mailbox.  
Enter the number of the mailbox whose language you want to play  
followed by [  
#
].  
The system plays:  
To reinitialize the password,  
To reinitialize the mailbox, press 4. To  
Mailbox XX exists.  
press 3.  
administer Outcalling, press 5. To program the Mailbox  
Language, press 6. To delete the mailbox, press * D.  
If finished with this mailbox, press * #, or press #  
for the next mailbox.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
Press [  
6
].  
The system plays:  
To play Mailbox Language, press 2. To modify Mailbox  
If finished, press * #.  
Language, press 6.  
Press [ ].  
The system plays:  
2
Mailbox language is LANGUAGE (where LANGUAGE is the  
current language).  
Press [  
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.  
7
5-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Management  
Modifying a Mailboxs Language  
assigned to mailboxes; then use the updated form while performing the  
following procedure.  
To modify a mailbox’s language:  
1. Access the Programming Main Menu:  
a.  
b.  
c.  
d.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
9
9
#
Enter the Password and press [ # ].  
Press [ ].  
9
The system plays the system programming options.  
Press [ ] to program mailboxes.  
4
2.  
The system tells you how many mailboxes currently exist and how many  
are allowed, then:  
Please enter the mailbox number followed by # or  
press # for the next mailbox.  
3. Enter the number of the mailbox whose language you want to modify  
followed by [ ].  
#
The system plays:  
Mailbox XX exists. To reinitialize the password,  
press 3. To reinitialize the mailbox, press 4. To  
administer Outcalling, press 5. To program the Mailbox  
Language, press 6. To delete the mailbox, press * D.  
If finished with this mailbox, press * #, or press #  
for the next mailbox.  
4. Press [ ].  
6
The system plays:  
To play Mailbox Language, press 2 To modify Mailbox  
Language, press 6. If finished, press * #.  
Press [  
6
].  
5.  
The system plays the current Mailbox Language, then prompts you to  
enter the number corresponding to the desired language.  
6. Enter the number corresponding to the language you want to use for this  
mailbox.  
The system plays:  
For LANGUAGE (where LANGUAGE is the current language),  
press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel.  
5-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management  
7.  
Either:  
Press [  
9
] to confirm.  
The system plays:  
Mailbox Language has been changed.  
Press [ ] to cancel.  
6
The system plays:  
Mailbox Language has not been changed.  
8.  
Press [  
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.  
7
Administering Outcalling for a Mailbox  
The Outcalling feature dials a telephone or pager number to notify a subscriber  
that a new message has arrived in the subscriber’s voice mailbox. With this  
feature subscribers can be alerted to the arrival of new messages whether  
they’re at their desks, on the road, or at an alternate work location. And  
subscribers can determine the schedule for when Outcalling begins and ends.  
Before subscribers can turn on Outcalling, specify the Outcalling number, and  
establish an Outcalling schedule (optional), you must assign Outcalling  
privileges for their mailboxes. You may also remove Outcalling privileges by  
current status of Outcalling privileges for each mailbox.  
CAUTION:  
Before you assign mailboxes Outcalling privileges, you should review the  
There are no restrictions on the Outcalling Numbers entered by  
subscribers. Therefore, it is strongly recommended that you limit the  
number of subscribers who have the Outcalling privilege. And call  
restrictions should be used for the communications system. See  
To assign or remove Outcalling privileges for a mailbox:  
1.  
Access the Programming Main Menu:  
] [ ] [ ] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
a. Press [ Intercom ] [  
7
7
7
Press [  
9
] [  
9
] [ # ].  
b.  
c. Enter the Password and press [ # ].  
d. Press [ ].  
The system plays the system programming options.  
9
5-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Management  
Press [ 4 ] to program mailboxes.  
2.  
The system tells you how many mailboxes exist and how many are  
allowed, then:  
Please enter the mailbox number followed by # or  
press # for the next mailbox.  
3.  
Enter the number of the mailbox for which you want to activate/deactivate  
Outcalling privileges followed by [ # ].  
The system plays:  
Mailbox XX exists. To reinitialize the password,  
press 3. To reinitialize the mailbox, press 4. To  
administer Outcalling, press 5. To program the Mailbox  
Language, press 6. To delete the mailbox, press * D.  
If finished with this mailbox, press * #, or press #  
for the next mailbox.  
4. Press [ 5 ] to administer Outcalling.  
The system plays:  
To turn on Outcalling, press 9. To turn off  
Outcalling, press 6.  
5.  
Either:  
Press [  
9
] to activate Outcalling.  
The system plays:  
Outcalling is turned on.  
Press [ 6 ] to deactivate Outcalling.  
The system plays:  
Outcalling is turned off.  
6. To activate/deactivate Outcalling for another mailbox, repeat steps 3  
through 5.  
7.  
Press [ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.  
5-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Management  
Automatic VMS Cover  
Use this communications system procedure to assign automatic voice mail  
coverage to the appropriate extensions.  
Update Form B2 of the System Planner for the communications system before  
you begin.  
To assign Automatic VMS Cover to extensions:  
1. Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [  
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ].  
Enter the System Password, if required.  
2.  
3.  
Press [  
#
] [  
3
] [  
1
] [ 0 ].  
4. Enter the number of the extension to be covered by the voice messaging  
system.  
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned.  
5.  
6.  
To program another extension, press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] until the  
extension number shows on the display. Then repeat Step 5.  
7. Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [  
0
] to exit programming mode.  
VMS Cover Rings  
Use this communications system procedure* to change the number of times  
calls should ring at the extension before they are sent to the subscriber’s  
mailbox.  
Update Form A, Page 2 of the System Planner for the communications system  
before you begin.  
To change the number of times calls ring before they are sent to the voice  
messaging system:  
Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [  
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ].  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Enter the System Password, if required.  
Press [  
#
] [  
1
] [  
1
] [ ].  
7
4. Enter the VMS Cover Rings setting.  
5. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.  
*
VMS Cover Rings (#117) is not available on all systems. Check the Programming and Use guide  
for the communications system.  
5-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
System Management  
Line Coverage  
This feature lets callers who call in on a covered line leave messages in the  
mailbox of a specific subscriber. Line coverage typically is used for personal  
lines or outside access to the voice messaging system if Automated Attendant  
Service is not used.  
There are two ways to set up line coverage:  
For VMS Line Coverage, you must program the voice messaging  
system’s Line Ownership feature and the communication system’s Group  
Call Distribution (#206)* feature.  
With this method, when a call on a covered line is not answered within  
five rings, the voice messaging system routes the caller to the line  
owner’s mailbox. The caller then hears the personal greeting for the line  
owner’s mailbox.  
For Extension Line Coverage, you only need to program the  
communication system’s Line Coverage Extension (#208)feature.  
This method provides flexibility for calls ringing on covered lines. You can  
specify the number of times calls ring at the user’s extension before  
going to the user’s mailbox (using the communication system’s VMS  
Cover Rings (#117)feature). In addition, if the user’s extension has Do  
Not Disturb on, calls on the line can go immediately to coverage.  
For both types of line coverage, voice mail coverage must be on at the user’s  
extension.  
IMPORTANT:  
A line can be assigned coverage as described in this section or it can be  
assigned Automated Attendant Service coverage—a single line cannot  
be assigned both types of coverage.  
*
In some countries, the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is #205. Check the  
Programming and Use guide for the communications system.  
Line Coverage Extension (#208) and VMS Cover Rings (#117) are not available on all systems  
Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system.  
5-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management  
VMS Line Coverage  
If you specify VMS Line Coverage for any system lines, you must assign an  
owner to the covered lines to prevent the system from transferring callers who  
call in on those lines to the receptionist’s extension.  
This section provides instructions on how to:  
Use Line Ownership (see Figure 5-6) to scan, assign, modify, and delete  
current assignments for VMS Line Coverage  
Use Group Call Distribution to specify new lines for VMS Line Coverage  
Programming  
Main Menu  
(Press  
)
9
Line Ownership  
(Press [ 6 ])  
Delete Line  
Ownership  
Scan Line  
Ownership  
(Press [ 2 ])  
Modify Line  
Ownership  
(Press [ 6 ])  
Assign Line  
Ownership  
(Press [ 4 ])  
(Press[ ][ 3 ])  
Figure 5-6. Line Ownership  
5-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management  
Scanning Line Ownership  
To review the current owners of outside lines:  
1. Access the Programming Main Menu:  
] [ ] [ ] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
a. Press [ Intercom ] [  
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
7
7
9
9
#
Enter the Password and press [ # ].  
c.  
d. Press [  
The system plays the system programming options.  
9
].  
2.  
Press [  
6
] for line ownership.  
The system plays:  
To scan line ownership, press 2; to assign line  
ownership, press 4; to modify line ownership, press 6.  
To delete line ownership, press * D.  
3. Press [  
2
].  
The system plays:  
Please enter the CO line number followed by #, or  
press # for the next line owner.  
4. Enter a specific outside line number followed by [ # ], or press [ # ] for the  
first outside line number that has been assigned an owner.  
The system responds as follows:  
If you entered a line number followed by [ # ], the system tells you  
whether or not an owner is assigned.  
If you entered [ # ], the system tells you the mailbox number of the  
owner of the first outside line that has an owner.  
5.  
Press [ # ] to hear the mailbox number for the next outside line that has an  
owner.  
6. Press [  
] [  
7
] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.  
5-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management  
Assigning Line Ownership  
requires coverage and the line owner’s extension number; then use the updated  
To associate an outside line with a specific subscriber’s mailbox:  
1.  
Access the Programming Main Menu:  
a.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
9
9
#
Enter the Password and press [  
#
].  
c.  
d.  
Press [  
9
].  
The system plays the system programming options.  
2.  
Press [  
6
] for line ownership.  
The system plays:  
To scan line ownership, press 2; to assign line  
ownership, press 4; to modify line ownership, press 6.  
To delete line ownership, press * D.  
3. Press [ ].  
4
The system plays:  
Please enter the CO line number followed by #. If  
finished, press * #.  
4.  
Enter the number of the outside line that you want to associate with a  
specific subscriber’s mailbox followed by [ # ].  
If the line already has an owner, the system announces the mailbox  
number of that owner. Otherwise, the system plays:  
CO line X has no owner. Entre the mailbox number of  
the new line owner followed by #. If finished,  
press * #.  
5. Enter the mailbox number followed by [ # ].  
The system plays:  
CO Line X owner is mailbox YY.  
earlier in this chapter for instructions on creating mailboxes.  
6.  
7.  
Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until you assign line ownership for all of the  
appropriate lines.  
Press [  
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.  
7
5-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management  
Modifying Line Ownership  
ownership; then use the updated form while performing the following  
procedure.  
To change line ownership:  
1. Access the Programming Main Menu:  
a.  
b.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
Press [  
9
] [  
9
] [ # ].  
c. Enter the Password and press [ # ].  
d. Press [ ].  
The system plays the system programming options.  
9
2.  
Press [  
6
] for line ownership.  
The system plays:  
To scan line ownership, press 2; to assign line  
ownership, press 4; to modify line ownership, press 6.  
To delete line ownership, press * D.  
3.  
4.  
Press [ ].  
6
The system plays:  
Please enter the CO line number followed by #.  
If finished, press * #.  
Enter the number of the outside line whose ownership you want to modify  
followed by [  
#
].  
If the line does not have an owner, the system tells you so. Otherwise, the  
system plays:  
CO line X owner is mailbox YY. Enter the mailbox  
number of the new line owner followed by #. If  
finished, press * #.  
5. Enter the new mailbox number followed by [ # ].  
The system plays:  
CO Line X owner is mailbox YY.  
earlier in this chapter for instructions on creating mailboxes.  
6.  
Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to modify the line ownership for any other lines.  
7. Press [ ] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.  
7
5-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management  
Deleting Line Ownership  
assignments you want to delete; then use the updated form while performing  
the following procedure.  
NOTE:  
If you remove line ownership, either use Group Call Distribution (#206) to  
remove VMS Line Coverage from the line or assign a new mailbox  
number as the owner of the line to prevent the system from transferring  
callers who call in on the covered line to the receptionist’s extension.  
To delete an existing line owner assignment:  
1. Access the Programming Main Menu:  
a. Press [ Intercom ] [  
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].  
7
] [  
7
] [  
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.  
9
9
#
c.  
d.  
Enter the Password and press [ # ].  
Press [ ].  
9
The system plays the system programming options.  
2.  
Press [ ] for line ownership.  
6
The system plays:  
To scan line ownership, press 2; to assign line  
ownership, press 4; to modify line ownership, press 6.  
To delete line ownership, press * D.  
3. Press [  
] [ 3 ].  
The system plays:  
Please enter the CO line number followed by #.  
If finished, press * #.  
4. Enter the number of the outside line whose ownership you want to delete  
followed by [  
#
].  
The system responds as follows:  
If the line has an owner, the system tells you the mailbox number of  
the owner and asks you to confirm the deletion. Go to Step 5.  
If the line has no owner, the system tells you so and asks you to enter  
another CO line number. Enter another line number followed by [ # ] or  
go to Step 7.  
Press [ 9 ] to confirm that you want to delete the ownership assignment.  
5.  
6.  
The system plays:  
Deleted.  
Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to delete other line ownership assignments.  
7. Press [  
] [  
7
] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.  
5-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management  
Group Call Distribution  
Use this procedure to modify the assignment of outside lines for VMS Line  
Coverage.  
communications system to show modifications to VMS-MAIL lines before you  
begin.  
To modify VMS-MAIL lines assignments:  
1. Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [  
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ].  
2. Enter System Password, if required.  
3. Press [  
#
] [  
2
] [  
0
] [ 6 ]*.  
4.  
5.  
At the Group: prompt, press [ 7 ].  
At the Line: prompt, enter the first VMS-MAIL line to be programmed as  
6. Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 3 VMS Line Cover or 2 Not  
Assigned. (Be careful not to choose 1 Assigned because you will  
assign Automated Attendant Service coverage rather than ownership to  
the line.)  
7. To program another line, press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] until the appropriate  
line number displays. Then press [ Next Data ] until 3 VMS Line Cover or  
Not Assigned is displayed.  
2
8. Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [  
0
] to exit programming.  
*
In some countries, the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is #205. Check the  
Programming and Use guide for the communications system.  
5-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management  
Extension Line Coverage  
After assigning Extension Line Coverage, make sure VMS coverage is on for the  
later in this chapter.  
Use this procedure to modify the assignment of outside lines for Extension Line  
Coverage*.  
specific extensions:  
1. Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [  
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ].  
2. Enter System Password, if required.  
3.  
Press [  
#
] [  
2
] [  
0
] [ 8 ].  
4. At the Line: prompt, enter the first VMS-MAIL line to be programmed  
as indicated by the extension number in the Line Coverage column of  
At the Data: prompt, enter the number of the extension in the VMS-MAIL  
5.  
column.  
6.  
To program another line, press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] until the appropriate  
line number displays. Then repeat Step 5.  
7. Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [ 0 ] to exit programming.  
*
This feature is not available on all systems. Check the Programming and Use guide for the  
communications system.  
5-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Management  
Telephone Button Programming  
Update Form C of the System Planner for the communications system if you  
change button programming for a subscriber’s extension.  
It is recommended that the following features be programmed on buttons on  
each subscriber’s system phone:  
VMS Cover allows the subscriber to manually turn on and off voice mail  
coverage.  
Do Not Disturb allows the subscriber to send callers to his or her mailbox  
immediately without first ringing the subscriber’s extension.  
Voice Mailbox Transfer allows the subscriber to transfer callers directly to  
other subscribers’ voice mailboxes.  
VM Messages allows the subscriber to access the voice messaging  
system for message retrieval with the touch of a button.  
The procedures in this section use Centralized Telephone Programming.  
VMS Cover  
To give a subscriber the ability to turn voice mail coverage on and off, you can  
program a VMS Cover button on the subscriber’s system phone.  
To program a VMS Cover button:  
1. Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [  
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ] [ Central Tel Program ].  
Enter the number of the extension to be programmed.  
2.  
3. Press a programmable button with lights.  
Press [ Feature ] [  
1
] [  
5
]*.  
4.  
5.  
Program another button for this extension or press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [ ] to exit  
0
programming mode.  
6. Label the button at the user’s extension.  
*
In some countries, the feature code for VMS Cover is [ 1 ] [ 6 ]. Check the Programming and Use  
guide for the communications system.  
5-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Management  
Do Not Disturb  
Used in conjunction with either automatic or manual extension coverage, this  
button lets subscribers send callers immediately to their voice mailbox.  
To program a Do Not Disturb button:  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [  
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ] [ Central Tel Program ].  
Enter the number of the extension to be programmed.  
Press a programmable button with lights.  
4. Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [ 1 ].  
5.  
Program another button for this extension or press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [ 0 ] to exit  
programming mode.  
6.  
Label the button at the user’s extension.  
Voice Mailbox Transfer  
A Voice Mailbox Transfer button lets any system user transfer calls directly to  
another subscriber’s mailbox, without ringing the extension. If, for example, a  
caller wants to talk to a subscriber who is on vacation, the receptionist can  
transfer the call directly to the subscriber’s mailbox by pressing this button and  
entering the subscriber’s extension number (or pressing an Auto Dial button).  
The voice messaging system answers the call, the caller hears the subscriber’s  
personal greeting (if recorded), and the caller can then leave a message for the  
subscriber.  
To program a Voice Mailbox Transfer button:  
1. Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [  
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ] [ Central Tel Program ].  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
Enter the number of the extension to be programmed.  
Press a programmable button.  
Press [ Feature ] [  
1
] [ 4 ]*.  
Program another button for this extension or press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [ ] to exit  
0
programming mode.  
6.  
Label the button at the user’s extension.  
*
In some countries, the feature code for Voice Mailbox Transfer is [ 1 ] [ 5 ]. Check the Programming  
and Use guide for the communications system.  
5-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Management  
Voice Mail Messages  
This intercom Auto Dial button allows the subscriber to access the voice  
messaging system with one touch of a button.  
To program a Voice Mail Messages button:  
1.  
Press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [  
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ] [ Central Tel Program ].  
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed.  
3. Press a programmable button.  
4. Press [ Intercom ] [  
7
] [  
7
] [ 7 ].  
Program another button for this extension or press [ Feature ] [  
0
] [ ] to exit  
0
5.  
programming mode.  
6. Label the button at the user’s extension.  
5-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
6
Contents  
Outside Callers Hear Silence, Tones, or Ringing During  
Transfer  
6-3  
Menu Prompt  
6-3  
Recording  
6-6  
6-8  
Subscriber  
6-i  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
6
When You Need Help  
If you have a problem with your system, you may be able to solve it yourself by  
following the appropriate troubleshooting procedures described in this chapter.  
If not, you can call for help: in the continental U.S., call the Technical Service  
Center at 1 800 628-2888; outside the continental U.S., call your Lucent  
Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer.  
The following sections describe various difficulties that might occur, possible  
causes for the difficulty, and procedures you can follow to try to solve the  
problem.  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Troubleshooting  
Automated Attendant Service  
Outside Callers Hear Ringing, but System Does  
Not Answer  
Possible Cause 1: This is normal when the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions are  
busy.  
What to do: There are a number of ways to reduce the amount of time a  
PARTNER MAIL VS extension is busy. For example, you can recommend that  
users access the Tutor Service feature during non-peak calling hours, you can  
reduce the number of options in the Automated Attendant Service menu, or you  
can reduce the length of the Automated Attendant Service menu prompt.  
Possible Cause 2: The PARTNER MAIL VS module may not be installed  
correctly.  
What to do: Check the PARTNER MAIL VS module to make sure it is securely  
mounted in the control unit. Also check the module’s LEDs: the Power LED  
should be steady green and the Status LED should not be lit.  
If the Power and Status LEDs are lit, perform the System Save Reset All  
procedure by entering 989-RESET (989-73738) after you log in as the System  
Manager.  
If the Power LED is not lit, power down the control unit, reseat the PARTNER  
MAIL VS module, and power up the control unit.  
If the module is working properly after one minute, the problem is solved.  
If the module still does not work properly, go to Possible Cause 3.  
Possible Cause 3: The PARTNER MAIL VS may not be programmed correctly.  
numbers that are associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS module. Then use  
Hunt Group Extensions (#505) to verify that the VMS extensions are assigned to  
Hunt Group 7.  
If Hunt Group 7 does not have the correct VMS extensions, assign the  
correct extension numbers.  
If Hunt Group 7 has the correct VMS extensions, call for help*.  
*
In the continental U.S., help is available at 1 800 628-2888. Outside the continental U.S., call  
your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer.  
6-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Outside Callers Hear Silence, Tones, or Ringing  
During Transfer  
Possible Cause: Music On Hold is not set up for the system.  
What to do: See Music On Hold (#602) in the Programming and Use guide for  
the communications system.  
System Does Not Answer Immediately  
Possible Cause 1: Automated Attendant Service is programmed for Delayed  
call handling.  
What to do: If you do not want Delayed call handling, program the  
communications system’s VMS Hunt Delay feature for Immediate call handling.  
Possible Cause 2: The PARTNER MAIL VS extensions may be busy.  
What to do: There are a number of ways to reduce the amount of time a  
PARTNER MAIL VS extension is busy. For example, you can recommend that  
users access the Tutor Service feature during non-peak calling hours, you can  
reduce the number of options in the Automated Attendant Service menu, or you  
can reduce the length of the Automated Attendant Service menu prompt.  
System Cuts Off Part of Greeting  
Possible Cause 1: You may have begun recording the greeting too soon.  
What to do: Re-record the greeting. After the prompt to record the greeting,  
pause a moment before speaking.  
Possible Cause 2: A touch-tone signal may have been recorded accidentally  
with the greeting.  
What to do: Re-record the greeting.  
System Transfers Call to Receptionist Before  
Playing the Menu Prompt  
Possible Cause: The extensions associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS  
module were not assigned to Hunt Group 7.  
numbers that are associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS module. Then use  
Hunt Group Extensions (#505) to verify that the VMS extensions are assigned to  
Hunt Group 7.  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Troubleshooting  
System Does Not Transfer Calls Properly  
Possible Cause 1: If this occurs when the Automated Attendant Service answers  
calls, the Menu Definition may be programmed incorrectly.  
test Automated Attendant Service.  
If outside calls are not transferred to the correct extension or group,  
follow the instructions for “Menu Definition and Day Menu Prompt” as  
the Menu Definition.  
If outside calls are transferred to the correct extension or group, go to  
Possible Cause 2.  
Possible Cause 2: A valid destination was not entered by the caller.  
What to do: Make sure a valid destination was entered. Check the Programming  
and Use guide for your communications system to determine valid extension  
and group numbers.  
System Does Not Respond to Entered Digits  
Possible Cause 1: System is not receiving touchtones.  
What to do: The voice messaging system may not be able to interpret  
touchtones while a greeting plays. Wait until the greeting finishes before  
entering the touchtones. If you are using a speakerphone, turn off the  
microphone.  
Possible Cause 2: If this occurs when the Automated Attendant Service answers  
calls, the Menu Definition may be programmed incorrectly.  
test Automated Attendant Service.  
If outside calls are not transferred to the correct extension or group,  
follow the instructions for “Menu Definition and Day Menu Prompt” as  
the Menu Definition.  
If outside calls are transferred to the correct extension or group, go to  
Possible Cause 3.  
Possible Cause 3: The line is too noisy.  
What to do: Call your local telephone company.  
6-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Unanswered Transferred Calls Ring Continually  
Possible Cause: In some countries, the telephone company does not always  
provide a far-end disconnect signal. This causes the line to remain open even  
after the caller hangs up.  
What to do: Assign voice mail coverage to all extensions in the system; this is  
especially important for extension 10. Also, make sure voice mail coverage is on  
at extension 10 at night when no one is around to manually disconnect calls.  
The voice messaging system will disconnect any call to an extension that has  
voice mail coverage after 15 seconds of silence.  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Call Answer Service  
Call Answer Service Takes Too Long to Answer  
Calls  
Possible Cause: Calls ring four times at a subscriber’s extension to give the  
subscriber a chance to answer the call.  
What to do: Recommend that subscribers program a Do Not Disturb button on  
their system phones. They should turn on the feature when they leave their  
desks or whenever they are too busy to answer calls. Calls to extensions with  
Do Not Disturb on are answered immediately.  
Call Answer Service Terminates Message While  
Caller Is Recording  
Possible Cause: The caller’s recording time exceeded the mailbox’s message  
time limit. (The time limit for recording a message is four minutes.)  
What to do: Let the caller know the recording time limit. Also let the caller know  
that he or she can press [ ] [ 8 ] and the appropriate extension number to transfer  
to the extension again—this avoids making another outside call—to finish the  
message if necessary.  
Messages Cannot Be Deposited in Mailbox  
Possible Cause: The mailbox is full.  
What to do: Old messages must be deleted regularly from mailboxes. When a  
subscriber’s mailbox is full, the caller cannot leave a message in that mailbox  
but is given the option of transferring to another extension. For all subscribers,  
mailboxes can store up to 20 minutes of recorded messages (or 40 messages,  
whichever is reached first). The receptionist’s mailbox at extension 10 can store  
up to 60 minutes of recorded messages (or 120 messages).  
6-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Troubleshooting  
Voice Mail Service  
Subscriber Unable to Log In to Voice Mail  
Possible Cause 1: A subscriber entered the number of a mailbox that does not  
exist.  
What to do: Make sure the subscriber enters an existing mailbox number. Use  
mailboxes.  
If the subscriber tries again and succeeds, the problem is solved.  
If the subscriber still cannot log in, go to Possible Cause 2.  
Possible Cause 2: The subscriber forgot his or her password or entered it  
incorrectly.  
What to do: The subscriber should try entering the password again.  
If the subscriber can log in, the problem is solved.  
If the subscriber still cannot log in, re-initialize the password as  
must call for help*.)  
Date or Time in Message Headers Is Incorrect  
Possible Cause: The day, date, or time programmed for the communications  
system is incorrect or the PARTNER MAIL VS system was not updated with the  
correct time.  
What to do: Refer to System Date (#101), System Day (#102), or System Time  
(#103) in the Programming and Use guide for the communications system to  
check the day, date, or time settings. If the day, date, and time are correct,  
choose one of these procedures and re-enter the correct value. After one  
minute, this updates the day, date, and time on the voice messaging system. If  
message headers for new messages are still incorrect, call for help*.  
*
In the continental U.S., help is available at 1 800 628-2888. Outside the continental U.S., call  
your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer.  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Troubleshooting  
Subscriber Cannot Forward Messages to Another  
Subscriber  
Possible Cause 1: The recipient’s mailbox is full or does not have enough  
space remaining to accommodate the message.  
What to do: Old messages must be deleted regularly from mailboxes. When a  
subscriber’s mailbox is full, the caller cannot leave a message in that mailbox  
but is given the option of transferring to another extension. The sender cannot  
resend the forwarded message until the mailbox has more message space. For  
all subscribers, mailboxes can store up to 20 minutes of recorded messages (or  
40 messages). The receptionist’s mailbox at extension 10 can store up to 60  
minutes of recorded messages (or 120 messages).  
Possible Cause 2: The message has been forwarded the maximum of 13 times.  
What to do: Verify the number of times the message has been forwarded.  
Subscribers Hear Busy Signal When Calling In  
to Voice Mail  
Possible Cause 1: This is normal when the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions are  
busy.  
What to do: There are a number of ways to reduce the amount of time a  
PARTNER MAIL VS extension is busy. For example, you can recommend that  
users access the Tutor Service feature during non-peak calling hours, you can  
reduce the number options in the Automated Attendant Service menu, or you  
can reduce the length of the Automated Attendant Service menu prompt. If you  
have a 2-port system, you may want to consider upgrading to a 4-port system.  
Possible Cause 2: The PARTNER MAIL VS module may not be installed  
correctly.  
What to do: Check the PARTNER MAIL VS module to make sure it is securely  
mounted in the control unit. Also check the module’s LEDs: the Power LED  
should be steady green and the Status LED should not be lit.  
If the Power and Status LEDs are lit, perform the System Save Reset All  
procedure by entering 989-RESET (989-73738) after you log in as the System  
Manager.  
If the Power LED is not lit, power down the control unit, reseat the PARTNER  
MAIL VS module, and power up the control unit.  
If the module is working properly after one minute, the problem is solved.  
If the module still does not work properly, go to Possible Cause 3.  
6-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Possible Cause 3: The PARTNER MAIL VS may not be programmed correctly.  
numbers that are associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS module. Then use  
Hunt Group Extensions (#505) to verify that the VMS extensions are assigned to  
Hunt Group 7.  
If Hunt Group 7 does not have the correct VMS extensions, assign the  
correct extension numbers.  
If Hunt Group 7 has the correct VMS extensions, call for help*.  
Message Light Does Not Turn Off  
Possible Cause: There are messages in the mailbox. The message light stays  
on if there are any new (unretrieved) messages in the mailbox.  
What to do: Retrieve or delete all new messages from the mailbox.  
Outcalling Is Delayed  
Possible Cause 1: There is heavy call traffic and Outcalling volume on the mail  
system. The Outcalling port is also used in call handling. If your system  
performs heavy Outcalling or has heavy call volume, the port may frequently be  
unavailable for Outcalling.  
What to do: You may need more ports (if you have a 2-port system), or you  
may need to reduce the number of subscribers who have Outcalling privileges.  
Outcalling to a Digital Pager Is Not Working  
Possible Cause 1: The Outcalling number is not properly programmed.  
What to do: Check that the Outcalling number is correct. If not, reprogram the  
number.  
Possible Cause 2: Insufficient number of pauses in Outcalling number.  
What to do: It is important to include a sufficient number of pauses between the  
pager number and the Personal Identification Number (PIN), or between the  
pager number and the callback number. Leave several pauses after the pager  
number. You must allow enough time for the paging system to answer before  
the PIN and/or callback number is dialed.  
In addition, a pause should follow the “9” dialed to get an outside line. And if the  
communications system is set to rotary (rather than touchtone) service, pauses  
may need to be included after every digit in the Outcalling number.  
*
In the continental U.S., help is available at 1 800 628-2888. Outside the continental U.S., call  
your Lucent Technologies Representative or Authorized Dealer.  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Troubleshooting  
Possible Cause 3: A line may not be available to place a call.  
What to do: If all lines are in use when the system attempts to outcall, the  
outcall does not go through. The mail system attempts to outcall three times  
within a minimum time interval of 15 minutes between attempts. When  
subsequent attempts are made during a peak line-activity period, these  
attempts may be delayed much longer. And if the subscriber’s Outcalling  
Schedule end time occurs before the additional attempts, these attempts will  
not be made by the system. You may need to obtain more lines if the problem  
occurs frequently.  
Possible Cause 4: The message was received outside the hours programmed  
in the subscriber’s Outcalling Schedule, or the Outcalling period was ended.  
What to do: This is standard operation. Outcalling is performed only during the  
hours specified by the subscriber’s Outcalling Schedule. Outcalling will be done  
only for message received during the Outcalling period.  
Possible Cause 5: Outcalling may not be turned on.  
What to do: Have the mailbox owner verify that Outcalling is turned on. The  
System Manager should also verify that the Outcalling privilege is assigned.  
Outcalling to a Telephone Is Not Working  
Possible Cause 1: The Outcalling number is not properly programmed.  
What to do: Check that the Outcalling number is correct. If not, reprogram the  
number.  
Possible Cause 2: A line may not be available to place a call.  
What to do: If all lines are in use when the system attempts to outcall, the  
outcall does not go through. The mail system attempts to outcall three times  
within a minimum time interval of 15 minutes between attempts. When  
subsequent attempts are made during a peak line-activity period, these  
attempts may be delayed much longer. And if the subscriber’s Outcalling  
Schedule end time occurs before the additional attempts, these attempts will  
not be made by the system. You may need to obtain more lines if the problem  
occurs frequently.  
Possible Cause 3: The message was received outside the hours programmed  
in the subscriber’s Outcalling Schedule, or the Outcalling period was ended.  
What to do: This is standard operation. Outcalling is performed only during the  
hours specified by the subscriber’s Outcalling Schedule. Outcalling will be done  
only for message received during the Outcalling period.  
Possible Cause 4: Outcalling may not be turned on.  
What to do: Have the mailbox owner verify that Outcalling is turned on. The  
System Manager should also verify that the Outcalling privilege is assigned.  
6-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Language  
Cannot Switch Between Primary and Secondary  
Languages  
Possible Cause: The system is set for Monolingual Mode.  
the system’s Language Mode.  
Cannot Understand Language Prompts  
Possible Cause: Either a language you do not understand was inadvertently  
chosen while programming, or you do not understand the factory-set language.  
What to do: To change the language to one you understand, do one of the  
following:  
If the system is set for Monolingual Mode:  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
7
] [  
7
] [ ].  
7
a.  
b.  
c.  
Press [  
9
] [  
9
] [  
#
].  
Enter the System Manager’s Mailbox Password.  
d. Press [  
9
] [  
1
] [  
2
] [ 6 ].  
e. Press the number corresponding to the desired language.  
f .  
Press [  
9
].  
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode:  
a.  
b.  
Press [ Intercom ] [  
7
] [  
7
] [ 7 ].  
Press [  
9
] [  
9
] [  
#
].  
c. Enter the System Manager’s Mailbox Password.  
d.  
Press [  
9
] [  
1
] [  
2
] [  
1
] [ 6 ].  
e. Press the number corresponding to the desired language.  
f .  
Press [  
9
].  
6-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Specifications  
A
Capacities  
Mailboxes  
Mail Capacity: Ext. 10, 60 minutes (120 messages);  
subscriber, 20 minutes (40 messages)  
Message Length: 1 second to 4 minutes  
Personal Greeting Length: 1 second to 4 minutes  
Answers on this number of rings: 2 (immediate) or 4  
(delayed)  
Automated  
Attendant  
Receptionist’s Extension (Dial 0): Extension 10  
Dial 0 Timeout: 5 seconds  
Dial 0 Timeout Action (day and night): Transfer to  
receptionist  
Menu Levels: 1  
Menu Options: 9 allowed (5 recommended)  
Without Mailbox Expansion Card: 2 voice channels (ports),  
10 mailboxes, 240 minutes of voice storage maximum  
With Mailbox Expansion Card (Maximum):  
System Capacities  
Voice Storage  
440 minutes  
440 minutes  
840 minutes  
# of Mailboxes  
# of Ports  
20  
20  
40  
2
4
4
Total Number of Calls Supported During Peak Usage Hour:  
Calls  
4-port  
Call Connect Time  
2-port  
25  
12  
122  
61  
0.5 minutes  
1 minute  
40  
8
1.5 minutes  
Call connect time is an average for all calls to the PARTNER MAIL VS system including Tutor, Automated  
Attendant Service, Call Answer Service, and Voice Mail Service. This information assumes a 2% probability of  
system blockage.  
A -1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Specifications  
Communications  
System  
The PARTNER MAIL VS system is supported on the following  
PARTNER Plus, PARTNER II, PARTNER Advanced, and  
PARTNER 48 communications systems:  
In most countries: Release 3.1 or later of PARTNER Plus,  
PARTNER II, and PARTNER 48, and Release 1.0 of  
PARTNER Advanced Communications System  
In United Kingdom: Release 2.0 or later of PARTNER Plus  
and PARTNER 48  
Languages Supported  
U.S. English  
United Kingdom English  
Latin American Spanish  
Canadian French  
Default Mode:Monolingual  
Default Languages:  
Monolingual Mode: U.S. English  
Bilingual Mode: U.S. English (primary)/Latin American  
Spanish (secondary)  
Dimensions  
and Weights  
(approx.)  
PARTNER MAIL VS: 11”(D) x 17”(H) x 1.5”(W) or 27.9 x  
43.2 x 3.8 cm 4.3 lbs or 2.0 kgs  
Mailbox Exp. Card: 3.4”(D) x 2.1”(H) x 0.2”(W) or 8.6 x 5.3  
x 0.5 cm .07 lbs or 32 grams  
Electrical  
Specifications  
15 Watts (52 BTU/hour) during normal and maximum power  
consumption  
Maximum current 0.13 Amps  
Battery backup compatible  
68000 microprocessor, 256Kbytes RAM, 512Kbytes ROM  
Processors  
Voice encoding method: Regular Pulse Excitation–Long  
Specifications  
Term Prediction (RPE–LTP) Linear Predictive Coder  
Digital Signal Processor (DSP), 16 bit  
A-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Environmental  
Requirements—  
Control Unit  
Mount on a wall at least 2 feet (0.6 meters) from the floor  
(wall mounting required)  
Locate within 5 feet (1.5 meters) of the network interface  
jacks and a properly grounded electrical outlet not  
controlled by switch, using supplied 7-foot (2.1 meter)  
cords  
Mount the Expansion Carrier at least 6” (15.2 cm) and not  
more than 24” (61 cm) away from the Primary Carrier  
Operating temperature 32° to +104°F (0° to +40°C), not in  
direct sunlight  
Humidity 15%-90%, noncondensing  
For proper ventilation and easy replacement of modules,  
provide at least 6” (15.2cm) clearance at the top and  
sides and 2 feet (0.6 meters) at the front and bottom of  
the control unit  
Locate in an area free of excess moisture, corrosive  
gases, dust and chemicals  
Electrical  
Requirements  
U.S. and Canada: 90–130 VAC, 50–60 Hz, 3-prong outlet  
separate ground, separately fused at 15 Amps: Other  
countries: 180–264 VAC, 50–60 Hz, fused at 10 Amps  
Outlet must not be controlled by an on/off switch  
Grounding to comply with Underwriters Laboratories (UL)  
1459:  
1.  
An insulated grounding conductor that is not smaller in  
size and equivalent in insulation material and thickness  
to the grounded and ungrounded branch circuit  
supply conductors, except that it is green with or  
without one or more yellow stripes, is to be installed as  
part of the circuit that supplies the product or system.  
The grounding conductor mentioned in item A is to be  
connected to ground at service equipment.  
2.  
3. The attachment-plug receptacles in the vicinity of the  
product or system are all to be of a grounding type,  
and the grounding conductors serving these  
receptacles are to be connected to earth ground at  
the service equipment.  
Safety  
Requirements  
U.S.: Meets UL 1459 Issue 2  
Canada: Meets CSA C22.2, 225  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Government  
Approvals and  
Local Phone  
Company  
U.S.: FCC Part 68  
FCC registration number (U.S.): AS5 USA-61630-KF-E  
FCC Part 15 Class A  
REN (outside line jack): 0.9A per line jack  
Jack type: RJ11C  
Information  
Loop start lines  
Canada: IC CP01, Issue 7  
IC registration number (Canada): 230 3756A  
IC CS03, Issues 6&7  
Load Number = 7  
Loop start lines  
A-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCC Information  
B
Federal Communications Commission  
(FCC) Interference Information  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class  
A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC rules. These limits are designed to  
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment  
is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and  
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance  
with the instruction manuals, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to  
cause harmful interference, in which case the user will have to correct the  
interference at his or her own expense.  
NOTE:  
References to FCC regulations are not applicable outside of the U.S.  
B-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
FCC Information  
FCC Notification and Repair Information  
This equipment is registered with the FCC in accordance with Part 68 of its  
rules. In compliance with those rules, you are advised of the following:  
Means of Connection: Connection to the telephone network shall be  
through a standard network interface jack USOC RJ11C. These USOCs  
must be ordered from your local telephone company.  
This equipment may not be used with party lines or coin telephone lines.  
Notification to the Telephone Companies: Before connecting this  
equipment, you or your equipment supplier must notify your local  
telephone company’s business office of the following:  
The telephone number(s) you will be using with this equipment.  
The appropriate registration number and ringer equivalence number  
(REN), which can be found on the right hand side of the primary  
carrier.  
You must also notify your local telephone company if and when this  
equipment is permanently disconnected from the line(s).  
Repair Instructions: If you experience trouble because your equipment  
is malfunctioning, the FCC requires that you disconnect the equipment  
from the network and not use it until the problem has been corrected.  
Repairs to this equipment can only be made by the manufacturer, its  
authorized agents, or by others who may be authorized by the FCC. In  
the event repairs are needed on this equipment, please contact the  
Lucent Technologies Technical Service Center at 1 800 643-2353. For  
Rights of the Local Telephone Company: If this equipment causes  
harm to the telephone network, the local telephone company may  
discontinue your service temporarily. If possible, they will notify you in  
advance. But if advance notice is not practical, you will be notified as  
soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint  
with the FCC.  
Your local telephone company may make changes in its facilities,  
equipment, operations, or procedures that affect the proper functioning  
of this equipment. If they do, you will be notified in advance to give you  
an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service.  
B-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCC Information  
IC Notification and Repair  
Information  
The Industry Canada (IC) label identifies certified equipment. This certification  
means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network  
protective, operational, and safety requirements. The IC does not guarantee the  
equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.  
Before installing the equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to  
connect it to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The  
equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection.  
In some cases, the company’s inside wiring for single-line individual service  
may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone  
extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above  
conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.  
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian  
maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made  
by the user to this equipment, or any equipment malfunctions, may give the  
telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the  
equipment.  
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground  
connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe  
system, if present, are connected. This precaution may be particularly important  
in rural areas.  
CAUTION:  
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but  
should contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or  
electrician, as appropriate.  
To prevent overloading, the Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal  
device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone  
loop used by the device. The termination on a loop may consist of any  
combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load  
Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100.  
lC Certification No.: 230 3756A  
CSA Certification No.: LR 60486  
Load No.: 7  
B-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
FCC Information  
Renseignements sur la notification du ministére  
des Communications du Canada et la réparation  
L’étiquette du Ministère des Communications du Canada identifie le matériel  
homologué. Cette étiquette certifie que le matériel est conforme à certaines  
normes de protection, d’exploitation et de sécurité des réseaux de  
télécommunications. Le Ministère n’assure toutefois pas que le matériel  
fonctionnera à la satisfaction de l’utilisateur.  
Avant d’installer ce matériel, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer qu’il est permis de le  
raccorder aux installations de l’entreprise locale de télécommunication. Le  
matériel doit également être installé en suivant une méthode acceptée de  
raccordement. Dans certains cas, les fils intérieurs de l’enterprise utilisés pour  
un service individuel à ligne unique peuvent être prolongés au moyen d’un  
dispositif homologué de raccordement (cordon prolongateur téléphonique  
interne). L’abonné ne doit pas oublier qu’il est possible que la conformité aux  
conditions énoncées ci-dessus n’empêchent pas la dégradation du service  
dans certaines situations. Actuellement, les entreprises de télécommunication  
ne permettent pas que l’on raccorde leur matériel à des jacks d’abonné, sauf  
dans les cas précis prévus pas les tarifs particuliers de ces entreprises.  
Les réparations de matériel homologué doivent être effectuées par un centre  
d’entretien canadien autorisé désigné par le foumisseur. La compagnie de  
télécommunications peut demander à l’utilisateur de débrancher un appareil à  
la suite de réparations ou de modifications effectuées par l’utilisateur ou à  
cause de mauvais fonctionnement.  
Pour sa propre protection, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer que tous les fils de mise à  
la terre de la source d’énergie électrique, des lignes téléphoniques et des  
canalisations d’eau métalliques, s’il y en a, sont raccordés ensemble. Cette  
précaution est particuliérement importante dans les régions rurales.  
AVERTISSEMENT:  
L’utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui-même; il doit  
avoir racours à un service d’inspection des installations électriques, ou à  
un électricien, selon le cas.  
L’indice de charge (IC) assigné à chaque dispositif terminal indique, pour éviter  
toute surcharge, le pourcentage de la charge totale qui peut être raccordée a  
un circuit téléphonique boucié utilisé par ce dispositif. La terminaison du circuit  
bouclé peut être constituée de n’importe quelle combinaison de dispositifs,  
pourvu que la somme des indices de charge de l’ensemble des dispositifs ne  
dépasse pas 100.  
No d’homolagation: 230 3756A  
No de certification CSA: LR 60486  
L’indice de charge: 7  
B-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warranty Information  
C
Repair Information  
Outside the continental U.S., contact your Lucent Technologies Representative  
or local Authorized Dealer for warranty and repair information applicable to your  
system.  
In-Warranty Repairs  
If you purchased or leased your system directly from Lucent Technologies,  
Lucent Technologies will repair it free of charge during the one-year warranty  
period. Simply call the Lucent Technologies Technical Service Center and ask  
for service.  
Business-Day service is standard during the warranty period for both the control  
unit and system phones. Business-Day service is performed during normal  
business hours. However, if you need 24-hour service protection during the  
warranty period on the control unit in case there is a major system failure, you  
can purchase an Around-the-Clock service contract from your local Lucent  
Technologies sales office. (Around-the-Clock service is not available for  
phones.)  
If you purchased or leased your system through a Lucent Technologies  
Authorized Dealer, contact your dealer for repairs.  
C-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Warranty Information  
Post-Warranty Repairs  
If you purchased your system from Lucent Technologies and you have a post-  
warranty service contact, Lucent Technologies service is provided under the  
terms of that contract.  
To significantly reduce unexpected repair costs after the warranty period, you  
can purchase a post-warranty service contract from Lucent Technologies. If you  
do not have a contract, Lucent Technologies service is provided on a time-and-  
materials basis by calling the Lucent Technologies Technical Service Center. A  
contract provides you, within the applicable coverage period and response  
times, service calls with no charge for parts and labor on covered repairs. Both  
Business-Day and Around-the-Clock coverages of varying lengths are available.  
To order a post-warranty service contract, call 1 800 247-7000 (in the  
continental U.S. only).  
If you leased your system from Lucent Technologies, Business-Day service  
is included in your lease. To upgrade to Around-the-Clock service, call  
1 800 247-7000 (in the continental U.S. only).  
If you purchased or leased your system through a Lucent Technologies  
Authorized Dealer, contact your dealer for repairs.  
C-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warranty Information  
Lucent Technologies Warranty and  
Limitation of Liability  
Lucent Technologies warrant you, the customer, that your system will be in  
good working order on the date Lucent Technologies or its authorized reseller  
delivers or installs the system, whichever is later (“Warranty Date”). If you notify  
Lucent Technologies or its Authorized Dealer within one year of the Warranty  
Date that your system is not in good working order, Lucent Technologies will  
without charge to you repair or replace, at its option, the system components  
that are not in good working order. Repair or replacement parts may be new or  
refurbished and will be provided on an exchange basis. If Lucent Technologies  
determines that your system cannot be repaired or replaced, Lucent  
Technologies will remove the system and, at your option, refund the purchase  
price of your system or apply the purchase price towards the purchase of  
another Lucent Technologies system.  
If you purchased your system directly from Lucent Technologies, Lucent  
Technologies will perform warranty repair in accordance with the terms and  
conditions of the specific type of Lucent Technologies maintenance coverage  
you selected. A written explanation of Lucent Technologies’ types of  
maintenance coverage may be obtained from Lucent Technologies by calling  
1 800 247-7000 (in the continental U.S. only). If you purchased your system  
from a Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer, contact your reseller for the  
details of the maintenance plan applicable to your system.  
This Lucent Technologies limited warranty covers damage to the system  
caused by power surges.  
Unless otherwise expressly agreed to in a written agreement signed by Lucent  
Technologies, Lucent Technologies will not be responsible under this limited  
warranty for damages resulting from:  
Failure to follow Lucent Technologies’ installation, operation, or  
maintenance instructions;  
Unauthorized system modification, movement, or alteration;  
Unauthorized use of common carrier communication services accessed  
through the system;  
Abuse, misuse, or negligent acts or omissions of the customer and  
persons under the customer’s control; or  
Act of third parties and acts of God.  
C-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Warranty Information  
LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES’ OBLIGATION TO REPAIR, REPLACE, OR  
REFUND, AS SET FORTH ABOVE, IS YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY.  
EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY SET FORTH ABOVE, LUCENT  
TECHNOLOGIES, ITS AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS, AND DEALERS MAKE NO  
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM  
ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
Limitation of Liability  
Except as provided below, the liability of Lucent Technologies and its affiliates  
and suppliers for any claims, losses, damages, or expenses from any cause  
whatsoever (including acts or omissions of third parties), regardless of the form  
of action, whether in contract, tort, or otherwise, shall not exceed the lesser of:  
(1) the direct damages proven; or (2) the repair cost, replacement cost, license  
fee, annual rental charge, or purchase price, as the case may be, of the  
equipment that directly gives rise to claim. Except as provided below, Lucent  
Technologies and its affiliates and suppliers shall not be liable for any  
incidental, special, reliance, consequential, or indirect loss or damage incurred  
in connection with the equipment. As used in this paragraph, consequential  
damages include, but are not limited to, the following: lost profits, lost  
revenues, and losses arising out of unauthorized use (or charges for such use)  
of common carrier telecommunications services or facilities accessed through  
or connected to the equipment. For personal injury caused by Lucent  
Technologies’ negligence, Lucent Technologies’ liability shall be limited to  
proven damages to person. No action or proceeding against Lucent  
Technologies or its affiliates or suppliers may be commenced more than twelve  
(12) months after the cause of action accrues. THIS PARAGRAPH SHALL  
SURVIVE FAILURE OF AN EXCLUSIVE REMEDY.  
C -4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Voice Messaging System  
Planning Forms  
D
This appendix contains the voice messaging system forms. We suggest you fill  
in a photocopy of the form you need, leaving the blank original in the book, in  
case you need to make revisions in the future. These forms must be completed  
before the voice mail system is installed because they serve as a reference for  
the person who installs and programs the system.  
It is important to keep an accurate, up-to-date record of the programming for  
the voice mail system. If you change the system after installation, you should  
update the forms that were used when the system was installed.  
NOTE:  
Before you begin to fill out the voice mail system Planning Forms, you  
need a complete, current copy of the communications system Planning  
for completing each form are contained on the form itself.  
D-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Voice Messaging System Planning Forms  
How To Use the Forms  
The following table shows what voice mail system forms should be completed  
according to your voice mail system feature selection:  
To  
From Programming  
Main Menu, press  
Use VMS  
Form  
Select Language Mode, System Language, Primary  
and Secondary Language  
[
[
[
1
4
3
]
]
]
Assign Mailboxes to subscribers, identify Mailbox  
Language and Outcalling privileges  
Identify Menu Definition (i.e., Direct Extension  
Transfer, Selector Code Transfer), Ext. # or Group #  
for Selector Code Transfer, or Annc. #. Required  
For Automated Attendant Service.  
Script Automated Attendant Announcements (in  
System or Primary Language). Required if Annc. #  
is assigned to a Selector Code.  
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
3
3
3
3
3
3
6
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
Script Automated Attendant Announcements (in  
Secondary Language). Required for Bilingual  
Mode if Annc. # is assigned to a Selector Code.  
Script the Day Menu Prompt (in System or Primary  
Language). Required if VMS Hunt Schedule is set  
to Day Only or Always.  
Script the Day Menu Prompt (in Secondary  
Language). Required for Bilingual Mode if VMS  
Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only or Always.  
Script the Night Menu Prompt (in System or Primary  
Language). Required if VMS Hunt Schedule is set  
to Night Only or Always.  
Script the Night Menu Prompt (in Secondary  
Language). Required for Bilingual Mode if VMS  
Hunt Schedule is set to Night Only or Always.  
Assign Line Ownership (cannot be assigned to lines  
assigned Automated Attendant coverage).  
Required if VMS Line Coverage exists for one or  
more lines.  
D -2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Form 1: Language  
Language Mode:  
Monolingual  
Bilingual  
Monolingual Mode–System Language:  
U.S. English ✔  
U.K. English  
Latin American Spanish  
Canadian French  
Other–specify  
Bilingual Mode–Primary Language:  
U.S. English ✔  
U.K. English  
Latin American Spanish  
Canadian French  
Other–specify  
Bilingual Mode–Secondary Language:  
U.S. English  
U.K. English  
Latin American Spanish ✔  
Canadian French  
Other–specify  
Completing this Form  
General Information  
Language Mode Check “Bilingual” if the Language Mode  
Factory defaults are identified by the  
symbol.  
should be set to Bilingual. If you check Bilingual, also see  
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, make sure you record  
the Automated Attendant Day Menu Prompts and Night Menu  
Prompts and Announcements (if any) in both the Primary and  
Secondary Languages. Also, subscribers can record two  
personal greetings—one in the Primary Language and another  
in the Secondary Language.  
below; if not, see  
.
Monolingual Mode—System Language Check the Primary  
language desired if different from the default.  
Bilingual Mode—Primary Language Check the Primary  
Language desired if different from the default.  
Subscribers can have a Mailbox Language different from the  
languages selected here. Mailbox Language is specified on  
Bilingual Mode—Secondary Language Check the  
Secondary Language desired if different from the default.  
Programming Language  
To program the Language Mode, as well as the System  
Language in Monolingual Mode or the Primary and Secondary  
Languages in Bilingual Mode, dial [ 1 ] from the Programming  
Main Menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Form 2: Mailbox Assignments  
Mailbox  
Language  
Mailbox  
Subscriber Name  
Mailbox  
Mailbox  
Language  
Outcalling  
Assigned  
Outcalling  
Assigned  
Subscriber Name  
10 ✔  
(26  
(27  
(28  
)
(11  
(12  
(13  
(14  
(15  
(16  
(17  
(18  
(19  
(20  
(21  
(22  
(23  
(24  
(25  
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
(29  
(30  
(31  
)
)
(32  
(33  
(34  
(35  
(36  
)
)
)
)
)
(37  
)
(38  
)
)
)
(39  
(40  
General Information  
Completing this Form  
Mailbox To assign a mailbox to an extension other than the  
factory default, cross out the factory default and write in the  
extension to be used.  
Factory defaults are identified by the  
symbol.  
The system comes with a predetermined number of mailboxes.  
The optional Mailbox Expansion Card doubles the capacity.  
For PARTNER PLUS, use an extension number from 11-33.  
Mailbox 10 is reserved for the receptionist at extension 10 and  
cannot be changed.  
For PARTNER Advanced Communications System, use an  
extension number from 11-41.  
Mailbox 10 provides 60 minutes of message recording time. All  
other mailboxes provide 20 minutes of message recording time.  
For PARTNER II or PARTNER 48, use an extension number  
from 11-57.  
For system security, mailboxes should be deleted where they  
are not needed; for example, mailboxes should be deleted for  
extensions in use by auxiliary equipment (such as a fax or  
doorphone) and the extensions assigned to the VMS Hunt  
Group.  
To mark an unused mailbox for deletion without assigning an  
extension, cross out the factory default.  
Subscriber Name For every mailbox in use, write the name of  
the mailbox subscriber.  
Guest mailboxes can be created for users who don’t have their  
own phone by assigning an unused extension number as the  
mailbox number. Unused extension numbers include: 1) vacant  
extension jacks in installed 206 modules and 2) extensions in  
your DIAL plan higher than the last extension jack in the last  
more information.  
Mailbox Language For each mailbox that requires a language  
different from the System Language or Primary Language  
Outcalling Assigned For each mailbox in use, indicate  
whether Outcalling is assigned.  
Programming Mailboxes  
You can change a mailbox assignment by deleting an existing  
mailbox and creating a new one.  
To program mailboxes, dial [ 4 ] from the Programming Main menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Form 3: Menu Definition  
Required for Automated Attendant Service  
Description  
Selector  
Code  
Range of Extensions  
for Direct Extension  
Transfer  
Ext. # or Group # for  
Selector Code Transfer,  
or Announcement  
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(10–19  
(20–29  
(30–39  
(40–49  
(50–57  
)
)
)
)
)
(71–74, 771–776  
)
Transfer to Mailbox 10  
Completing this Form  
General Information  
For Direct Extension Transfer...  
Factory defaults are identified by the  
symbol.  
Description Write “Direct Extension Transfer.”  
This Menu Definition applies to both the Day and Night Menu  
prompts.  
Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer  
Leave the factory default.  
The Selector Code is the first digit dialed by the caller in  
response to the menu prompts.  
Ext. # or Group # for Selector Code Transfer...Leave blank.  
In Direct Extension Transfer, Selector Codes 1–5 and 7  
represent the first digit for a range of extensions. These Selector  
Codes let callers dial extension numbers directly.  
For Selector Extension Transfer...  
Write the name of the person or group to receive  
Description  
the transfer.  
In Selector Code Transfer, Selector Codes 1–9 represent a  
specific extension, Group Calling number, (if available) or Hunt  
Group number to which the caller will be transferred. Use the  
following values:  
Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer  
Cross out the factory default if you want the caller to dial the  
corresponding Selector Code to transfer to the extension,  
announcement, or group identified in  
below.  
10–33 or 771–776  
PARTNER Advanced: 11–41, 71–74, or 771–776  
PARTNER Plus:  
Ext. #, or Group # for Selector Code Transfer...Write the  
extension, announcement, or group number to receive the  
transfer.  
10–57, 71–74, or 771–776  
10–57, 71, or 771–776  
PARTNER II:  
PARTNER 48:  
For Announcement...  
Selector Code Transfer lets callers dial a single digit to reach a  
single extension or group, such as the VP of Sales at extension 37  
or the order processing operators assigned to Hunt Group 774.  
Description Write “Announcement.”  
Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer  
Cross out the factory default if you want the caller to dial the  
corresponding Selector Code to hear the Announcement  
Selector Code 9 lets callers transfer directly to mailbox 10  
(receptionist mailbox) where they can leave a message.  
identified in  
below.  
The Description and Selector Code number from this form will  
be used to complete the Day and Night Menu Prompts (Forms  
Announcement # Write the Announcement number (1 or 2).  
For Announcement entries in Description, Selector Code, and  
Announcement # of this form will be used to complete Forms  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Form 3: Menu Definition  
Programming the Menu  
To program the menu definition, dial [ 3 ] from the Programming  
Main Menu and select the Day Menu.  
After defining the menu, the system will prompt you to record the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Form 3A: Automated Attendant Announcement—  
System Language or Primary Language  
Required if Selector Code Transfer is set to Announcement  
:
Announcement #  
Announcement #  
:
Completing this Form  
General Information  
Write the Announcement and its number in the space provided.  
After the Announcement plays, you can program the system to  
hang up or to offer callers the option of pressing *4 (to repeat  
this Announcement), *7 (to return to the Main Menu), *8 (to  
transfer to an extension), or 0.  
Recording the Announcement(s)  
To record the Announcement, dial [ 3 ] from the Programming  
Main Menu.  
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, let callers know they can  
switch the language they hear while listening to the  
Announcement. For example, “Para español, marque * 1.”  
Announcements can supply frequently requested information  
so that your staff is free to assist customers or to perform other  
tasks more efficiently.  
An Announcement can be up to four minutes long.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Form 3B: Automated Attendant Announcement—Secondary Language  
Required for Bilingual Mode only if Selector Code transfer is set to Announcement  
Announcement #  
:
Announcement #  
:
Completing this Form  
General Information  
Write the Announcement and its number in the space provided.  
After the Announcement plays, you can program the system to  
hang up or to offer callers the option of pressing *4 (to repeat  
this Announcement), *7 (to return to the Main Menu), *8 (to  
transfer to an extension), or 0.  
Recording the Announcement(s)  
To record the Announcement, dial [3 ] from the Programming  
Let callers know they can switch to the Primary Language while  
listening to the Announcement. For example, “For English,  
press * 1.”  
Main Menu.  
Announcements can supply frequently requested information so  
that your staff is free to assist customers or to perform other  
tasks more efficiently.  
An Announcement can be up to four minutes long.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Form 4: Day Menu Prompt—  
System Language or Primary Language  
Required if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only or Always  
Completing this Form  
General Information  
Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call  
during normal business hours, including the instructions to the  
caller for selecting menu options.  
The Day Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt  
Schedule is set to Day Only or Always and Night Service is off.  
The Day Menu Prompt and the Night Menu Prompt use the  
same Menu Definition.  
Suggested options include:  
The Day Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of  
menu options.  
“Remain on the line for assistance.”  
“Dial 0 for assistance.”  
The welcome should introduce the company. For example,  
“Thank you for calling the Any Travel Agency.”  
“To hear this menu again, dial * 4.”  
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, let callers know they can  
switch the language they hear while on the call. For example,  
“Para español, marque * 1.”  
Recording the Day Menu Prompt  
To record the Day Menu Prompt, dial [ 3 ] from the Programming  
The menu options should contain instructions that correspond  
Main Menu.  
If callers can dial extension numbers (Direct Extension  
Transfer), the prompt should instruct callers to dial the  
extension number. For example, “If you know the extension  
of the person you want to reach, dial it now.”  
If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or  
group (Selector Code Transfer), the prompt should provide  
instructions such as “To speak to someone in sales, press 6.”  
If callers can can choose an Announcement, include that  
information. For example, “For directions to our office, press 4.”  
It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5  
or less to avoid confusing the caller.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Form 4A: Day Menu Prompt—Secondary Language  
Required for Bilingual Mode only if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only or Always  
Completing this Form  
General Information  
Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call  
during normal business hours, including the instructions to the  
caller for selecting menu options.  
The Day Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt  
Schedule is set to Day Only or Always and Night Service is off.  
The Day Menu Prompt and the Night Menu Prompt use the  
same Menu Definition.  
Suggested options include:  
The Day Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of  
menu options.  
“Remain on the line for assistance.”  
“Dial 0 for assistance.”  
The welcome should introduce the company. For example,  
“To hear this menu again, dial * 4.”  
“Thank you for calling the Any Travel Agency.”  
Let callers know they can switch back to the Primary Language.  
Recording the Day Menu Prompt  
For example, “For English, press * 1.”  
The menu options should contain instructions that correspond  
To record the Day Menu Prompt, dial [ 3 ] from the Programming  
Main Menu.  
If callers can dial extension numbers (Direct Extension  
Transfer), the prompt should instruct callers to dial the  
extension number. For example, “If you know the extension  
of the person you want to reach, dial it now.”  
If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or  
group (Selector Code Transfer), the prompt should provide  
instructions such as “To speak to someone in sales, press 6.”  
If callers can can choose an Announcement, include that  
information. For example, “For directions to our office, press 4.”  
It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5  
or less to avoid confusing the caller.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Form 5: Night Menu Prompt—  
System Language or Primary Language  
Required if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Night Only or Always  
If Selector Code 9 is left as the default, the prompt should  
instruct callers to press 9 to leave a message with the  
receptionist.  
General Information  
The Night Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt  
Schedule is set to Night Only or Always and Night Service is  
on. The Night Menu Prompt and the Day Menu Prompt use the  
same Menu Definition.  
It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5  
or less to avoid confusing the caller.  
The Night Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of  
Completing this Form  
menu options.  
Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call  
after normal business hours, including instructions to the caller for  
selecting menu options.  
The welcome should introduce the company. For example,  
“You have reached the Any Travel Agency. Our hours are 9 AM  
to 5 PM, Monday through Friday.”  
Suggested options include:  
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, let callers know they can  
switch the language they hear while on the call. For example,  
“Para español, marque * 1.”  
“Dial 9 or remain on the line to leave a message.”  
“To hear this menu again, dial * 4.”  
The menu options should contain instructions that correspond  
Recording the Night Menu Prompt  
If callers can dial extension numbers (Direct Extension  
Transfer), the prompt should instruct callers to dial the  
extension number. For example, “If you know the extension  
of the person you want to reach, dial it now and leave a  
message.”  
To record the Night Menu Prompt, dial [3 ] from the  
Programming Main Menu.  
If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or  
group (Selector Code Transfer), the prompt should provide  
instructions such as “To leave a message for Pat, press 6.”  
Keep in mind that there are no group mailboxes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Form 5A: Night Menu Prompt—Secondary Language  
Required for Bilingual Mode only if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Night Only or Always  
If Selector Code 9 is left as the default, the prompt should  
instruct callers to press 9 to leave a message with the  
receptionist.  
General Information  
The Night Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt  
Schedule is set to Night Only or Always and Night Service is  
on. The Night Menu Prompt and the Day Menu Prompt use the  
same Menu Definition.  
It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5  
or less to avoid confusing the caller.  
The Night Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of  
Completing this Form  
menu options.  
Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call  
after normal business hours, including instructions to the caller for  
selecting menu options.  
The welcome should introduce the company. For example,  
“You have reached the Any Travel Agency. Our hours are 9 AM  
to 5 PM, Monday through Friday.”  
Suggested options include:  
Let callers know they can switch back to the Primary Language.  
For example, “For English, press *1.”  
“Dial 9 or remain on the line to leave a message.”  
The menu options should contain instructions that correspond  
“To hear this menu again, dial * 4.”  
If callers can dial extension numbers (Direct Extension  
Transfer), the prompt should instruct callers to dial the  
extension number. For example, “If you know the extension  
of the person you want to reach, dial it now and leave a  
message.”  
Recording the Night Menu Prompt  
To record the Night Menu Prompt, dial [ 3 ] from the  
Programming Main Menu.  
If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or  
group (Selector Code Transfer), the prompt should provide  
instructions such as “To leave a message for Pat, press 6.”  
Keep in mind that there are no group mailboxes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Form 6: Line Ownership  
Required if VMS Line Coverage exists for one or more lines  
Line #  
Telephone Number  
Line Owner (Subscriber Name)  
Mailbox  
Completing this Form  
General Information  
Line # Write the number of the outside line to be covered by  
Lines in the system are assigned either ownership or  
Automated Attendant Service coverage—a single line cannot  
be assigned both types of coverage.  
the voice mailbox of the line owner.  
For PARTNER PLUS, specify an outside line number  
from 01–12.  
Note that more than one line may be assigned to the same  
mailbox, but a single line cannot be assigned to more than one  
mailbox.  
For PARTNER Advanced, specify an outside line number  
from 01–15.  
Lines that are assigned ownership typically are used for  
personal lines or outside access to the voice messaging  
system if Automated Attendant Service is not used. If the  
company has users who need to access mailboxes when no  
one is around to transfer them to their mailboxes, you can set  
up the system as follows:  
For PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 specify an outside line  
number from 01–24.  
Write the telephone number of the  
Telephone Number  
outside line to be covered.  
Line Owner Write the name of the person responsible for  
picking up messages on this line. This is a subscriber from  
Assign extension 10 as owner of the covered lines.  
Instruct users to press [ ] [ 7 ] when they hear the personal  
greeting from extension 10.  
Mailbox  
Write the mailbox number assigned to the  
subscriber.  
See the communications system planning forms to determine  
line numbers, telephone numbers, and line owners’ extensions.  
Programming Line Ownership  
As an alternative to VMS Line Coverage you can use Extension  
To program line ownership, dial [ 6 ] from the Programming Main  
Menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Communications System  
Planning Forms  
E
This appendix contains samples of the communications systems Planning  
Forms. These forms identify certain features of the communications system that  
must be programmed before the voice mail system is installed to ensure that  
both systems are integrated and function appropriately.  
It is important to keep an accurate, up-to-date record of the programming for  
the both systems. If you change the communications system after installation,  
you should update the forms that were used when the communications system  
was installed and ensure that any corresponding voice mail system forms are  
updated accordingly. Samples of the voice mail system Planning Forms are  
for completing each form are contained on the form itself.  
E-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Communications System Planning Forms  
How To Use the Forms  
The following table shows what procedures should be used and to which  
communications systems forms they correspond in planning for voice mail  
system installation and programming:  
To  
Use  
Complete  
Feature/Procedure CS Form  
Assign the extensions associated with the VMS  
hardware to Hunt Group 7.  
Hunt Group  
Extensions (#505)  
Assign lines to Hunt Group 7 so calls can ring  
directly to the VMS and receive Automated  
Attendant Service.  
Group Call  
Distribution (#206)  
Identify an extension as an owner of an outside  
line so calls on that line can ring directly to the  
owner’s voice mailbox when Automatic VMS Cover  
or VMS Cover is on at owner’s ext.  
Line Coverage  
Extension (#208)  
VMS Hunt Delay  
(#506)  
Determine when outside calls should be answered  
by the Automated Attendant Service of the VMS  
(i.e., immediate or delayed call handling).  
Determine when outside calls should ring the VMS VMS Hunt Schedule  
(#507)  
Hunt Group (always, day only, or night only)  
depending on the status of the Night Service  
Button at ext. 10.  
Automatic VMS  
Cover (#310)  
Determine whether an extension’s unanswered  
intercom and transferred calls and outside calls on  
lines assigned ownership are automatically  
covered by the VMS.  
VMS Cover Rings  
(#117)  
Specify the number of times intercom and  
transferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned  
ownership ring at extensions before they are sent  
to the VMS.  
Transfer Return  
Extension (#306)  
Identify the extension to which a call transferred by  
the VMS should be routed if the destination  
extension does not answer and does not have  
voice mail coverage active. (The transfer return  
extension for the VMS is typically ext. 10).  
E-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAGE  
1 of 2  
Form A: System Configuration  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System.  
For additional instructions, see page 2.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Customer Billing Name  
Installation Address  
Contact Name  
6.  
Features Customer is most interested in (most important first):  
Phone  
(
)
Phone  
Phone  
Alternate Trainee’s Name  
Person to be Trained  
(
)
(
)
Phone  
[ ]  
[ ]  
Lucent Technologies Sales Force  
Dealer:  
Salesperson’s Name  
5.  
Sold by  
(
)
7. System Lines  
Line Coverage—You can select one per line  
Write  
R if  
l
2
1
3
l
l
l
l
l
VMS-  
AA  
{#206}  
AA  
Hunt  
VMS- 4  
Mail  
{#206}  
Identify other Local Telephone  
or Owned Line or Identify Equipment Caller ID Company Subscription Services  
(e.g., Repeat Call)  
Line Write the Telephone Numbers  
Jack in order customer desires  
No. (list personal and dedicated lines last)  
Write User's Name for Personal  
Check if  
Rotary  
(Dial  
Group  
{#607}  
for Dedicated Line  
Service  
(write no.)  
{#206}  
Pulse)  
Line  
{#201}  
or  
Only one of these  
{#208}  
types per system  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
PAGE  
2 of 2  
Form A: System Configuration  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs lnnovations  
Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System.  
For additional instructions, see pages 3 and 4.  
Auxiliary Equipment (System). Check if applicable:  
10.  
8. System Settings. Write response on line for each item.  
Battery Backup  
.
Receptionist answers calls during business hours? Write “Yes” or “No”  
Caller ID Devices  
Number of Lines {#104}—By default, 3 lines per PARTNER ACS processor module, 2 lines  
per 206 module and 4 lines per 400 module are assigned to each extension. Write  
Loudspeaker Paging: Number of zones  
Magic on Hold (Music on Hold {#602} must be active.)  
number if different from default  
.
Transfer Return Rings {#105}—By default, a transferred call rings 4 times before going  
to the transfer return extension. Write number (0-9, 0 = no return) if different from  
Uninterruptible Power Supply  
SMDR. If checked, specify the following if appropriate:  
default  
.
SMDR Record Type {#608}—By default, all calls are included on call reports. Write “Out”  
if only outgoing calls are reported  
Outside Conference Denial {#109}—By default, a conference call can include 2 outside  
.
parties. Write “No” if 2 outside parties are not allowed  
VMS Cover Rings {#117}—By default, a call rings 3 times before going to the user’s  
mailbox. Write number (1-9) if different from default  
Ring on Transfer {#119}—By default, the caller hears ringing when the call is transferred.  
Write “NA” if Music on Hold or silence is desired  
Toll Call Prefix {#402}—By default, 0 or 1 must be dialed before the area code for a  
.
SMDR Output Format {#610}—By default, up to 15 digits are printed for dialed  
numbers in the Number field of the call report. Write “24” if a maximum of 24 digits is  
.
desired  
.
PARTNER Contact Closure Adjunct. If checked, write in the number (1-4) below to specify  
Operation Type for each Contact Closure as appropriate:  
.
long distance call. Write “No” if 0 or 1 is not required  
.
OperationType  
{#613}  
Contact  
Closure 1  
Contact  
Closure 1  
System Password {#403}—By default, no password is programmed to override  
dialing restrictions and to turn Night Service on and off. Write 4 digits if password is  
1 = 1 second on  
2 = 3 seconds on ( )  
3 = 5 seconds on  
4 = Toggle  
desired  
.
Star Code Dial Delay {#410}—By default, the system inserts a 0 second delay after a valid  
Central Office star code when it autodials. Write number (1–5) of seconds if a longer delay  
is desired or “NO” if this feature should not be active  
Music on Hold {#602}—By default, the Music on Hold jack on the processor module is  
active. Write “No” if the jack is deactivated  
.
Backup/Restore PC Card. If checked, write “Active” if Automatic System Programming  
Backup {#123} is desired  
.
.
Line Coverage.  
9.  
Notes: Write any additional information that you want to communicate to the installer.  
11.  
VMS Hunt Delay {#506}—By default, VMS answers calls after 2 rings. Write “Del” if calls  
ring 4 times before VMS answers  
.
VMS Hunt Schedule {#507}— By default, VMS is on all the time. Check if Day only or  
Night only is desired:  
Day only  
Night only  
Telephone No.  
13. Order Nos.  
Sales Support Representative’s Name  
14.  
Installation Date  
12.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
PAGE  
1 of 3  
Form B1: System Extensions  
Lucent Technologies  
Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System.  
For additional instructions, see page 5.  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Identify Telephone  
Attached to this Extension  
Identify Auxiliary Equipment  
Attached to this Extension  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Write  
Transfer  
Return  
Ext. No.  
{#306}  
Write in  
Other  
Equipment  
Ext.  
Jack  
No.  
Write Name/Description  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
24  
25  
26  
27  
IMPORTANT: A system display phone is required for programming at extension 10 or 11. Extension 10 typically is the receptionist's extension.  
Extension 11 is recommended as a second programming extension (typically the System Manager's extension).  
6.  
Group Assignments, VMS Only.  
If there is a mix of PARTNER-model and MLS-model phones, write “P” for PARTNER and “M” for MLS.  
Write “T” for touch-tone or “R” for rotary. If Call Waiting is desired, check next column.  
Must be standard phone. If immediate dialing is required, use a dedicated line. Do not assign restrictions that  
Hotline {#311}.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
8.  
Check corresponding alert extensions in next column. To prevent outside calls, remove all outside lines—see  
9. Also write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} on this form.  
Write “1,” “2,” or “B” (for Both) to identify which Contact Closure the extension can activate.  
10.  
Standard phone is recommended. Write extension number of corresponding alert extension or “70” for loud-  
5.  
speaker paging system in next column.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
PAGE  
2 of 3  
Form B1: System Extensions  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System.  
For additional instructions, see page 5.  
ldentify Telephone  
Attached to this Extension  
Identify Auxiliary Equipment  
Attached to this Extension  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Write  
Transfer  
Return  
Ext. No.  
{#306}  
Ext.  
Jack  
No.  
Write in  
Other  
Equipment  
Write Name/Description  
28  
29  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
2. If there is a mix of PARTNER-model and MLS-model phones, write “P” for PARTNER and “M” for MLS.  
Group Assignments, VMS OnIy.  
6.  
3.  
4.  
Write “T” for touch-tone or “R” for rotary. If Call Waiting is desired, check next column.  
Must be standard phone. If immediate dialing is required, use a dedicated line. Do not assign restrictions that  
Hotline {#311}.  
8.  
Check corresponding alert extensions in next column. To prevent outside calls, remove all outside lines—see  
Also write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} on this form.  
9.  
Standard phone is recommended. Write extension number of corresponding alert extension or “70” for loud-  
10.  
5.  
Write “1,” “2,” or “B” (for Both) to identify which Contact Closure the extension can activate.  
speaker paging system in next column.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PAGE  
3 of 3  
Form B1: System Extensions  
May be used if Ext. Name Display is checked on Form B1,  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Character Codes  
Letters:  
Ext.  
Jack  
No.  
= 62  
N
O
= 21  
= 22  
= 23  
= 31  
= 32  
= 33  
= 41  
= 42  
= 43  
= 51  
= 52  
= 53  
= 61  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Write 2-Digit Code for Each Character To Be Displayed — See Table at Right  
= 63  
= 71  
= 72  
= 73  
= 74  
= 81  
= 82  
= 83  
= 91  
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
X = 92  
= 93  
Z = 94  
Y
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
Numbers:  
= 11  
blank  
= 50  
= 60  
= 70  
5
6
7
= 00  
0
1
2
3
4
= 10  
= 20  
= 30  
= 40  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
8 = 80  
= 90  
9
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
Note: Only 12 characters display on MLS-model phones.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PAGE  
1 of 2  
Form B2: Customized Extension Settings  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Required if you want to change extension settings from defaults.  
For additional instructions, see pages 6 and 7.  
Identify  
Group Assignments  
Identify Extension Settings  
if Different than Default  
Identify Restrictions/Permissions  
If Different than Defaults  
Identify Line Ringing {CTP} Option  
If Different than Default  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Write line numbers for Line Access Restriction  
{#302}  
Write line numbers in each column to show desired  
Line Ringing options  
No Restriction  
Lines2  
Incoming  
only  
1 – 4  
1 – 8 1 – 8  
1 – 6  
NA  
7
1 – 4  
Outgoing  
only  
NA  
NR  
No Ring  
No Access  
Immediate  
Delayed  
Not Assigned  
NA  
NA  
NA  
NA  
A
A
NA  
NA  
E
l
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
l
l
l
l
l
l
24  
25  
26  
27  
Write group number (1–4).  
6.  
7.  
1. Write S for Spanish or F for French.  
2. Use Line Assignment {#301} to remove lines from or assign lines to  
extensions.  
Assignments  
Write group number (1–4). If a loudspeaker is connected and Simultaneous Paging is desired,  
Write group number (1–6).  
=
=
=
=
=
A
E
NA  
NR  
{CTP}  
Default  
Assigned or Active  
English  
Not Assigned or Not Active  
No Restriction  
8.  
9.  
Write IN for inside Only or LOC for Local Only to indicate restrictions for all  
3.  
outgoing calls on all lines.  
{#404}.  
4.  
Centralized Telephone Programming  
=
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
PAGE  
2 of 2  
Form B2: Customized Extension Settings  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Required if you want to change extension settings from defaults.  
For additional instructions, see pages 6 and 7.  
Identify  
Group Assignments  
Identify Restrictions/Permissions  
If Different than Defaults  
Identify Line Ringing {CTP} Option  
If Different than Default  
Identify Extension Settings  
If Different than Default  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Write line numbers for Line Access Restriction  
{#302}  
Write line numbers in each column to show desired  
Line Ringing options  
No Restriction  
7
1 – 6  
NA  
1 – 4  
1 – 8  
1 – 4  
1 – 8  
2
Incoming  
only  
NA  
Lines  
Outgoing  
only  
NR  
No Access  
NA  
NA  
No Ring  
Delayed  
Immediate  
Not Assigned  
NA  
NA  
A
A
NA  
E
NA  
l
l
l
28  
29  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
Assignments  
6.  
7.  
Write group number (1–4).  
Write S for Spanish or F for French.  
2. Use Line Assignment {#301} to remove lines from or assign lines to  
extensions.  
1.  
Default  
Assigned or Active  
English  
Not Assigned or Not Active  
No Restriction  
A
E
NA  
NR  
=
=
=
=
=
Write group number (1–4). If a loudspeaker is connected and Simultaneous Paging is desired,  
Write group number (1–6).  
8.  
9.  
3.  
Write IN for Inside Only or LOC for Local Only to indicate restrictions for all  
outgoing calls on all lines.  
{#404}.  
4.  
Centralized Telephone Programming  
{CTP} =  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PAGE  
1 of 8  
Form C1: PARTNER-34D Phone  
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.  
For additional instructions, see pages 8 through 13.  
Check Desired Features  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Also write in extension or group number  
NightSvc  
SAMPLE  
Night Service Button {#503}  
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114}1  
Wake Up Service Button {#115}  
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)  
Template Instructions  
OCR  
Wake  
If desired, write in line number, dial code feature, or auto dial number  
ID-Inspect  
ID-Name  
DND  
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction  
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)  
Do Not Disturb (F 01)  
Priv  
Privacy (F 07)  
VMSCover  
VIOB  
VMS Cover (F 15)  
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)  
2
ACE  
Music  
Account Code Entry (F 12)  
Background Music (F 19)2  
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 2,4  
CF-XX XX  
3
Park  
1.  
Call Park (I XX)  
Requires  
Auto Dial  
button for  
each  
Pickup-XX  
Call Pickup (I 6 XX)  
Drop  
CC1  
Conference Drop (F 06)  
extension.  
Contact Closure 1 (F 41) 2  
Contact Closure 2 (F 42) 2  
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)  
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)  
Exclusive Hold (F 02)  
2. Button with  
lights is  
CC2  
recom-  
DLPA  
DLPI  
ExHold  
mended, but  
not required.  
3. Extension  
number can  
be pro-  
2
FAX-XX  
GCall-g  
Hunt-g  
Fax Management (I XX)  
grammed  
as Auto Dial  
button.  
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or  
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or  
Group Pickup(I 66 G)  
I
*7 G)  
I
*77 G)  
P/U Grp-g  
Ext-XX  
LNR  
4. You can  
program the  
origination  
extension  
2
Intercom Autodial (I XX or  
Last Number Redial (F 05)  
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)  
I
*XX)  
only or both  
Loudspk  
MS-XX  
the  
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 2  
origination  
5
and  
MsgOff-XX  
MsgOn-XX  
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)  
destination  
extension.  
5
Message Light On (F 09 XX)  
Recall 5. You can  
Recall (F 03)  
program the  
SNR  
SPage  
Save Number Redial (F 04)  
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)  
Station Lock (F 21)2  
Intercom  
Intercom  
extension  
number.  
Ext.  
Lock  
TT-EN  
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)  
Voice Mail Messages Button (I 777)  
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)  
VMMsgs-777  
VMBox  
Specify Automatic Line Selection:  
F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension  
Identify extensions programmed as shown:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
PAGE  
2 of 8  
Form C2: Intercom Autodialer  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Make as many copies as you need. Extension 10, Extension 11, or both can  
have an Intercom Autodialer. For additional instructions, see page 9.  
Template Instructions  
The numbers in the lower right corner for each button represent  
the default extension assignments. If you change them, write in the  
new assignments.  
SAMPLE  
If desired, write in Intercom Ring (Ext-XX) or Voice Signal (ExtVS-XX), or  
Manual Signal Ring (MS-XX) or Voice Signal (MSVS-XX)  
If desired, write in user name for this extension  
Extensions programmed as shown (circle choices): 10 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAGE  
3 of 8  
Form C3: PARTNER-18/18D Phone  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.  
For additional instructions, see pages 8 through 13.  
Check Desired Features  
Also write in extension or group number  
Night Service Button {#503}  
NightSvc  
OCR  
SAMPLE  
Template Instructions  
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114}1  
If desired, write in line number, dial code feature, or auto dial number  
Wake Up Service Button {#115}  
Wake  
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)  
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)  
Do Not Disturb (F 01)  
ID-Inspect  
ID-Name  
DND  
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction  
Priv  
Privacy (F 07)  
VMS Cover (F 15)  
VMSCover  
VIOB  
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)  
PARTNER-18D only  
2
Account Code Entry (F 12)  
ACE  
Music  
2
Background Music (F 19)  
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)2,4  
CF-XX XX  
Park  
3
Call Park (I XX)  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Requires  
Auto Dial  
button for  
each  
Pickup-XX  
Drop  
Call Pickup(I 6 XX)  
Conference Drop (F 06)  
Contact Closure 1 (F 41)2  
Contact Closure 2 (F 42)2  
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)  
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)  
Exclusive Hold (F 02)  
CC1  
extension.  
Button with  
lights is  
recom-  
mended, but  
not required.  
Extension  
number can  
be pro-  
grammed  
as Auto Dial  
button.  
CC2  
DLPA  
DLPI  
ExHold  
Fax Management(I XX) 2  
FAX-XX  
GCall-g  
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or  
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal (I 77 G or  
Group Pickup(I 66 G)  
I
*7 G)  
Hunt-g  
P/U Grp-g  
Ext-XX  
I
*77 G)  
4.  
You can  
program the  
origination  
extension  
only or both  
the  
2
Intercom Autodial (I XX or *XX)  
I
LNR  
Last Number Redial (F 05)  
Loudspk  
MS-XX  
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)  
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)2  
Message Light Off (F 10 XX) 5  
origination  
and  
Intercom  
Intercom  
MsgOff-XX  
destination  
extension.  
You can  
Message Light On (F 09 XX)5  
MsgOn-XX  
Recall  
Ext.  
Recall (F 03)  
5.  
program the  
extension  
number.  
SNR  
Save Number Redial (F 04)  
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)  
Station Lock (F 21) 2  
SPage  
Lock  
Specify Automatic Line Selection:  
TT-EN  
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)  
Voice Mail Messages Button(I 777)  
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)  
Identify extensions programmed as shown:  
VMMsgs-777  
VMBox  
Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension  
F =  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAGE  
4 of 8  
Form C4: PARTNER-6 Phone  
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.  
For additional instructions, see pages 8 through 13.  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Check Desired Features  
Also write in extension or group number  
SAMPLE  
Template Instructions  
DND  
Priv  
Do Not Disturb (F 01)  
lf desired, write in line number, dial code feature, or auto dial number  
Privacy (F 07)  
VMS Cover (F 15)  
VMSCover  
VIOB  
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)  
1
Account Code Entry (F 12)  
Background Music (F 19)1  
ACE  
Music  
1,2  
CF-XX XX  
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)  
Call Park(I XX)3  
Park  
Pickup-XX  
Drop  
Call Pickup (I 6 XX)  
Conference Drop (F 06)  
1
CC1  
Contact Closure 1 (F 41)  
Contact Closure 2 (F 42)1  
CC2  
DLPA  
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)  
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)  
DLPI  
ExHold  
Exclusive Hold (F 02)  
Fax Management (I XX) 1  
FAX-XX  
GCall-g  
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or *7 G)  
I
Intercom  
Intercom  
Hunt-g  
P/U Grp-g  
Ext-XX  
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal (I 77 G or  
I
*77 G)  
Ext.  
Group Pickup(I 66 G)  
Intercom Autodial(I XX or  
*XX) 1  
I
LNR  
Last Number Redial (F 05)  
Loudspk  
MS-XX  
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)  
1
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)  
4
MsgOff-XX  
MsgOn-XX  
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)  
Message Light On (F 09 XX) 4  
Recall  
SNR  
Recall (F 03)  
Save Number Redial (F 04)  
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)  
SPage  
Station Lock (F 21) 1  
Lock  
TT-EN  
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)  
Voice Mail Messages(I 777)  
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)  
VMMsgs-777  
VMBox  
F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button L = Line XX = Extension  
1.  
2.  
Button with lights is recommended, but not required.  
You can program the origination extension only or both the origination  
and destination extension.  
Specify Automatic Line Selection:  
3.  
4.  
Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dial button.  
You can program the extension number.  
Identify extensions programmed as shown:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAGE  
5 of 8  
Form C5: MLS-34D Phone  
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.  
For additional instructions, see pages 8 through 13.  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Check Desired Features  
Also write in extension or group number  
SAMPLE  
NightSvc  
OCR  
Night Service Button {#503}  
Template Instructions  
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114} 1  
If desired, write in line number, dial code feature, or auto dial number  
Wake Up Service Button {#115}  
Wake  
ID-Inspect  
ID-Name  
DND  
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)  
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)  
Do Not Disturb (F 01)  
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction  
Priv  
Privacy (F 07)  
VMSCover  
VIOB  
VMS Cover (F 15)  
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)  
Account Code Entry (F 12) 2  
Background Music (F 19)2  
ACE  
Music  
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 2,4  
Call Park (I XX) 3  
CF-XX XX  
Park  
Pickup-XX  
Drop  
1.  
2.  
Requires  
Auto Dial  
button for  
each  
Call Pickup (I 6 XX)  
Conference Drop (F 06)  
2
extension.  
CC1  
Contact Closure 1 (F 41)  
Button with  
lights is  
recom-  
mended, but  
not required.  
2
CC2  
DLPA  
DLPI  
Contact Closure 2 (F 42)  
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)  
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)  
Exclusive Hold (F 02)  
ExHold  
FAX-XX  
GCall-g  
3. Extension  
number can  
be pro-  
2
Fax Management (I XX)  
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or  
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or  
Group Pickup (I 66 G)  
I
*7 G)  
grammed  
as Auto Dial  
button.  
You can  
program the  
origination  
extension  
only or both  
the  
origination  
and  
Hunt-g  
P/U Grp-g  
Ext-XX  
I
*77 G)  
4.  
2
Intercom Autodial (I XX or  
Last Number Redial (F 05)  
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)  
I
*XX)  
Ext.  
LNR  
Loudspk  
MS-XX  
Intercom  
Intercom  
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)2  
5
MsgOff-XX  
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)  
destination  
extension.  
5
MsgOn-XX  
Message Light On (F 09 XX)  
Recall  
SNR  
Recall (F 03)  
5. You can  
program the  
Save Number Redial (F 04)  
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)  
extension  
number.  
SPage  
Specify Automatic Line Selection:  
2
Lock  
TT-EN  
Identify extensions programmed as shown:  
Station Lock (F 21)  
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)  
VMMsgs-777  
VMBox  
Voice Mail Message Button (I 777)  
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)  
F =  
Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAGE  
6 of 8  
Form C6: MLS-18D Phone  
Lucent Technologies  
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.  
For additional instructions, see pages 8 through 13.  
Check Desired Features  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Also write in extension or group number  
NightSvc  
Night Service Button {#503}  
SAMPLE  
OCR  
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114} 1  
Wake Up Service Button {#115}  
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)  
Template Instructions  
Wake  
ID-Inspect  
ID-Name  
DND  
If desired, write in line number, dial code feature, or auto dial number  
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)  
Do Not Disturb (F 01)  
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction  
Priv  
Privacy (F 07)  
VMSCover  
VIOB  
VMS Cover (F 15)  
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)  
ACE  
Account Code Entry (F 12) 2  
Background Music (F 19) 2  
Music  
1.  
Requires  
Auto Dial  
button for  
each  
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 2,4  
CF-XX XX  
Park  
3
Call Park (I XX)  
extension.  
Pickup-XX  
Call Pickup(I 6 XX)  
2. Button with  
Drop  
CC1  
lights is  
Conference Drop (F 06)  
Contact Closure 1 (F 41)2  
recom-  
mended, but  
not required.  
CC2  
2
Contact Closure 2 (F 42)  
DLPA  
DLPI  
3. Extension  
number can  
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line (I 68)  
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)  
Exclusive Hold (F 02)  
be pro-  
ExHold  
FAX-XX  
GCall-g  
Hunt-g  
grammed as  
Auto Dial  
button.  
2
Fax Management (I XX)  
You can  
4.  
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or  
I
*7 G)  
program the  
origination  
extension  
only or both  
the origina-  
tion and  
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or  
I
*77 G)  
P/U Grp-g  
Ext-XX  
LNR  
Group Pickup (I 66 G)  
2
Intercom Autodial (I XX or *XX)  
I
Last Number Redial (F 05)  
Intercom  
Intercom  
Loudspk  
MS-XX  
destination  
extension.  
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)  
Ext.  
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)2  
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)5  
You can  
5.  
MsgOff-XX  
program the  
extension  
number.  
5
MsgOn-XX  
Recall  
Message Light On (F 09 XX)  
Recall (F 03)  
SNR  
Save Number Redial (F 04)  
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)  
Station Lock (F 21)2  
Specify Automatic Line Selection:  
SPage  
Identify extensions programmed as shown:  
Lock  
TT-EN  
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)  
Voice Mail Messages Button(I 777)  
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)  
VMMsgs-777  
VMBox  
Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension  
F =  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAGE  
7 of 8  
Form C7: MLS-12/12D Phone  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.  
For additional instructions, see pages 8 through 13.  
Check Desired Features  
Also write in extension or group number  
Night Service Button {#503}  
NightSvc  
OCR  
SAMPLE  
Template Instructions  
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114} 1  
If desired, write in line number, dial code feature, or auto dial number  
Wake Up Service Button {#115}  
Wake  
ID-Inspect  
ID-Name  
DND  
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)  
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)  
Do Not Disturb (F 01)  
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction  
Priv  
Privacy (F 07)  
VMSCover  
VIOB  
VMS Cover (F 15)  
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)  
Account Code Entry (F 12)2  
ACE  
Music  
Background Music (F 19)2  
Requires  
Auto Dial  
button for  
each  
1.  
2.  
2,4  
CF-XX XX  
Park  
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)  
3
Call Park (I XX)  
extension.  
Pickup-XX  
Drop  
Call Pickup(I 6 XX)  
Button with  
lights is  
recom-  
mended, but  
not required.  
Conference Drop (F 06)  
Contact Closure 1 (F 41)2  
Contact Closure 2 (F 42)2  
CC1  
CC2  
DLPA  
DLPl  
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)  
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)  
3. Extension  
number can  
be pro-  
ExHold  
FAX-XX  
GCall-g  
Exclusive Hold (F 02)  
Fax Management(I XX) 2  
grammed as  
Auto Dial  
button.  
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or *7 G)  
I
4. You can  
program the  
origination  
extension  
Hunt-g  
P/U Grp-g  
Ext-XX  
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal (I 77 G or  
I
*77 G)  
Group Pickup(I 66 G)  
2
Intercom Autodial (I XX or *XX)  
I
only or both  
the origina-  
tion and  
destination  
extension.  
Intercom  
Intercom  
LNR  
Last Number Redial (F 05)  
Loudspk  
MS-XX  
Ext.  
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)  
2
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)  
Message Light Off (F 10 XX) 5  
Message Light On (F 09 XX)5  
You can  
5.  
MsgOff-XX  
program the  
extension  
number.  
MsgOn-XX  
Recall  
Recall (F 03)  
Specify Automatic Line Selection:  
SNR  
Save Number Redial (F 04)  
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)  
Identify extensions programmed as shown:  
SPage  
2
Lock  
Station Lock (F 21)  
TT-EN  
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)  
VMMsgs-777  
VMBox  
Voice Mail Messages Button(I 777)  
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)  
F =  
Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAGE  
8 of 8  
Form C8: MLS-6 Phone  
Lucent Technologies  
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.  
For additional instructions, see pages 8 through 13.  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Check Desired Features  
Also write in extension or group number  
SAMPLE  
DND  
Priv  
Do Not Disturb (F 01)  
Template Instructions  
Privacy (F 07)  
If desired, write in line number, dial code feature, or auto dial number  
VMSCover  
VIOB  
VMS Cover (F 15)  
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)  
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction  
1
ACE  
Account Code Entry (F 12)  
Background Music (F 19)1  
Music  
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)1,2  
Call Park (I XX )3  
CF-XX XX  
Park  
Pickup-XX  
Drop  
Call Pickup (I 6 XX)  
Conference Drop (F 06)  
Contact Closure 1 (F 41)1  
Contact Closure 2 (F 42)1  
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)  
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line (I 8)  
Exclusive Hold (F 02)  
CC1  
CC2  
DLPA  
DLPI  
Intercom  
Intercom  
ExHold  
Ext.  
1
FAX-XX  
GCall-g  
Hunt-g  
Fax Management (I XX)  
Group Calling-Ring/Page (I 7 G or *7 G)  
I
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or  
I
*77 G)  
P/U Grp-g  
Ext-XX  
LNR  
Group Pickup (I 66 G)  
Specify Automatic Line Selection:  
1
Intercom Autodial (I XX or  
Last Number Redial (F 05)  
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)  
I
*XX)  
Identify extensions programmed as shown:  
Loudspk  
MS-XX  
1
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)  
4
MsgOff-XX  
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)  
4
MsgOn-XX  
Recall  
Message Light On (F 09 XX)  
Recall (F 03)  
SNR  
Save Number Redial (F 04)  
SPage  
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)  
Station Lock (F 21)1  
Lock  
TT-EN  
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)  
Voice Mail Messages(I 777)  
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)  
VMMsgs-777  
VMBox  
F =  
Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button L = Line XX = Extension  
Button with lights is recommended, but not required.  
You can program the origination extension only or both the origination  
and destination extension.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dial button.  
You can program the extension number.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAGE  
1 of 3  
Form D: Number Lists  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
For additional instructions, see page 14.  
Disallowed Phone Number Lists {#404}  
Write the telephone numbers that users are prevented from dialing.  
List 4  
List 8  
List 1  
List 5  
List 6  
List 7  
List 3  
List 2  
1
1
1
1
1
1
Telephone Numbe1r Entry  
1
Telephone Number  
Telephone Number  
Entry Telephone Number Entry  
Telephone Number Entry Telephone Number  
Entry  
Telephone Number  
Entry  
Entry  
Telephone Number  
Entry  
01  
02  
01  
01  
02  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
08  
09  
10  
Allowed Phone Number Lists {#407}  
Write the telephone numbers that users can dial regardless of assigned restrictions.  
List 4  
List 5  
List 6  
List 7  
List 8  
List 1  
List 3  
List 2  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Telephone Number  
Entry  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
Entry  
Telepnone Number  
Telephone Number  
Telephone Number  
Entry  
Entry  
Entry  
Entry  
Telephone Number  
Telephone Number  
Telephone Number  
Entry  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
Telephone Number  
Entry  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
Telephone Number can be up to 12 characters, including 0-9, *, and #. Write ! for wildcard (press Hold to program).  
1.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PAGE  
2 of 3  
Form D: Number Lists  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell labs Innovations  
instructions, see page 15.  
External Hotline {#311}  
Required if External Hotline {#311}  
Emergency Phone Number List {#406}  
Write Emergency Phone Numbers that can be  
dialed from any phone that has access to an  
outside line regardless of assigned restrictions.  
Person/Place  
Write Extension Jack number specified on  
Telephone Number1  
Entry  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
number to be assigned to Personal Speed Dial  
Code 80 for that extension.  
Telephone Number2  
Ext.Jack  
Telephone Number can be up to 12 digits (0-9).  
1.  
2. Telephone Number can be up to 28 characters, including 0-9, *, #, and special dialing functions.  
You can have more than 10 External Hotlines.  
NOTE:  
An External Hotline phone is a standard phone that dials the  
specified telephone number when the handset is lifted.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAGE  
3 of 3  
Form D: Number Lists  
Required only if Forced Account Code Verification is desired.  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
For additional instructions, see page 15.  
Forced Account Code List {#409}  
Account Code (up to 6 digits)1  
Write Description  
Entry  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
1
1
Write Description  
Account Code (up to 6 digits)  
Entry  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
Account Code (up to 6 digits)  
Entry  
Write Description  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
1. Valid entries are 0-9; write ! for wildcard (press Hold to program).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAGE  
1 of 1  
Form E: System Speed Dial Numbers  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Optional for PARTNER Advanced Communications System.  
For additional instructions, see page 16.  
To Dial: On system phones, press [ Feature ] + 3-digit code. On standard phones, press [  
#
] + 3-digit code while receiving intercom dial tone.  
1
Code  
634  
635  
636  
637  
638  
639  
640  
641  
642  
643  
644  
645  
646  
647  
648  
649  
650  
651  
652  
653  
654  
655  
656  
657  
658  
659  
660  
661  
662  
663  
664  
665  
666  
Name/Company  
Telephone Number2  
Name/Company  
Telephone Number2  
Code  
667  
668  
669  
670  
671  
672  
673  
674  
675  
676  
677  
678  
679  
680  
681  
682  
683  
684  
685  
686  
687  
688  
689  
690  
691  
692  
693  
694  
695  
696  
697  
698  
699  
Telephone Number2  
1
1
Name/Company  
Code  
600  
601  
602  
603  
604  
605  
606  
607  
608  
609  
610  
611  
612  
613  
614  
615  
616  
617  
618  
619  
620  
621  
622  
623  
624  
625  
626  
627  
628  
629  
630  
631  
632  
633  
2 Telephone number can be up to 28 digits, including 0-9, ,  
(see page 16 of instructions for detailed information).  
#
and special dialing functions  
1 You can dial System Speed Dial numbers that are marked with at any time, regardless of  
dialing restrictions placed on your extension. System Speed Dial numbers are programmed by the  
System Manager (report problems and suggested revisions to your System Manager).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAGE  
1 of 3  
Form A: System Configuration  
Lucent Technologies  
Required for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Plus System.  
For additional instructions, see page 2.  
Bell Labs Innovations  
6.  
Configure Hardware for Hybrid Mode (PARTNER II system only):  
Customer Billing Name  
1.  
No ❑  
Yes If yes, call local telephone company—  
MF Mode and FCC # AS5 USA-21312-MF-E  
2. Installation Address  
3. Contact Name  
Features Customer is most interested in (most important first):  
7.  
Phone  
(
)
Phone  
Alternate Trainee’s Name  
Phone  
Person to be Trained  
4.  
5.  
(
)
(
)
Phone  
Salesperson’s Name  
Lucent Technologies Sales Force  
Sold by  
[ ]  
[ ]  
(
)
Dealer:  
8.  
System Lines  
Line Coverage—You can select one per line  
Hybrid Mode  
Only:  
Write  
R if  
Rotary  
(Dial  
l
l
l
l
l
1
Write7  
Ext. No  
for Call  
Cover  
3
VMS-  
AA  
VMS-6  
Mail  
{#206}  
or  
4
5
2
l
l
l
ASA  
Identify other Local  
Telephone Company  
Subscription Services  
(e.g., Repeat Call)  
Hunt  
Group  
Write User’s Name for  
Check  
AA  
DXD  
Line Write the Telephone  
Personal or Owned Line if  
Numbers in order  
Jack  
No.  
Write auxiliary  
{#607} ll {#205} l  
{#204}  
Caller  
{#206}  
or Identify Equipment for  
Dedicated Line  
customer desires  
(list personal and  
dedicated lines last)  
(Write no.)  
l
Pulse) pool 881, 882,  
ID  
{#206}  
883 or No Pool  
{#207}  
Line  
{#201}  
Only one of these  
Service  
{#208}  
types per system  
{#208}  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
l
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
column.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
6.  
MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS column.  
Write extension number of line owner eligible for Call Coverage. Also write line owner’s name in next  
7.  
column.  
4.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PAGE  
2 of 3  
Form A: System Configuration  
Required for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Plus System.  
For additional instructions, see page 3.  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
If VMS-AA is checked, specify the following:  
VMS-AA:  
System Settings. Write response on line for each item.  
9.  
VMS Hunt Delay {#506}—By default, VMS answers calls after 2 rings. Write “Del” if  
.
Receptionist answers calls during business hours? Write “Yes” or “No”  
.
calls ring 4 times before VMS answers  
Number of Lines {#104}—By default, 2 lines per 206 module and 4 lines per 400 module  
are assigned to each extension (or to pool 880 in PARTNER II Hybrid Mode). Write  
VMS Hunt Schedule {#507}—By default, VMS is on all the time. Check if Day only or  
Night only is desired:  
.
number if different from default  
Day only  
Night only  
Transfer Return Rings {#105}—By default, a transferred call rings 4 times before going to  
the transfer return extension. Write number (0-9, 0 = no return) if different from  
ASA: (PARTNER II system only) If ASA is checked, specify the following:  
default  
.
Automatic System Answer Delay {#110}—By default, a call rings 2 times before it is  
Outside Conference Denial {#109}—By default, a conference call can include 2 outside  
parties. Write “No” if 2 outside parties are not allowed  
.
answered by the system. Write number (0-9) if different from default  
.
Automatic System Answer Mode {#121}—By default, ASA calls are put on hold after the  
greeting plays. Check if calls should continue to ring or be disconnected:  
Call Coverage Rings {#116} (PARTNER II only)—By default, a covered call rings 2 times  
before going to the covering extention. Write number (1-9) if different from default  
.
Ring  
Disconnect  
VMS Cover Rings {#117}—By default, a call rings 3 times before going to the user’s  
.
mailbox. Write number (1-9) if different from default  
ASA Record/Playback (I 891)—message of up to 10 seconds that caller hears  
when the call is answered by the Automatic System Answer feature. Write  
message below and record from extension 10 or 11:  
Ring on Transfer {#119}—By default, the caller hears ringing when the call is transferred.  
.
Write “NA” if music on hold or silence is desired  
Toll Call Prefix {#402}—By default, 0 or 1 must be dialed before the area code for a  
.
long distance call. Write “No” if 0 or 1 is not required  
System Password {#403}—By default, no password is programmed to override dialing  
restrictions and to turn Night Service on and off. Write 4 digits if password is  
desired  
.
Music on Hold {#602}—By default, the Music on Hold jack on the processor module is  
active. Write “No” if the jack is deactivated  
.
10.  
DXD: (PARTNER II system only) If DXD is checked, specify the following:  
Direct Extension Dial Delay {#112}—By default, a call rings 2 times before it is  
.
answered by the system. Write number (0-9) if different from default  
Direct Extension Dial Record/Playback (I 892)—message of up to 20 seconds that  
caller hears when call is answered with the Direct Extension Dial feature. Write  
message below and record from extension 10 or 11:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PAGE  
3 of 3  
Form A: System Configuration  
Required for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Plus System.  
For additional instructions, see page 4.  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Auxiliary Equipment (System). Check if applicable:  
11.  
[ ]  
[ ]  
[ ]  
[ ]  
[ ]  
[ ]  
Battery Backup  
Caller ID Devices  
Loudspeaker Paging: Number of zones  
Magic on Hold (Music on Hold {#602} must be active.)  
Uninterruptible Power Supply  
SMDR If checked, specify the following if appropriate:  
SMDR Record Type (#608)—By default, all calls are included on call reports. Write  
.
“Out” if only outgoing calls are reported  
SMDR Output Format (#610)—By default, up to 15 digits are printed for dialed  
numbers in the Number field of the call report. Write “24” if a maximum of 24 digits  
.
is desired  
SMDR Talk Time (#611) (PARTNER II only)—By default, a Talk field is not included  
.
on the call report. Write “Active” if the Talk field is desired  
Write any additional information that you want to communicate to the installer.  
12. Notes:  
Telephone No.  
Order Nos.  
14.  
15. Sales Support Representative’s Name  
13.  
Installation Date  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAGE  
1 of 4  
Form B1: System Extensions  
Required for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Plus System.  
For-additional instructions, see page 5.  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Identify Auxiliary Equipment  
Attached to this Extension  
Identify Telephone  
Attached to this Extension  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Write  
Transfer  
Return  
Ext. No.  
{#306}  
Write in  
Other  
Equipment  
Ext.  
Jack  
No.  
Write Name/Description  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
IMPORTANT:  
A system display phone is required for programming at extension 10 or 11. Extension 10 typically is the receptionist's extension.  
Extension 11 is recommended as a second programming extension (typically the System Manager's extension).  
Group Assignments, VMS Only.  
6.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
If there is a mix of PARTNER-model and MLS-model phones, write “P” for PARTNER and “M” for MLS.  
Write “T” for touch-tone or “R” for rotary. If Call Waiting is desired, check next column.  
Must be standard phone. If immedate dialing is required, use a dedicated line. Do not assign restrictions that  
Hotline {#311}.  
Check corresponding alert extensions in next column. To prevent outside calls, remove all outside lines-see  
7.  
8.  
Also write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} on this form.  
9.  
Standard phone is recommended. Write extension number of corresponding alert extension or “70” for loud-  
5.  
speaker paging system in next column.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PAGE  
2 of 4  
Form B1: System Extensions  
Required for PARTNER II System extensions 34 through 57.  
For additional instructions, see page 5.  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Identify Auxiliary Equipment  
Attached to this Extension  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Identify Telephone  
Attached to this Extension  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Write  
Transfer  
Return  
Ext. No.  
{#306}  
Write in  
Other  
Equipment  
Ext.  
Jack  
No.  
Write Name/Description  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Group Assignments, VMS Only.  
Check corresponding alert extensions in next column. To prevent outside calls, remove all outside lines-see  
6.  
2. If there is a mix of PARTNER-model and MLS-model phones, write “P” for PARTNER and “M” for MLS.  
7.  
8.  
3. Write “T” for touch-tone or “R” for rotary. If Call Waiting is desired, check next column.  
4.  
5.  
Must be standard phone. If immediate dialing is required, use a dedicated line. Do not assign restrictions that  
Hotline {#311}.  
Standard phone is recommended. Write extension number of corresponding alert extension or “70” for loud-  
speaker paging system in next column.  
Also write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} on this form.  
9.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PAGE  
3 of 4  
Form B1: System Extensions  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Character Codes  
Letters:  
= 62  
0 = 63  
N
= 21  
B = 22  
Ext.  
Jack  
No.  
A
Write 2-Digit Code for Each Character To Be Displayed – See Table at Right  
P
Q
R
S
= 71  
= 72  
= 73  
= 74  
= 23  
= 31  
= 32  
= 33  
= 41  
= 42  
= 43  
= 51  
= 52  
= 53  
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
T = 81  
U
V
W
= 82  
= 83  
= 91  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
X = 92  
Y
Z
= 93  
= 94  
M = 61  
Numbers:  
= 11  
blank  
5
6
7
8
9
= 50  
= 60  
= 70  
= 80  
= 90  
= 00  
= 10  
= 20  
= 30  
= 40  
0
1
2
3
4
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
Note:  
Only 12 characters display on MLS-model phones.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PAGE  
4 of 4  
Form B1: System Extensions  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Character Codes  
Letters:  
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
= 62  
= 63  
= 71  
= 72  
= 73  
= 74  
= 81  
= 82  
= 83  
= 91  
Ext.  
Jack  
No.  
= 21  
= 22  
= 23  
= 31  
= 32  
= 33  
= 41  
A
B
C
D
E
F
Write 2-Digit Code for Each Character To Be Displayed — See Table at Right  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
G
H = 42  
= 43  
= 51  
= 52  
= 53  
= 61  
I
J
K
L
M
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
= 92  
= 93  
= 94  
Y
Z
Numbers:  
= 11  
blank  
= 50  
= 60  
= 70  
= 80  
= 90  
5
6
7
8
9
= 00  
= 10  
= 20  
= 30  
= 40  
0
1
2
3
4
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
Only 12 characters display on MLS-model phones.  
Note:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PAGE  
1 of 2  
Form B2: Customized Extension Settings  
Required if you want to change extension settings from defaults for PARTNER II System  
and PARTNER Plus System. For additional instructions, see pages 6 and 7.  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Identify  
Group Assignments  
Identify Restrictions/Permissions  
If Different than Defaults  
Identify Extension Settings  
if Different than Default  
Identify Line Ringing {CTP} Option  
If Different than Default  
l
l
Hybrid Mode  
Only:  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Write line numbers or pool access codes  
for Line Access Restriction {#302} or  
Pool Access Restriction {#315}  
Write line numbers or pool access codes in each  
column to show desired Line Ringing options  
No Restriction  
No Ring  
pools  
Lines/Pools3  
Not Assigned  
1 – 4 1 – 4  
1 – 4  
1 – 6  
NA  
7
1 – 4  
Incoming  
only  
Immediate  
lines  
Outgoing  
only  
NR  
No Access  
NA  
Delayed  
NA  
NA  
A
NA  
NA  
P
NA  
E
NA  
A
NA  
l
ALL  
K
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
Write group number (1–4).  
Write group number (1–4). If a loudspeaker is connected and Simultaneous Paging is desired,  
Write group number (1–6).  
5.  
6.  
7.  
Assignments  
Write S for Spanish or F for French.  
In Hybrid Mode only, write K for Key extension. Extension 10 always operates  
as a Key extension.  
In Key Mode, use Line Assignment {#301} to remove lines from or assign lines  
to extensions. In Hybrid Mode, use Pool Extension Assignment {#314} to  
remove pools from or assign pools to extensions.  
Write IN for Inside Only or LOC for Local Only to indicate restrictions for all  
outgoing calls on all lines.  
1.  
2.  
=
Default  
Assigned or Active  
A
=
E
=
=
=
=
English  
Not Assigned or Not Active  
No Restriction  
8.  
3.  
4.  
NA  
NR  
P
9.  
Pooled  
{CTP} = Centralized Telephone Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PAGE  
Form B2: Customized Extension Setting  
Required if you want to change extension settings from defaults for PARTNER II System  
extensions 34 through 57. For additional instructions, see pages 6 and 7.  
2 of 2  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Identify Line Ringing {CTP} Option  
Identify Restrictions/Permissions  
Identify Extension Settings  
if Different than Default  
Identify  
Group Assignments  
If Different than Default  
If Different than Defaults  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Hybrid Mode  
Only:  
Write line numbers or pool access codes  
for Line Access Restriction {#302} or  
Pool Access Restriction {#315}  
Write line numbers or pool access codes in each  
column to show desired Line Ringing options  
No Restriction  
Lines/Pools3  
Not Assigned  
1–4  
NA  
7
1–4  
1 – 6  
l
Incoming  
only  
1–4  
1 – 4  
Outgoing  
only  
No Ring  
pools  
NR  
No Access  
NA  
Immediate  
lines  
Delayed  
NA  
NA  
A
NA  
NA  
P
E
NA  
NA ✔  
NA ✔  
A
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
Assignments  
Write group number (1–4).  
Write group number (1–4), If a loudspeaker is connected and Simultaneous Paging is desired,  
Write group number (1–6).  
5.  
6.  
7.  
Default  
Assigned or Active  
English  
1. Write S for Spanish or F for French.  
2. In Hybrid Mode only, write K for Key extension.  
3.  
A
E
=
=
=
=
=
=
In Key Mode, use Line Assignment {#301} to remove lines from or assign lines  
to extensions. In Hybrid Mode, use Pool Extension Assignment {#314} to  
remove pools from or assign pools to extensions.  
Write IN for Inside Only or LOC for Local Only to indicate restrictions for all  
outgoing calls on all lines.  
8.  
Not Assigned or Not Active  
No Restriction  
NA  
NR  
P
9.  
10.  
Pooled  
4.  
{CTP} = Centralized Telephone Programming  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAGE  
1 of 8  
Form C1: PARTNER-34D Phone  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist. For additional  
instructions, see page 8.  
Check Desired Features  
Also write in extension or group number  
SAMPLE  
Template Instructions  
If desired, write in line number, pool access code, dial code feature, or auto dial number  
Night Service Button {#503}  
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114}1  
Wake Up Service Button {#115}  
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)  
NightSvc  
OCR  
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction  
Wake  
ID-Inspect  
ID-Name  
DND  
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)  
Do Not Disturb (F 01)  
Privacy (F 07)  
Priv  
VMS Cover (F 15)  
VMSCover  
VIOB  
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)  
2
Account Code Entry (F 12)  
Background Music (F 19)2  
ACE  
Music  
PARTNER  
II system  
only.  
1.  
Backup Failure Alarm (F 58)2  
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)2,4  
Backup  
CF-XX XX  
Park  
2. Requires  
Auto Dial  
button for  
each  
extension.  
3. Button with  
lights is  
4
Call Park (I XX)  
Call Pickup(I 6 XX)  
Pickup-XX  
Conference Drop (F 06)  
Drop  
CC1  
Contact Closure 1 (F 41) 2  
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)  
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)  
Exclusive Hold (F 02)  
DLPA  
recom-  
mended, but  
not required.  
Extension  
number can  
be pro-  
grammed  
as Auto Dial  
button.  
DLPI  
ExHold  
FAX-XX  
GCall-g  
Hunt-g  
P/U Grp-g  
Ext-XX  
LNR  
4.  
Fax Management(I XX) 2  
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or *7 G)  
I
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or  
I
*77 G)  
Group Pickup(I 66 G)  
5. You can  
program the  
2
Intercom Autodial (I XX or  
Last Number Redial (F 05)  
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)  
I
*XX)  
origination  
extension  
only or both  
the  
origination  
and  
Loudspk  
MS-XX  
2
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)  
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)5  
Message Light On (F 09 XX)5  
Recall (F 03)  
MsgOff-XX  
Intercom  
Intercom  
destination  
extension.  
MsgOn-XX  
Recall  
Ext.  
6. You can  
program the  
extension  
number.  
SNR  
Save Number Redial (F 04)  
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)  
Station Lock (F 21) 2  
SPage  
Lock  
* For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode only, if pool 880 is assigned, these two  
buttons are associated with this pool.  
TT-EN  
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)  
Voice Mail Messages Button(I 777)  
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)  
VMMsgs-777  
VMBox  
Specify Automatic Line Selection:  
F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension  
Identify extensions programmed as shown:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
PAGE  
2 of 8  
Form C2: Intercom Autodialer  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
For additional instructions,  
see page 9.  
PARTNER II only  
SAMPLE  
Template Instructions  
If desired, write in Intercom Ring (Ext-XX) or Voice Signal (ExtVS-XX),  
or Manual Signal Ring (MS-XX) or Voice Signal (MSVS-XX)  
If desired, write in user name for this extension  
Extensions programmed as shown (circle choices): 10 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAGE  
3 of 8  
Form C3: PARTNER-18 Phone  
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.  
For additional instructions, see page 8.  
Check Desired Features  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Also write in extension or group number  
SAMPLE  
Template Instructions  
NightSvc  
Night Service Button {#503}  
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114}  
Wake Up Service Button {#115}  
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)  
If desired, write in line number, pool access code, dial code feature, or auto dial number  
1
OCR  
Wake  
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction  
ID-Inspect  
ID-Name  
DND  
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)  
Do Not Disturb (F 01)  
Priv  
Privacy (F 07)  
PARTNER-18D only  
VMSCover  
VIOB  
VMS Cover (F 15)  
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)  
Account Code Entry (F 12)2  
Background Music (F 19)2  
Backup Failure Alarm (F 58) 2  
ACE  
Music  
1.  
2.  
PARTNER  
II system  
only.  
Requires  
Auto Dial  
button for  
each  
extension.  
Button with  
lights is  
recom-  
mended, but  
not required.  
Extension  
number can  
be pro-  
grammed  
as Auto Dial  
button.  
Backup  
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)2,4  
Call Park(I XX) 4  
CF-XX XX  
Park  
Pickup-XX  
Call Pickup(I 6 XX)  
Drop  
CC1  
Conference Drop (F 06)  
3.  
4.  
Contact Closure 1 (F 41 ) 2  
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)  
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)  
Exclusive Hold (F 02)  
DLPA  
DLPI  
ExHold  
FAX-XX  
GCall-g  
Hunt-g  
P/U Grp-g  
Ext-XX  
LNR  
Fax Management(I XX) 2  
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or  
I
* 7 G)  
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or  
I
*77 G)  
Group Pickup(I 66 G)  
5. You can  
program the  
2
Intercom Autodial (I XX or *XX)  
I
origination  
extension  
only or both  
the  
Last Number Redial (F 05)  
Loudspk  
MS-XX  
Intercom  
Intercom  
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)  
2
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)  
origination  
Ext.  
5
MsgOff-XX  
and  
destination  
extension.  
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)  
5
MsgOn-XX  
Recall  
Message Light On (F 09 XX)  
Recall (F 03)  
6. You can  
program the  
extension  
number.  
SNR  
Save Number Redial (F 04)  
* For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode only, if pool 880 is assigned, these two  
buttons are associated with this pool.  
SPage  
Lock  
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)  
Station Lock (F 21) 2  
TT-EN  
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)  
Voice Mail Messages Button(I 777)  
VMMsgs-777  
VMBox  
Specify Automatic Line Selection:  
Identify extensions programmed as shown:  
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)  
F =  
Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAGE  
4 of 8  
Form C4: PARTNER-6 Phone  
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.  
For additional instructions, see page 8.  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Check Desired Features  
Also write in extension or group number  
SAMPLE  
Template Instructions  
DND  
Priv  
Do Not Disturb (F 01)  
Privacy (F 07)  
If desired, write in line number, pool access code, dial code feature, or auto dial number  
VMSCover  
VIOB  
VMS Cover (F 15)  
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction  
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)  
1
ACE  
Account Code Entry (F 12)  
Background Music (F 19)1  
Music  
1,2,3  
Cover-XX XX  
Call Coverage (F 20 XX XX)  
1,3  
CF-XX XX  
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)  
Call Park (I XX )4  
Park  
Pickup-XX  
Drop  
Call Pickup (I 6 XX)  
Conference Drop (F 06)  
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)  
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)  
Exclusive Hold (F 02)  
DLPA  
DLPI  
ExHold  
FAX-XX  
GCall-g  
1
Fax Management (I XX)  
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or  
I
*7 G)  
Hunt-g  
P/U Grp-g  
Ext-XX  
Intercom  
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or  
I
*77 G)  
Intercom  
Group Pickup(I 66 G)  
Ext.  
1
Intercom Autodial (I XX or *XX)  
I
LNR  
Last Number Redial (F 05)  
Loudspk  
MS-XX  
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)  
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)1  
Message Light Off (F 10 XX) 5  
* For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode only, if pool 880 is assigned, these two  
buttons are associated with this pool.  
MsgOff-XX  
MsgOn-XX  
Recall  
5
Message Light On (F 09 XX)  
Recall (F 03)  
SNR  
Save Number Redial (F 04)  
SPage  
Lock  
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)  
Station Lock (F 21) 1  
TT-EN  
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)  
Voice Mail Messages(I 777)  
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)  
VMMsgs-777  
VMBox  
F =  
Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button L = Line XX = Extension  
1. Button with lights is recommended, but not required.  
2. PARTNER II system only.  
3. You can program the origination extension only or both the origination  
and destination extension.  
4. Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dial button.  
5. You can program the extension number.  
Specify Automatic Line Selection:  
Identify extensions programmed as shown:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAGE  
Form C5: MLS-34D Phone  
5 of 8  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist. For additional  
instructions, see page 8.  
Check Desired Features  
Also write in extension or group number  
SAMPLE  
Template Instructions  
If desired, write in line number, pool access code, dial code feature, or auto dial number  
Night Service Button {#503}  
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114}  
Wake Up Service Button {#115}  
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)  
NightSvc  
1
OCR  
Wake  
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction  
ID-Inspect  
ID-Name  
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)  
Do Not Disturb (F 01)  
DND  
Priv  
Privacy (F 07)  
VMSCover  
VIOB  
VMS Cover (F 15)  
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)  
Account Code Entry (F 12)2  
Background Music (F 19)2  
ACE  
Music  
1.  
PARTNER  
II system  
only.  
Backup Failure Alarm (F 58)2  
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)2,4  
Call Park(I XX) 4  
Backup  
CF-XX XX  
2. Requires  
Auto Dial  
button for  
each  
Park  
Pickup-XX  
Drop  
Call Pickup (I 6 XX)  
extension.  
Conference Drop (F 06)  
3. Button with  
lights is  
Contact Closure 1 (F 41 )2  
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)  
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)  
Exclusive Hold (F 02)  
CC1  
DLPA  
DLPI  
recom-  
mended, but  
not required.  
Extension  
number can  
be pro-  
grammed  
as Auto Dial  
button.  
ExHold  
FAX-XX  
GCall-g  
Hunt-g  
4.  
5.  
2
Fax Management (I XX)  
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or  
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or  
Group Pickup (I 66 G)  
I
*7 G)  
Ext.  
I
*77 G)  
P/U Grp-g  
Ext-XX  
You can  
2
Intercom Autodial (I XX or  
Last Number Redial (F 05)  
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)  
I
*XX)  
program the  
origination  
extension  
only or both  
the  
Intercom  
Intercom  
LNR  
Loudspk  
MS-XX  
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 2  
origination  
and  
destination  
extension.  
5
MsgOff-XX  
MsgOn-XX  
Recall  
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)  
Message Light On (F 09 XX) 5  
* For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode only, if pool 880 is assigned, these two  
buttons are associated with this pool.  
Recall (F 03)  
6. You can  
SNR  
program the  
extension  
number.  
Save Number Redial (F 04)  
SPage  
SimultaneousPaging(I * 70)  
2
Lock  
TT-EN  
Station Lock (F 21)  
Specify Automatic Line Selection:  
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)  
Identify extensions programmed as shown:  
VMMsgs-777  
Voice Mail Messages Button(I 777)  
VMBox  
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)  
F =  
Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAGE  
6 of 8  
Form C6: MLS-18 Phone  
Lucent Technologies  
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.  
For additional instructions, see page 8.  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Check Desired Features  
Also write in extension or group number  
SAMPLE  
Template Instructions  
NightSvc  
OCR  
Night Service Button {#503}  
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114}  
Wake Up Service Button {#115}  
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)  
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)  
Do Not Disturb (F 01)  
If desired, write in line number, pool access code, dial code feature, or auto dial number  
1
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction  
Wake  
ID-Inspect  
ID-Name  
DND  
Priv  
Privacy (F 07)  
VMSCover  
VIOB  
VMS Cover (F 15)  
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)  
2
ACE  
Account Code Entry (F 12)  
Background Music (F 19) 2  
Music  
1.  
2.  
PARTNER  
II system  
only.  
Backup Failure Alarm (F 58)2  
Backup  
2,4  
CF-XX XX  
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)  
Requires  
Auto Dial  
button for  
each  
4
Park  
Pickup-XX  
Drop  
Call Park (I XX)  
Call Pickup(I 6 XX)  
extension.  
Conference Drop (F 06)  
Contact Closure 1 (F 41) 2  
Button with  
lights is  
recom-  
mended, but  
not required.  
3.  
CC1  
DLPA  
DLPI  
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)  
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)  
ExHold  
4. Extension  
number can  
be pro-  
Exclusive Hold (F 02)  
2
FAX-XX  
GCall-g  
Fax Management (I XX)  
grammed  
as Auto Dial  
button.  
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or  
I
*7 G)  
Hunt-g  
P/U Grp-g  
Ext-XX  
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or  
I
*77 G)  
Intercom  
Intercom  
Group Pickup(I 66 G)  
5. You can  
program the  
origination  
extension  
only or both  
the  
2
Ext.  
Intercom Autodial (I XX or *XX)  
I
LNR  
Last Number Redial (F 05)  
Loudspk  
MS-XX  
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)  
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)2  
Message Light Off (F 10 XX) 5  
Message Light On (F 09 XX) 5  
Recall (F 03)  
origination  
and  
destination  
extension.  
MsgOff-XX  
MsgOn-XX  
Recall  
* For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode only, it pool 880 is assigned, these two  
buttons are associated with this pool.  
6.  
You can  
program the  
extension  
SNR  
Save Number Redial (F 04)  
SPage  
Specify Automatic Line Selection:  
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)  
Station Lock (F 21)2  
number.  
Lock  
Identify extensions programmed as shown:  
TT-EN  
VMMsgs-777  
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)  
Voice Mail Messages Button(I 777)  
VMBox  
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)  
F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAGE  
7 of 8  
Form C7: MLS-12 Phone  
Lucent Technologies  
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.  
For additional instructions, see page 8.  
Check Desired Features  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Also write in extension or group number  
SAMPLE  
Template Instructions  
NightSvc  
OCR  
Night Service Button {#503}  
If desired, write in line number, pool access code, dial code feature, or auto dial number  
1
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114}  
Wake Up Service Button {#115}  
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)  
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction  
Wake  
ID-Inspect  
ID-Name  
DND  
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)  
Do Not Disturb (F 01)  
Priv  
Privacy (F 07)  
VMSCover  
VIOB  
VMS Cover (F 15)  
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)  
2
ACE  
Account Code Entry (F 12)  
Background Music (F 19) 2  
Music  
1.  
PARTNER  
II system  
only.  
2
Backup  
Backup Failure Alarm (F 58)  
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 2,4  
CF-XX XX  
2. Requires  
Auto Dial  
button for  
each  
Call Park(I XX) 4  
Park  
Pickup-XX  
Drop  
Call Pickup (I 6 XX)  
extension.  
Button with  
lights is  
Conference Drop (F 06)  
Contact Closure 1 (F 41)  
3.  
2
CC1  
DLPA  
DLPI  
recom-  
mended, but  
not required.  
Extension  
number can  
be pro-  
grammed  
as Auto Dial  
button.  
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)  
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)  
Exclusive Hold (F 02)  
ExHold  
4.  
2
FAX-XX  
GCall-g  
Fax Management (I XX)  
Group Calling-Ring/Page (I 7 G or  
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or  
Group Pickup (I 66 G)  
I
*7 G)  
Hunt-g  
P/U Grp-g  
Ext-XX  
I
*77 G)  
Intercom  
Intercom  
5.  
You can  
program the  
origination  
extension  
only or both  
the  
Intercom Autodial(I XX or  
Last Number Redial (F 05)  
Loudspeaker Paging (I 70)  
I
*XX) 2  
Ext.  
LNR  
Loudspk  
MS-XX  
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 2  
origination  
and  
5
MsgOff-XX  
MsgOn-XX  
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)  
destination  
extension.  
You can  
program the  
extension  
number.  
* For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode only, if pool 880 is assigned, these two  
buttons are associated with this pool.  
5
Message Light On (F 09 XX)  
6.  
Recall (F 03)  
Recall  
SNR  
Save Number Redial (F 04)  
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)  
Specify Automatic Line Selection:  
SPage  
2
Identify extensions programmed as shown:  
Lock  
TT-EN  
Station Lock (F 21)  
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)  
VMMsgs-777  
VMBox  
Voice Mail Messages Button(I 777)  
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)  
F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAGE  
8 of 8  
Form C8: MLS-6 Phone  
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.  
For additional instructions, see page 8.  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovation  
Check Desired Features  
Also write in extension or group number  
SAMPLE  
Template Instructions  
DND  
Priv  
Do Not Disturb (F 01)  
Privacy (F 07)  
If desired, write in line number, pool access code, dial code feature, or auto dial number  
VMSCover  
VIOB  
VMS Cover (F 15)  
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction  
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)  
1
ACE  
Account Code Entry (F 12)  
1
Music  
Background Music (F 19)  
1,2,3  
Cover-XX XX  
CF-XX XX  
Call Coverage (F 20 XX XX)  
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)1,3  
Call Park (I XX )4  
Park  
Pickup-XX  
Drop  
Call Pickup(I 6 XX)  
Conference Drop (F 06)  
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)  
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)  
Exclusive Hold (F 02)  
DLPA  
DLPI  
Intercom  
Intercom  
ExHold  
FAX-XX  
GCall-g  
1
Ext.  
Fax Management (I XX)  
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or  
I
*7 G)  
Hunt-g  
P/U Grp-g  
Ext-XX  
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or  
I
*77 G)  
Group Pickup(I 66 G)  
* For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode only, if pool 880 is assigned, these two  
buttons are associated with this pool.  
1
Intercom Autodial (I XX or *XX)  
I
LNR  
Last Number Redial (F 05)  
Loudspk  
MS-XX  
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)  
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)1  
5
MsgOff-XX  
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)  
5
MsgOn-XX  
Recall  
Message Light On (F 09 XX)  
Recall (F 03)  
SNR  
Save Number Redial (F 04)  
SPage  
Lock  
Simultaneous Paging (I * 70)  
Station Lock (F 21) 1  
TT-EN  
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)  
Voice Mail Messages(I 777)  
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)  
VMMsgs-777  
VMBox  
Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button L = Line XX = Extension  
F =  
1. Button with lights is recommended, but not required.  
2. PARTNER II system only.  
3.  
You can program the origination extension only or both the origination  
and destination extension.  
Specify Automatic Line Selection:  
4. Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dial button.  
5. You can program the extension number.  
Identify extensions programmed as shown:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAGE  
1 of 2  
Form D: Number Lists  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
identifies Disallowed or Allowed List Assignments. For additional instructions,  
see pages 14 and 15.  
Emergency Phone Number List {#406}  
Write Emergency Phone Numbers that can be  
dialed from any phone that has access to an  
outside line regardless of assigned restrictions.  
Disallowed Phone Number Lists {#404}  
Write the telephone numbers that users are prevented from dialing.  
List 2  
2
Person/Place  
List 1  
List 3  
List 4  
Telephone Number  
Entry  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
Telephone Number1  
Telephone Number1  
Telephone NUmber1  
Telephone Number1  
Entry  
Entry  
Entry  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
Entry  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
External Hotline {#311}  
Required if External Hotline {#311}  
Allowed Phone Number Lists {#407}  
Write the telephone numbers that users can dial regardless of assigned restrictions.  
Write Extension Jack number specified on  
number to be assigned to Personal Speed Dial  
Code 80 for that extension.  
List 1  
List 3  
List 4  
List 2  
1
1
1
Telephone Number1  
Telephone Number  
Entry  
Telephone Number Entry  
Telephone Number  
Entry  
Entry  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
3
Telephone Number  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
Ext.Jack  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
Telephone Number can be up to 12 characters, including 0-9, *, and #. Write ! for wildcard (press Hold to program).  
Telephone Number can be up to 12 digits (0-9).  
3. Telephone Number can be up to 28 characters, including 0-9, *, #, and special dialing functions. You can have more  
than 10 External Hotlines.  
1.  
2.  
An External Hotline phone is a phone that dials the specified  
telephone number when the handset is lifted.  
NOTE:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PAGE  
2 of 2  
Form D: Number Lists  
Required only if Forced Account Code Verification is desired.  
For additional instructions, see page 15.  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Forced Account Code List {#409}  
Account Code (up to 6 digits)1  
Write Description  
1
1
Entry  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
Write Description  
Account Code (up to 6 digits)  
Account Code (up tp 6 digits)  
Entry  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
Entry  
Write Description  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
1. Valid entries are 0-9; write ! for wildcard (press Hold to program).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAGE  
1 of 1  
Form E: System Speed Dial Number  
Optional for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Plus System.  
For additional instructions, see page 16.  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
To Dial: On system phones, press [ Feat ] + 3-digit code. On standard phones, press [  
#
] + 3-digit code while receiving intercom dial tone.  
1
Telephone Number2  
1
1
Telephone Number2  
Code  
667  
668  
669  
670  
671  
672  
673  
674  
675  
676  
677  
678  
679  
680  
681  
682  
683  
684  
685  
686  
687  
688  
689  
690  
691  
692  
693  
694  
695  
696  
697  
698  
699  
Name/Company  
Telephone Number2  
Code  
6 3 4  
6 3 5  
6 3 6  
Name/Company  
Name/Company  
Code  
6 0 0  
6 0 1  
6 0 2  
6 0 3  
6 0 4  
6 0 5  
606  
6 0 7  
6 0 8  
6 0 9  
6 1 0  
6 1 1  
6 1 2  
6 1 3  
6 1 4  
6 1 5  
6 1 6  
6 1 7  
6 1 8  
6 1 9  
6 2 0  
621  
622  
623  
624  
625  
626  
627  
628  
629  
630  
631  
632  
633  
6 3 7  
6 3 8  
6 3 9  
6 4 0  
6 4 1  
642  
6 4 3  
6 4 4  
6 4 5  
6 4 6  
6 4 7  
6 4 8  
6 4 9  
6 5 0  
6 5 1  
6 5 2  
6 5 3  
6 5 4  
6 5 5  
6 5 6  
6 5 7  
6 5 8  
6 5 9  
6 6 0  
6 6 1  
6 6 2  
6 6 3  
6 6 4  
6 6 5  
666  
1
2
Telephone number can be up to 28 digits, including 0-9, , #  
and special dialing functions (see page 16 of instructions for  
detailed information).  
You can dial System Speed Dial numbers that are marked  
with at any time, regardless of dialing restrictions placed on  
your extension. System Speed Dial numbers are programmed  
by the System Manager (report problems and suggested  
revisions to your System Manager).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Case Studies  
F
Purpose  
This appendix contains two case studies based on actual customer  
requirements. Each case study defines the call handling requirements of the  
business and explains how the planning forms for the communications system  
and voice messaging system were filled out. You can use these case studies to  
determine how customer requirements were matched to PARTNER MAIL VS  
system features.  
F-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Case Studies  
Case Study #1  
About the Customer  
Tennis Land is a sports center that offers tennis enthusiasts six tennis courts  
and a large, well-stocked shop for purchasing a variety of tennis paraphernalia  
including racquets and tennis wear. In addition, Tennis Land offers lessons and  
clinics from staff coaches. When the coaches are not giving lessons or clinics,  
hosting tournaments, or traveling with the Tennis Land team in exhibition  
matches, they help the sales people in the shop. Stan Williams—the owner,  
Sally Parker—the manager, and the coaches all have private offices.  
Stan purchased a PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 1.0  
and a PARTNER MAIL VS Release 4 Voice Messaging System. He believes that  
the systems’ features will help his employees provide better service to  
customers.  
Sally is responsible for managing the systems; she established these facts:  
The system will have three outside lines and 8 extensions.  
The clerk will have a PARTNER-18D phone at extension 10. Sally’s  
PARTNER-18D phone will be extension 11. Stans’ PARTNER-18D phone  
will be extension 12. The three coaches will have PARTNER-18 phones.  
Two MLS-12 phones will be in the shop.  
Stan’s callers should be able to reach him without having to be  
transferred by an employee or the PARTNER MAIL VS system, so Stan  
will have a personal line. When Stan is not available, his callers will be  
sent directly to his mailbox where they can leave messages.  
Stan prefers that customers speak with an employee while the center is  
open, so all lines will ring at all phones. Although there is no receptionist,  
the clerk and the salespeople will serve the receptionist function by  
answering calls when they can.  
During business hours, calls will go to the Automated Attendant Service  
of the PARTNER MAIL VS system only when the clerk and salespeople  
are busy.  
All of Tennis Land’s customers and employees speak English, so the  
PARTNER MAIL VS system will be set for Monolingual Mode with U.S.  
English as the System Language.  
Potential customers call frequently to inquire about Tennis Land’s hours  
and location, as well as tournament and exhibition match schedules.  
Therefore, when the Automated Attendant Service answers, callers can  
choose to hear either an announcement that includes Tennis Land’s  
hours of operation and directions to the center or another detailing  
current and upcoming competitions.  
Callers who receive Automated Attendant Service and want to speak to a  
salesperson will be able to reach the first available person in the shop.  
F-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Case Studies  
The mailbox at extension 10 will be used for general messages.  
Customers who receive Automated Attendant Service and stay on the  
line or press 0 for assistance will be routed to this extension, which is at  
the clerk’s desk. Customers who call after business hours will have the  
option of leaving a message in this mailbox.  
Stan, Sally, and each coach will have a mailbox and Automatic VMS  
Cover. Callers will be routed automatically to the appropriate mailbox  
where they can leave a message when the person they called is not  
available.  
Stan, Sally, and each coach will also have Outcalling privileges so that  
when they are moving around the club during tournaments or traveling  
with the team, they can be alerted via their pagers to the arrival of  
messages being left in their voice mailboxes.  
Stan especially wants customers to be able to leave messages for the  
coaches when they are away from their offices. This capability will help  
prevent missed appointments and lost income when customers call  
about lessons and clinics.  
F-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Case Studies  
Filling Out the Planning Forms  
This section explains how the System Planner for the PARTNER Advanced  
Communications System Release 1.0 and the forms for the PARTNER MAIL VS  
Release 4 Voice Messaging System are filled out based on the facts in the  
Tennis Land case. For brevity, “CS” refers to the System Planner forms for the  
communications system and “VMS” refers to the forms for the voice messaging  
system.  
Write the Telephone Numbers in order customer desires: Telephone  
numbers in this column represent Tennis Land’s three lines. The last line,  
Line 03, is Stan’s personal line.  
VMS-AA: In this column, checks for Lines 01, 02, and 03 indicate that  
unanswered calls on those lines go to the Automated Attendant Service  
of the PARTNER MAIL VS system.  
VMS-Mail: Stan’s extension number, 12, in this column indicates that  
the Line Coverage Extension (#208) feature sends unanswered calls on  
Line 04 directly to Stan’s mailbox.  
System Settings:  
Receptionist answers calls during business hours? The clerk and  
salespeople will serve the receptionist function; so “Yes” appears on  
this line.  
Ring on Transfer (#119): “NA” written in the space provided indicates  
that music or recorded messages will be played while calls are being  
transferred.  
Music on Hold (#602): The blank line indicates that a Music on Hold  
device is installed.  
Line Coverage:  
VMS Hunt Delay (#506): “Del” (Delayed) indicates that the Automated  
Attendant Service acts as a backup, picking up calls after the fourth ring.  
A person has a chance to answer before a call goes to the PARTNER  
MAIL VS system.  
VMS Hunt Schedule (#507): The absence of any check mark indicates  
that the Automated Attendant Service picks up unanswered calls during  
business hours and after hours. (This setting is the default.)  
F-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Case Studies  
Write Name/Description: The names listed for extensions 10 though 19  
in this column identify the extension assignments.  
Identify Telephone Attached to this Extension: Check in these  
columns specify the type of telephone each person or location has.  
VMS in the Write Name/Description column and checks in the  
PARTNER MAIL VS column indicate that the PARTNER MAIL VS module  
is installed in Slot 3 of the Control Unit. The module uses extensions 22  
and 23, the last two extensions for that slot.  
Write Transfer Return Ext. No.: “10” in this column indicates that  
when a call transferred by the PARTNER MAIL VS system is unanswered,  
it goes to extension 10 where the clerk can answer it.  
Automatic VMS Cover (#310): Check in this column indicate that  
unanswered calls to extensions 10 through 15 automatically are covered  
by the Automated Attendant Service.  
Hunt Group Extensions 1-6 (#505): “1” in this column indicates that  
extensions 16 and 17 make up Hunt Group 1. A call transferred to this  
group rings three times at the first non-busy extension. If it is not  
answered, it moves to the next non-busy extensions in the group,  
continuing until someone answers or the caller hangs up.  
Hunt Group Extensions VMS Only: column for extensions 22  
and 23 satisfy the requirement that the extensions used by the  
PARTNER MAIL VS module be assigned to Hunt Group 7.  
PARTNER-18D phone at extension 10: Night Service, Do Not Disturb,  
Voice Mail Messages, and Voice Mailbox Transfer.  
The Night Service button allows the user to turn Night Service on and off.  
When Night Service is off, the Day Menu prompt plays. When Night  
Service is on, the Night Menu Prompt plays.  
A subscriber can use the Do Not Disturb button to send callers to the  
general mailbox without ringing the extension first.  
The Voice Mail Messages button allows the user to call Voice Mail  
Service with one touch.  
The Voice Mailbox Transfer button allows the user to transfer callers  
directly to another subscriber’s mailbox without ringing the extension first.  
PARTNER-18 phones at extensions 11, 12, 13, 14, and 15:  
Do Not Disturb, Voice Mail Messages, and Voice Mailbox Transfer.  
F-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Case Studies  
on the MLS-12 phones at extensions 16 and 17.  
VMS Form 1  
The default settings for Language Mode (Monolingual) and System  
Language (U.S. English) are used.  
Subscriber Name: In this column, the names assigned to mailboxes 10  
though 15 indicate that the clerk, Sally, Stan, and the coaches have  
mailboxes.  
Mailboxes 16 through 19 are marked for deletion. For system security,  
it is advisable to delete unused mailboxes.  
Outcalling Assigned: “Yes” in this column indicates that Outcalling  
privileges are assigned to Sally, Stan, and the coaches.  
Description: In this column, “Direct Extension Transfer” for Selector  
Code 1 indicates that when callers get the Automated Attendant Service,  
they can transfer to any extension (10 to 19) by entering the extension  
number.  
“Shop” in the Description column and “771” in the Specific Ext. # or  
Group # for Selector Code Transfer, or Announcement # column for  
Selector Code 4 indicate that when callers get the Automated Attendant  
Service, they can press 4 to transfer to Hunt Group 1 (which is defined  
“Announcement” in the Description column and the numbers (1 and 2)  
in the Specific Ext. # or Group # for Selector Code Transfer, or  
Announcement # column indicate that when callers get the Automated  
Attendant Service they can choose to hear one of two Announcements.  
When an unanswered call goes to the Automated Attendant Service and  
the caller chooses to hear an Announcement, the caller hears one of the  
When Night Service is off and an unanswered call goes to the Automated  
F-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Case Studies  
When Night Service is on and an unanswered call goes to the Automated  
Post-Installation Recommendations  
Stan, Sally, and the coaches should record a personal greeting and  
change the factory set password for their mailboxes.  
Stan, Sally, and the coaches should turn on Outcalling and enter an  
Outcalling number and schedule.  
The clerk should record a general business greeting for the mailbox at  
extension 10 and change the factory-set password for that mailbox.  
F-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Case Studies  
F-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAGE  
1 of 2  
System Configuration  
Form A:  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System.  
For additional instructions, see page 2.  
1.  
Customer Billing Name  
6. Features Customer is most interested in (most important first):  
2. Installation Address  
Phone  
Phone  
3.  
4.  
Contact Name  
Phone  
Person to be Trained  
Alternate Trainee’s Name  
(
)
5.Sold by  
Lucent Technologies Sales Force  
Dealer:  
Salesperson’s Name  
Phone  
7.  
System Lines  
Line Coverage—You can select one per line  
Write  
R if  
1l  
l
l
l
4
2
3
VMS-  
Mail  
{#206}  
VMS-  
AA  
{#206}  
A A  
Hunt  
Group  
Line Write the Telephone Numbers  
Jack in order customer desires  
Identify other Local Telephone  
Caller ID Company Subscription Services  
(e.g., Repeat Call)  
Service  
Write User’s Name for Personal  
or Owned Line or Identify Equipment  
for Dedicated Line  
Check if  
Rotary  
(Dial  
No.  
(list personal and dedicated lines last)  
{#607}  
(write no.)  
{#206}  
Pulse)  
Line  
{#201}  
or  
Only one of these  
{#208}  
types per system  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
PAGE  
2 of 2  
System Configuration  
Form A:  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System.  
For additional instructions, see pages 3 and 4.  
10.  
Auxiliary Equipment (System). Check if applicable:  
8.  
System Settings. Write response on line for each item.  
Battery Backup  
.
Receptionist answers calls during business hours? Write “Yes” or “No”  
Caller ID Devices  
Number of Lines {#104}—By default, 3 lines per PARTNER ACS processor module, 2 lines  
per 206 module and 4 lines per 400 module are assigned to each extension. Write  
Loudspeaker Paging: Number of zones  
Magic on Hold (Music on Hold {#602} must be active.)  
Uninterruptible Power Supply  
number if different from default  
.
Transfer Return Rings {#105}—By default, a transferred call rings 4 times before going  
to the transfer return extension. Write number (0-9, 0 = no return) if different from  
SMDR. If checked, specify the following if appropriate:  
default  
.
SMDR Record Type {#608}—By default, all calls are included on call reports. Write “Out”  
Outside Conference Denial {#109}—By default, a conference call can include 2 outside  
.
if only outgoing calls are reported  
parties. Write “No” if 2 outside parties are not allowed  
.
SMDR Output Format {#610}—By default, up to 15 digits are printed for dialed  
numbers in the Number field of the call report. Write “24” if a maximum of 24 digits is  
VMS Cover Rings {#117}—By default, a call rings 3 times before going to the user’s  
.
mailbox. Write number (1-9) if different from default  
Ring on Transfer {#119}—By default, the caller hears ringing when the call is transferred.  
Write “NA” if Music on Hold or silence is desired  
Toll Call Prefix {#402}—By default, 0 or 1 must be dialed before the area code for a  
.
desired  
PARTNER Contact Closure Adjunct. If checked, write in the number (1-4) below to specify  
.
Operation Type for each Contact Closure as appropriate:  
.
long distance call. Write “No” if 0 or 1 is not required  
OperationType  
{#613}  
Contact  
Closure 1  
Contact  
Closure 1  
System Password {#403}—By default, no password is programmed to override  
dialing restrictions and to turn Night Service on and off. Write 4 digits if password is  
1 = 1 second on  
2 = 3 seconds on ( )  
3 = 5 seconds on  
4 = Toggle  
desired  
.
Star Code Dial Delay {#410}—By default, the system inserts a 0 second delay after a valid  
Central Office star code when it autodials. Write number (1–5) of seconds if a longer delay  
.
is desired or “NO” if this feature should not be active  
Music on Hold {#602}—By default, the Music on Hold jack on the processor module is  
Backup/Restore PC Card. If checked, write “Active” if Automatic System Programming  
.
active. Write “No” if the jack is deactivated  
9. Line Coverage.  
.
Backup {#123} is desired  
11. Notes: Write any additional information that you want to communicate to the installer.  
VMS Hunt Delay {#506}—By default, VMS answers calls after 2 rings. Write “Del” if calls  
ring 4 times before VMS answers  
.
VMS Hunt Schedule {#507}—By default, VMS is on all the time. Check if Day only or  
Night only is desired:  
Day only  
Night only  
12.  
Installation Date  
13.  
Order Nos.  
Telephone No.  
14.  
Sales Support Representative’s Name  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
PAGE  
1 of 3  
System Extensions  
Form B1:  
Lucent Technologies  
Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System.  
For additional instructions, see page 5.  
Bell Labs Innovations  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Identify Telephone  
Identify Auxiliary Equipment  
Attached to this Extension  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Attached to this Extension  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Write  
Transfer  
Return  
Ext. No.  
{#306}  
Write in  
Other  
Equipment  
Ext.  
Jack  
No.  
Write Name/Description  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
10  
10  
22  
23  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
24  
25  
26  
27  
IMPORTANT:  
A system display phone is required for programming at extension 10 or 11. Extension 10 typically is the receptionist’s extension.  
Extension 11 is recommended as a second programming extension (typically the System Manager’s extension).  
Group Assignments, VMS Only.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
If checked, see Form B1, Page 3 of 3.  
If there is a mix of PARTNER-model and MLS-model phones, write “P” for PARTNER and “M” for MLS.  
Write “T” for touch-tone or “R” for rotary. If Call waiting is desired, check next column.  
7.  
8. Check corresponding alert extensions in next column. To prevent outside calls, remove all outside lines—see  
Must be standard phone. If immediate dialing is required, use a dedicated line. Do not assign restrictions that  
prevent dialing the outside number, Forced Account Code Entry {#307}, or groups. Also see Form D, External  
Hotline {#311}.  
Standard phone is recommended. Write extension number of corresponding alert extension or “70” for loud-  
9.  
Also write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} on this form.  
10. Write “1,” “2,” or “B” (for Both) to identify which Contact Closure the extension can activate.  
5.  
speaker paging system in next column.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
PAGE  
1 of 2  
Form B2:  
Customized Extension Settings  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Required if you want to change extension settings from defaults.  
For additional instructions, see pages 6 and 7.  
Identify  
Group Assignments  
Identify Restrictions/Permissions  
Identify Line Ringing {CTP} Option  
Identify Extension Settings  
if Different than Default  
If Different than Defaults  
If Different than Default  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Write line numbers for Line Access Restriction  
{#302}  
Write line numbers in each column to show desired  
Line Ringing options  
No Restriction  
1 – 4 1 – 6  
7
1 – 4  
NA  
1 – 8  
l
1–8  
Lines2  
Outgoing  
only  
Incoming  
only  
NA  
NR  
No Access  
No Ring  
NA  
Delayed  
Immediate  
NA  
Not Assigned  
NA  
NA  
A
NA  
E
A
NA  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
1
1
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
l
l
l
l
l
l
24  
25  
26  
27  
Assignments  
Write group number (1–4).  
6.  
7.  
1. Write S for Spanish or F for French.  
=
Default  
= Assigned or Active  
English  
= Not Assigned or Not Active  
No Restriction  
Centralized Telephone Programming  
A
Write group number (1–4). If a loudspeaker is connected and Simultaneous Paging is desired,  
Write group number (1–6).  
2.  
Use Line Assignment {#301} to remove lines from or assign lines to  
extensions.  
=
E
8.  
3.  
Write IN for Inside Only or LOC for Local Only to indicate restrictions for all  
NA  
NR  
outgoing calls on all lines.  
4. Write list number (1–8). Also see Form D, Disallowed Phone Number Lists  
{#404}.  
=
{CTP} =  
Write list number (1–8). Also see Form D, Allowed Phone Number Lists {#407}.  
5.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
PAGE  
3 of 8  
Form C3: PARTNER-18/18D Phone  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.  
For additional instructions, see pages 8 through 13.  
Check Desired Features  
Also write in extension or group number  
NightSvc  
Night Service Button {#503}  
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114} 1  
Wake Up Service Button {#115}  
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)  
SAMPLE  
OCR  
Template Instructions  
Wake  
If desired, write in line number, dial code feature, or auto dial number  
ID-Inspect  
ID-Name  
DND  
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction  
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)  
Do Not Disturb (F 01)  
Priv  
Privacy (F 07)  
VMSCover  
VIOB  
VMS Cover (F 15)  
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)  
Account Code Entry (F 12)2  
Background Music (F 19)2  
ACE  
PARTNER-18D only  
Music  
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)2,4  
Call Park(I XX) 3  
CF-XX XX  
Park  
Requires  
Auto Dial  
button for  
each  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Pickup-XX  
Drop  
Call Pickup (I 6 XX)  
Conference Drop (F 06)  
extension.  
2
CC1  
Contact Closure 1 (F 41)  
Button with  
lights is  
recom-  
mended, but  
not required.  
Extension  
number can  
be pro-  
grammed  
as Auto Dial  
button.  
2
CC2  
DLPA  
DLPI  
Contact Closure 2 (F 42)  
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)  
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)  
Exclusive Hold (F 02)  
ExHold  
FAX-XX  
GCall-g  
Fax Management(I XX) 2  
Group Calling-Ring/Page (I 7 G or *7 G)  
I
Hunt-g  
P/U Grp-g  
Ext-XX  
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or  
I
*77 G)  
Group Pickup (I 66 G)  
4. You can  
program the  
Intercom Autodial(I XX or  
*XX) 2  
I
origination  
extension  
only or both  
the  
origination  
and  
destination  
extension.  
LNR  
Last Number Redial (F 05)  
Loudspk  
MS-XX  
Loudspeaker Paging (I 70)  
2
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)  
5
MsgOff-XX  
Intercom  
Intercom  
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)  
5
MsgOn-XX  
Recall  
SNR  
Message Light On (F 09 XX)  
Ext.  
You can  
5.  
Recall (F 03)  
program the  
extension  
number.  
Save Number Redial (F 04)  
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)  
Station Lock (F 21)2  
SPage  
Lock  
Specify Automatic Line Selection:  
TT-EN  
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)  
Voice Mail Messages Button (I 777)  
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)  
Identify extensions programmed as shown:  
VMMsgs-777  
VMBox  
F
= Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
PAGE  
3 of 8  
Form C3: PARTNER-18/18D Phone  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.  
For additional instructions, see pages 8 through 13.  
Check Desired Features  
Also write in extension or group number  
NightSvc  
Night Service Button {#503}  
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114}1  
Wake Up Service Button {#115}  
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)  
SAMPLE  
OCR  
Template Instructions  
Wake  
If desired, write in line number, dial code feature, or auto dial number  
ID-Inspect  
ID-Name  
DND  
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction  
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)  
Do Not Disturb (F 01)  
Priv  
Privacy (F 07)  
VMSCover  
VIOB  
VMS Cover (F 15)  
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)  
Account Code Entry (F 12) 2  
Background Music (F 19) 2  
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 2,4  
Call Park(I XX) 3  
ACE  
Music  
PARTNER-18D only  
CF-XX XX  
Park  
Requires  
Auto Dial  
button for  
each  
1.  
Pickup-XX  
Call Pickup (I 6 XX)  
Drop  
CC1  
Conference Drop (F 06)  
extension.  
Contact Closure 1 (F 41) 2  
Contact Closure 2 (F 42) 2  
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line (I 68)  
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)  
Exclusive Hold (F 02)  
2. Button with  
lights is  
recom-  
mended, but  
not required.  
Extension  
3.  
number can  
be pro-  
grammed  
as Auto Dial  
button.  
4. You can  
program the  
origination  
extension  
only or both  
the  
origination  
and  
destination  
extension.  
You can  
program the  
extension  
number.  
CC2  
DLPA  
DLPI  
ExHold  
Fax Management(I XX) 2  
FAX-XX  
GCall-g  
Group Calling-Ring/Page (I 7 G or *7 G)  
I
Hunt-g  
P/U Grp-g  
Ext-XX  
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or  
I
*77 G)  
Group Pickup(I 66 G)  
Intercom Autodial(I XX or  
Last Number Redial (F 05)  
Loudspeaker Paging (I 70)  
I
*XX) 2  
LNR  
Loudspk  
MS-XX  
2
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)  
5
MsgOff-XX  
Intercom  
Intercom  
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)  
5
MsgOn-XX  
Recall  
SNR  
Message Light On (F 09 XX)  
Ext.  
5.  
Recall (F 03)  
Save Number Redial (F 04)  
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)  
Station Lock (F 21) 2  
SPage  
Lock  
Specify Automatic Line Selection:  
TT-EN  
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)  
Voice Mail Messages Button(I 777)  
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)  
Identify extensions programmed as shown:  
VMMsgs-777  
VMBox  
Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension  
F =  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Lucent Technologies  
PAGE  
7 or 8  
Bell Labs Innovtions  
Form C7: MLS-12/12D Phone  
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.  
For additional instructions, see pages 8 through 13.  
Check Desired Features  
Also write in extension or group number  
NightSvc  
Night Service Button {#503}  
SAMPLE  
OCR  
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114}1  
Wake Up Service Button {#115}  
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)  
Template Instructions  
Wake  
If desired, write in line number, dial code feature, or auto dial number  
ID-Inspect  
ID-Name  
DND  
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction  
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)  
Do Not Disturb (F 01)  
Priv  
Privacy (F 07)  
VMSCover  
VIOB  
VMS Cover (F 15)  
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)  
Account Code Entry (F 12)2  
Background Music (F 19) 2  
ACE  
Music  
Requires Auto  
Dial button for  
each  
1.  
2.  
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)2,4  
CF-XX XX  
Call Park(I XX) 3  
Park  
extension.  
Pickup-XX  
Drop  
Button with  
lights is  
recom-  
mended, but  
not required.  
Call Pickup (I 6 XX)  
Conference Drop (F 06)  
Contact Closure 1 (F 41)  
Contact Closure 2 (F 42) 2  
2
CC1  
CC2  
Extension  
number can  
be pro-  
grammed as  
Auto Dial  
button.  
3.  
4.  
DLPA  
DLPI  
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)  
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)  
Exclusive Hold (F 02)  
ExHold  
FAX-XX  
GCall-g  
Hunt-g  
Fax Management(I XX) 2  
You can  
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or  
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or  
Group Pickup (I 66 G)  
I
* 7 G)  
program the  
origination  
extension only  
or both the  
origination  
and destina-  
tion exten-  
sion.  
I
*77 G)  
P/U Grp-g  
Ext-XX  
2
Intercom Autodial(I XX or  
Last Number Redial (F 05)  
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)  
I
*XX)  
LNR  
Loudspk  
MS-XX  
Intercom  
Intercom  
Ext.  
You can  
5.  
2
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)  
program the  
extension  
number.  
5
MsgOff-XX  
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)  
5
MsgOn-XX  
Recall  
SNR  
Message Light On (F 09 XX)  
Recall (F 03)  
Specify Automatic Line Selection:  
Save Number Redial (F 04)  
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)  
Station Lock (F 21) 2  
Identify extensions programmed as shown:  
SPage  
Lock  
TT-EN  
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)  
Voice Mail Messages Button(I 777)  
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)  
VMMsgs-777  
VMBox  
F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Form 2: Mailbox Assignments  
Mailbox  
Language Assigned  
Outcalling  
Subscriber Name  
Mailbox  
Language  
Outcalling  
Assigned  
Mailbox  
Mailbox  
Subscriber Name  
(26  
(27  
(28  
(29  
(30  
(31  
(32  
(33  
(34  
(35  
(36  
(37  
(38  
(39  
(40  
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
10 ✔  
(11  
(12  
(13  
(14  
(15  
)
)
)
)
)
(20  
(21  
(22  
(23  
(24  
(25  
)
)
)
)
)
)
Completing this Form  
General Information  
Mailbox To assign a mailbox to an extension other than the  
factory default, cross out the factory default and write in the  
extension to be used.  
Factory defaults are identified by the  
symbol.  
The system comes with a predetermined number of mailboxes.  
The optional Mailbox Expansion Card doubles the capacity.  
For PARTNER PLUS, use an extension number from 11-33.  
Mailbox 10 is reserved for the receptionist at extension 10 and  
cannot be changed.  
For PARTNER Advanced Communications System, use an  
extension number from 11-41.  
Mailbox 10 provides 60 minutes of message recording time. All  
other mailboxes provide 20 minutes of message recording time.  
For PARTNER II or PARTNER 48, use an extension number  
from 11-57.  
For system security mailboxes should be deleted where they  
are not needed; for example, mailboxes should be deleted for  
extensions in use by auxiliary equipment (such as a fax or  
doorphone) and the extensions assigned to the VMS Hunt  
Group.  
To mark an unused mailbox for deletion without assigning an  
extension, cross out the factory default.  
Subscriber Name For every mailbox in use, write the name of  
the mailbox subscriber.  
Guest mailboxes can be created for users who don’t have their  
own phone by assigning an unused extension number as the  
mailbox number. Unused extension numbers include: 1) vacant  
extension jacks in installed 206 modules and 2) extensions in  
your DIAL plan higher than the last extension jack in the last  
more information.  
Mailbox Language For each mailbox that requires a language  
different from the System Language or Primary Language  
indicated on Form 1, write the name of the language in this  
space. Supported languages are listed on Form 1.  
Outcalling Assigned For each mailbox in use, indicate  
whether Outcalling is assigned.  
Programming Mailboxes  
You can change a mailbox assignment by deleting an existing  
mailbox and creating a new one.  
To program mailboxes, dial [ 4 ] from the Programming Main menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Form 3: Menu Definition  
Required for Automated Attendant Service  
Description  
Selector  
Code  
Range of Extensions  
for Direct Extension  
Transfer  
Ext. # or Group # for  
Selector Code Transfer,  
or Announcement  
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(10–19  
(20–29  
(30–39  
)
)
)
(71–74, 771–776  
)
Transfer to Mailbox 10  
Completing this Form  
General Information  
For Direct Extension Transfer...  
Factory defaults are identified by the  
symbol.  
Write “Direct Extension Transfer.”  
Description  
This Menu Definition applies to both the Day and Night Menu  
prompts.  
Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer  
Leave the factory default.  
The Selector Code is the first digit dialed by the caller in  
response to the menu prompts.  
Ext. # or Group # for Selector Code Transfer ... Leave blank.  
In Direct Extension Transfer, Selector Codes 1–5 and 7  
represent the first digit for a range of extensions. These Selector  
Codes let callers dial extension numbers directly.  
For Selector Extension Transfer...  
Write the name of the person or group to receive  
Description  
the transfer.  
In Selector Code Transfer, Selector Codes 1–9 represent a  
specific extension, Group Calling number, (if available) or Hunt  
Group number to which the caller will be transferred. Use the  
following values:  
Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer  
Cross out the factory default if you want the caller to dial the  
corresponding Selector Code to transfer to the extension,  
announcement, or group identified in  
below.  
10–33 or 771–776  
PARTNER Plus:  
PARTNER Advanced:  
PARTNER II:  
Ext. #, or Group # for Selector Code Transfer...Write the  
extension, announcement, or group number to receive the  
transfer.  
11–41, 71–74, or 771–776  
10–57, 71–74, or 771–776  
10–57, 71, or 771–776  
PARTNER 48:  
For Announcement...  
Selector Code Transfer lets callers dial a single digit to reach a  
single extension or group, such as the VP of Sales at extension 37  
or the order processing operators assigned to Hunt Group 774.  
Write “Announcement.”  
Description  
Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer  
Selector Code 9 lets callers transfer directly to mailbox 10  
(receptionist mailbox) where they can leave a message.  
Cross out the factory default if you want the caller to dial the  
corresponding Selector Code to hear the Announcement  
identified in  
below.  
The Description and Selector Code number from this form will  
be used to complete the Day and Night Menu Prompts (Forms  
Announcement #  
Write the Announcement number (1 or 2).  
For Announcement entries in Description, Selector Code, and  
Announcement # of this form will be used to complete Forms  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Form 3A: Automated Attendant Announcement—  
System Language or Primary Language  
Required if Selector Code Transfer is set to Announcement  
:
Announcement #  
:
Announcement #  
Completing this Form  
General Information  
Write the Announcement and its number in the space provided.  
After the Announcement plays, you can program the system to  
hang up or to offer callers the option of pressing *4 (to repeat  
this Announcement), *7 (to return to the Main Menu), *8 (to  
transfer to an extension), or 0.  
Recording the Announcement(s)  
To record the Announcement, dial [ 3 ] from the Programming  
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, let callers know they can  
switch the language they hear while listening to the  
Main Menu.  
Announcement. For example, “Para español, marque * 1.”  
Announcements can supply frequently requested information  
so that your staff is free to assist customers or to perform other  
tasks more efficiently.  
An Announcement can be up to four minutes long.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Form 4: Day Menu Prompt—  
System Language or Primary Language  
Required if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only or Always  
Completing this Form  
General Information  
Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call  
during normal business hours, including the instructions to the  
caller for selecting menu options.  
The Day Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt  
Schedule is set to Day Only or Always and Night Service is off.  
The Day Menu Prompt and the Night Menu Prompt use the  
same Menu Definition.  
Suggested options include:  
The Day Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of  
menu options.  
“Remain on the line for assistance.”  
“Dial 0 for assistance.”  
The welcome should introduce the company. For example,  
“To hear this menu again, dial * 4.”  
“Thank you for calling the Any Travel Agency.”  
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, let callers know they can  
Recording the Day Menu Prompt  
switch the language they hear while on the call. For example,  
“Para español, marque * 1.”  
To record the Day Menu Prompt, dial [ 3 ] from the Programming  
The menu options should contain instructions that correspond  
Main Menu.  
If callers can dial extension numbers (Direct Extension  
Transfer), the prompt should instruct callers to dial the  
extension number. For example, “If you know the extension  
of the person you want to reach, dial it now.”  
If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or  
group (Selector Code Transfer), the prompt should provide  
instructions such as "To speak to someone in sales, press 6.”  
If callers can can choose an Announcement, include that  
information. For example, “For directions to our office, press 4.”  
It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5  
or less to avoid confusing the caller.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Form 5: Night Menu Prompt—  
System Language or Primary Language  
Required if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Night Only or Always  
If Selector Code 9 is left as the default, the prompt should  
instruct callers to press 9 to leave a message with the  
receptionist.  
General Information  
The Night Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt  
Schedule is set to Night Only or Always and Night Service is  
on. The Night Menu Prompt and the Day Menu Prompt use the  
same Menu Definition.  
It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5  
or less to avoid confusing the caller.  
The Night Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of  
Completing this Form  
menu options.  
Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call  
after normal business hours, including instructions to the caller for  
selecting menu options.  
The welcome should introduce the company. For example,  
“You have reached the Any Travel Agency. Our hours are 9 AM  
to 5 PM, Monday through Friday.”  
Suggested options include:  
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, let callers know they can  
switch the language they hear while on the call. For example,  
“Dial 9 or remain on the line to leave a message.”  
“To hear this menu again, dial * 4.”  
“Para español, marque * 1.”  
The menu options should contain instructions that correspond  
Recording the Night Menu Prompt  
If callers can dial extension numbers (Direct Extension  
Transfer), the prompt should instruct callers to dial the  
extension number. For example, “If you know the extension  
of the person you want to reach, dial it now and leave a  
message.”  
To record the Night Menu Prompt, dial [ 3 ] from the  
Programming Main Menu.  
If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or  
group (Selector Code Transfer), the prompt should provide  
instructions such as “To leave a message for Pat, press 6.”  
Keep in mind that there are no group mailboxes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Case Studies  
Case Study #2  
About the Customer  
Software Mexico is a small company that develops PC-based software in  
Tijuana, Mexico. The company prides itself on personalized service and  
customer satisfaction. The owner, Jose Ramirez, employs a staff of nine  
including a receptionist, a system administrator, five programmers, a customer  
service representative, and a bookkeeper. Jose and his employees speak both  
English and Spanish. Sixty percent of Software Mexico’s customers speak  
Spanish; the other 40 percent speak English.  
Jose purchased a PARTNER Plus Release 4.1 Communications System and a  
PARTNER MAIL VS Release 4 Voice Messaging System because the integrated  
system can answer outside calls and offer callers the option of listening to  
prompts and transferring to extensions in either English or Spanish.  
Receptionist Vera Gonzalez is responsible for managing the systems;  
she established these facts:  
The system will have four outside lines and 12 extensions.  
Jose and Vera will have PARTNER-34D phones; the other eight  
employees will have PARTNER-18D phones. In addition, two standard  
phones will be installed in the waiting room so customers can make  
local calls.  
Jose prefers that Vera help with various office tasks, so all lines will ring  
delayed at extension 10, and the PARTNER MAIL VS system will answer  
them. Vera will act as backup; she will answer calls from customers who  
press 0 or stay on the line for assistance, as well as transfer returned  
calls. Also, Vera will be responsible for checking the messages in the  
mailbox at extension 10 and forwarding them to the appropriate people.  
Calls will go to the Automated Attendant Service of the PARTNER  
MAIL VS system during the day and at night.  
The majority of Software Mexico’s callers have questions about their  
software or inquiries about bills. Therefore, callers who receive  
Automated Attendant Service and want to speak to the customer service  
representative or the bookkeeper can do so easily by pressing a single  
digit as explained in the Automated Attendant Service prompt.  
Since the majority of Software Mexico’s customers speak Spanish, the  
system should answer outside calls and play messages and prompts in  
Spanish. Callers will have the option of listening to the prompts and  
messages in English.  
Each employee will have a mailbox and Automatic VMS Cover assigned  
to his or her extension. This arrangement allows callers to leave personal  
messages when the employee is unable to answer a call.  
F-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Case Studies  
Filling Out the Planning Forms  
This section explains how the System Planner for the PARTNER Plus  
Release 4.1 Communications System and the forms for the PARTNER MAIL VS  
Release 4 Voice Messaging System are filled out based on the facts in the  
Software Mexico case. For brevity, “CS” refers to the System Planner forms for  
the communications system and “VMS” refers to the forms for the voice  
messaging system.  
Write the Telephone Numbers in order customer desires: Telephone  
numbers in this column represent Software Mexico’s four lines.  
VMS-AA: In this column, checks for Lines 01, 02, 03, and 04 indicate that  
unanswered calls on those lines go to the Automated Attendant Service  
of the PARTNER MAIL VS system.  
System Settings:  
Receptionist answers calls during business hours? “No” on this line  
indicates that Vera will backup the voice messaging system.  
Music on Hold (#602): The blank line indicates that a Music on Hold  
device is installed.  
Ring on Transfer (#119): “NA” written in the space provided indicates  
that music or recorded messages will be played while calls are being  
transferred.  
Line Coverage:  
VMS Hunt Delay (#506): The blank line indicates that the Automated  
Attendant Service answers outside calls immediately.  
VMS Hunt Schedule (#507): The absence of any check mark indicates  
that the Automated Attendant Service picks up unanswered calls during  
business hours and after hours. (This setting is the default.)  
F-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Case Studies  
Write Name/Description: In this column, the names listed for extensions  
10 through 19 and 22 and 23 identify the extension assignments.  
Identify Telephone Attached to this Extension: Checks in these  
columns specify the type of telephone each person or location has.  
“VMS” in the Write Name/Description column and checks in the  
PARTNER MAIL VS column indicate that the PARTNER MAIL VS module  
is installed in Slot 4 of the Control Unit. The module uses extensions 32  
and 33, the last two extensions for that slot.  
“10” in the Write Transfer Return Ext. No. column indicates that when a  
call transferred by the PARTNER MAIL VS system is unanswered, it goes  
to extension 10 where Vera can answer it.  
Automatic VMS Cover: Checks in this column indicate that unanswered  
calls to extensions 10 through 19 automatically are covered by the  
Automated Attendant Service.  
Hunt Group Extensions VMS Only: In this column, check marks for  
extensions 32 and 33 satisfy the requirement that the extensions used by  
the PARTNER MAIL VS module be assigned to Hunt Group 7.  
Automatic Extension Privacy: In this column, check marks for the  
extensions used by the PARTNER MAIL VS module indicate that  
Automatic Extension Privacy is assigned to these extensions. This feature  
prevents subscribers from accidentally picking up calls that are being  
answered by the voice mail system.  
PARTNER-34D phone at extension 10: Night Service, Do Not Disturb,  
Voice Mail Messages, and Voice Mailbox Transfer.  
The Night Service button allows Vera to turn Night Service on and off.  
When Night Service is off, the Day Menu Prompt plays. When Night  
Service is on, the Night Menu Prompt plays.  
Vera can use the Do Not Disturb button to send callers to the general  
mailbox without ringing the extension first.  
The Voice Mail Messages button allows Vera to call Voice Mail Service  
with one touch.  
The Voice Mailbox Transfer button allows Vera to transfer callers directly  
to another subscriber’s mailbox without ringing the extension first.  
extension 11: Do Not Disturb, Voice Mail Messages, and Voice Mailbox  
Transfer.  
F-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Case Studies  
at extensions 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, and 19: Voice Mail Messages  
and Voice Mailbox Transfer.  
Language Mode: The check mark in the Bilingual box indicates that the  
system allows outside callers to choose between two languages.  
Primary Language: The check mark in the Latin American Spanish box  
indicates that the system answers outside calls in Spanish. The check  
mark in the U.S. English box for Secondary Language indicates that  
the system can play messages and prompts in English when callers  
press [  
] [ 1 ].  
Subscriber Name: In this column, the names listed for mailboxes 10  
through 19 indicate that all employees have mailboxes.  
English in the Mailbox Language column for extensions 13, 16, and 19  
indicates the subscribers at those extensions prefer to listen to prompts  
and messages in English when retrieving messages, recording personal  
greetings, and accessing other Voice Mail Services. The rest of the  
subscribers prefer prompts and messages in Spanish, the system’s  
Primary Language.  
Outcalling Assigned: “Yes” in this column for Jose, the system  
administrator, and the customer service representative indicates that they  
have Outcalling privileges, so that they can be notified of new voice mail  
while they are away from their offices.  
Description: ln this column, “Direct Extension Transfer” for Selector  
Code 1 and 2 indicates that when callers get the Automated Attendant  
Service they can transfer to any extension (10 to 29) by entering the  
extension number.  
“Customer Service” in the Description column and “18” in the Specific  
Ext. # or Group # for Selector Code Transfer, or Announcement #  
column for Selector Code 4 indicate that when callers get the Automated  
Attendant Service, they can press 4 to transfer to extension 18 (the  
Customer Service representative).  
“Customer Service” in the Description column and “19” in the Specific  
Ext. # or Group # for Selector Code Transfer, or Announcement #  
column for Selector Code 5 indicate that when callers get the Automated  
Attendant Service, they can press 5 to transfer to extension 19  
(the Bookkeeper).  
F-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Case Studies  
When Night Service is off and a call goes to the Automated Attendant  
Language).  
When Night Service is off and a call goes to the Automated Attendant  
Language) when he or she presses [  
] [ 1 ].  
When Night Service is on and a call goes to the Automated Attendant  
Language).  
When Night Service is on and a call goes to the Automated Attendant  
Language) when he or she presses [  
] [ ].  
1
Post-Installation Recommendations  
Since callers can leave a message in the mailbox at extension 10, Vera  
should record a general business greeting for this extension in both  
Spanish and English. The greetings should instruct callers to press [ ] [ 1 ]  
to switch to the other language.  
All employees should record a personal greeting in both Spanish and  
English. The greetings should instruct callers to press [ ] [ 1 ] to switch to  
the other language. In addition, employees change the factory-set  
password for their mailboxes.  
F-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Case Studies  
F-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PAGE  
1 of 3  
Form A: System Configuration  
Required for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Plus System.  
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
For additional instructions, see page 2.  
Configure Hardware for Hybrid Mode (PARTNER II system only):  
6.  
Customer Billing Name  
1.  
Yes  
If yes, call local telephone company—  
No  
MF Mode and FCC # AS5 USA-21312-MF-E  
2. Installation Address  
7. Features Customer is most interested in (most important first):  
Phone  
Phone  
Contact Name  
3.  
4.  
Alternate Trainee’s Name  
Phone  
Person to be Trained  
(
)
(
)
Phone  
Salesperson’s Name  
Lucent Technologies Sales Force  
Dealer:  
5. Sold by  
System Lines  
8.  
Line Coverage—You can select one per line  
Hybrid Mode  
Only:  
Write  
R if  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Write7  
Ext. No.  
VMS- 6  
Mail  
{#206} for Call  
Cover  
or  
{#208} {#208}  
3
5
4
1
2
Identify other Local  
Telephone Company  
Subscription Services  
(e.g., Repeat Call)  
Check  
if  
Write User’s Name for  
Personal or Owned Line  
or Identify Equipment for  
Dedicated Line  
VMS-  
AA  
{#206}  
Hunt  
ASA  
AA  
DXD  
Write the Telephone  
Numbers in order  
customer desires  
(list personal and  
dedicated lines last)  
Line  
Jack  
No.  
Rotary  
(Dial  
Group  
Write auxiliary  
pool 881, 882,  
883 or No Pool  
{#207}  
Caller  
ID  
ll {#205}  
{#204} (write no.)  
{#206}  
{#607}  
Pulse)  
Line  
{#201}  
Only one of these  
Service  
types per system  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
5.  
6.  
MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS column.  
Write extension number of line owner eligible for Call Coverage. Also write line owner’s name in next  
column.  
2.  
3.  
column.  
7.  
4.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
PAGE  
2 of 3  
Form A: System Configuration  
Lucent Technologies  
Required for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Plus System.  
For additional instructions, see page 3.  
Bell Labs Innovations  
lf VMS-AA is checked, specify the following:  
VMS-AA:  
System Settings. Write response on line for each item.  
9.  
VMS Hunt Delay {#506}—By default, VMS answers calls after 2 rings. Write “Del” if  
.
Receptionist answers calls during business hours? Write “Yes” or “No”  
.
calls ring 4 times before VMS answers  
Number of Lines {#104}—By default, 2 lines per 206 module and 4 lines per 400 module  
VMS Hunt Schedule {#507}—By default, VMS is on all the time. Check if Day only or  
Night only is desired:  
are assigned to each extension (or to pool 880 in PARTNER II Hybrid Mode). Write  
.
number if different from default  
Day only  
Night only  
Transfer Return Rings {#105}—By default, a transferred call rings 4 times before going to  
the transfer return extension. Write number (0-9, 0 = no return) if different from  
default  
.
(PARTNER II system only) If ASA is checked, specify the following:  
ASA:  
Automatic System Answer Delay {#110}—By default, a call rings 2 times before it is  
Outside Conference Denial {#109}—By default, a conference call can include 2 outside  
.
answered by the system. Write number (0-9) if different from default  
.
parties. Write “No” if 2 outside parties are not allowed  
Automatic System Answer Mode {#121}—By default, ASA calls are put on hold after the  
greeting plays. Check if calls should continue to ring or be disconnected:  
Call Coverage Rings {#116} (PARTNER II only)—By default, a covered call rings 2 times  
before going to the covering extention. Write number (1-9) if different from default  
.
Ring  
VMS Cover Rings {#117}—By default, a call rings 3 times before going to the user’s mailbox.  
Disconnect  
.
Write number (1-9) if different from default  
Ring on Transfer {#119}—By default, the caller hears ringing when the call is transferred.  
Write “NA” if music on hold or silence is desired  
Toll Call Prefix {#402}—By default, 0 or 1 must be dialed before the area code for a  
ASA Record/Playback (I 891)—message of up to 10 seconds that caller hears  
when the call is answered by the Automatic System Answer feature. Write  
message below and record from extension 10 or 11:  
.
.
long distance call. Write “No” if 0 or 1 is not required  
System Password {#403}—By default, no password is programmed to override dialing  
restrictions and to turn Night Service on and off. Write 4 digits if password is  
.
desired  
Music on Hold {#602}—By default, the Music on Hold jack on the processor module is  
active. Write “No” if the jack is deactivated  
.
10.  
DXD: (PARTNER II system only) If DXD is checked, specify the following:  
Direct Extension Dial Delay {#112}—By default, a call rings 2 times before it is answered  
.
by the system. Write number (0-9) if different from default  
Direct Extension Dial Record/Playback (I 892)—message of up to 20 seconds that caller  
hears when call is answered with the Direct Extension Dial feature. Write message below  
and record from extension 10 or 11:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Lucent Technologies  
PAGE  
1 of 3  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Form B1: System Extensions  
Required for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Plus System.  
For additional instructions, see page 5.  
Identify Telephone  
Attached to this Extension  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Identify Auxiliary Equipment  
Attached to this Extension  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Write  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Transfer  
Return  
Ext. No.  
{#306}  
Write in  
Other  
Equipment  
Ext.  
Jack  
No.  
Write Name/Description  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
24  
25  
32  
33  
l
l
l
l
10  
10  
IMPORTANT: A system display phone is required for programming at extension 10 or 11. Extension 10 typically is the receptionist’s extension.  
Extension 11 is recommended as a second programming extension (typically the System Manager’s extension).  
Group Assignments, VMS Only.  
Check corresponding alert extensions in next column. To prevent outside calls, remove all outside lines—see  
6.  
1.  
2.  
If checked, see Form B1, Page 3 of 3.  
If there is a mix of PARTNER-model and MLS-model phones, write “P” for PARTNER and “M” for MLS.  
7.  
8.  
3. Write “T” for touch-tone or “R” for rotary. If Call Waiting is desired, check next column.  
4.  
Must be standard phone. If immediate dialing is required, use a dedicated line. Do not assign restrictions that  
prevent dialing the outside number, Forced Account Code Entry {#307}, or groups. Also see Form D, External  
Hotline {#311}.  
Standard phone is recommended. Write extension number of corresponding alert extension or “70” for loudspeaker  
paging system in next column.  
Also write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} on this form.  
9.  
10. Write “1,” “2,” or “B” (for Both) to identify which Contact Closure the extension can activate.  
5.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
PAGE  
1 of 2  
Form B2: Customized Extension Settings  
Required if you want to change extension settings from defaults for PARTNER II System  
and PARTNER Plus System. For additional instructions, see pages 6 and 7.  
Identify  
Group Assignments  
Identify Restrictions/Permissions  
If Different than Defaults  
Identify Line Ringing {CTP} Option  
If Different than Default  
Identify Extension Settings  
if Different than Default  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Write line numbers for Line Access Restriction  
{#302}  
Write line numbers in each column to show desired  
Line Ringing options  
No Restriction  
7
1 – 4  
1 – 4  
Lines2  
Incoming  
only  
1 – 6  
NA  
1 – 8  
1 – 8  
l
Outgoing  
only  
NA  
NA  
No Access  
No Ring  
Delayed  
Immediate  
NA  
NA  
Not Assigned  
NA  
NA  
A
NA  
E
NA  
A
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
l
l
l
l
l
l
24  
25  
32  
33  
Assignments  
1.  
2.  
Write S for Spanish or F for French.  
Use Line Assignment {#301} to remove lines from or assign lines to exten-  
sions.  
Write group number (1–4).  
7. Write group number (1–4). If a loudspeaker is connected and Simultaneous Paging is desired,  
Write group number (1–6).  
6.  
=
Default  
= Assigned or Active  
English  
A
=
E
3. Write IN for Inside Only or LOC for Local Only to indicate restrictions for all  
8.  
= Not Assigned or Not Active  
= No Restriction  
NA  
NR  
{CTP}  
outgoing calls onall lines.  
Write list number (1–8). Also see Form D, Disallowed Phone Number Lists  
{#404}.  
4.  
=
Centralized Telephone Programming  
5. Write list number (1–8). Also see Form D, Allowed Phone Number Lists {#407}.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Lucent Technologies  
PAGE  
1 of 8  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Form C1: PARTNER-34D Phone  
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.  
For additional instructions, see pages 8 through 13.  
Check Desired Features  
Also write in extension or group number  
NightSvc  
OCR  
SAMPLE  
Night Service Button {#503}  
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114}  
Wake Up Service Button {#115}  
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)  
1
Template Instructions  
If desired, write in line number, dial code feature, or auto dial number  
Wake  
ID-Inspect  
ID-Name  
DND  
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction  
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)  
Do Not Disturb (F 01)  
Priv  
Privacy (F 07)  
VMSCover  
VIOB  
VMS Cover (F 15)  
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)  
Account Code Entry (F 12)2  
ACE  
Background Music (F 19) 2  
Music  
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)2,4  
CF-XX XX  
3
Park  
Requires  
Auto Dial  
button for  
each  
1.  
2.  
Call Park (I XX)  
Pickup-XX  
Call Pickup (I 6 XX)  
Drop  
CC1  
Conference Drop (F 06)  
extension.  
2
Contact Closure 1 (F 41)  
Button with  
lights is  
recom-  
mended, but  
not required.  
Extension  
number can  
be pro-  
grammed  
as Auto Dial  
button.  
2
CC2  
Contact Closure 2 (F 42)  
DLPA  
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)  
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)  
Exclusive Hold (F 02)  
DLPI  
ExHold  
FAX-XX  
GCall-g  
Hunt-g  
3.  
2
Fax Management (I XX)  
Group Calling-Ring/Page (I 7 G or  
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or  
Group Pickup (I 66 G)  
I
*7 G)  
I
*77 G)  
P/U Grp-g  
Ext-XX  
LNR  
4. You can  
program the  
Intercom Autodial(I XX or  
*XX) 2  
I
origination  
extension  
only or both  
the  
Last Number Redial (F 05)  
Loudspk  
MS-XX  
MsgOff-XX  
Loudspeaker Paging (I 70)  
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 2  
origination  
5
and  
destination  
extension.  
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)  
5
MsgOn-XX  
Message Light On (F 09 XX)  
5.  
Recall  
SNR  
You can  
Recall (F 03)  
program the  
Intercom  
Intercom  
Save Number Redial (F 04)  
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)  
Station Lock (F 21) 2  
extension  
number.  
SPage  
Ext.  
Lock  
TT-EN  
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)  
VMMsgs-777  
VMBox  
Voice Mail Messages Button(I 777)  
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)  
Specify Automatic Line Selection:  
Identify extensions programmed as shown:  
F=  
Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Lucent Technologies  
Bell Labs Innovations  
PAGE  
3 of 8  
Form C3: PARTNER-18/18D Phone  
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.  
For additional instructions, see pages 8 through 13.  
Check Desired Features  
Also write in extension or group number  
NightSvc  
OCR  
SAMPLE  
Night Service Button {#503}  
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114}  
Wake Up Service Button {#115}  
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)  
Template Instructions  
1
If desired, write in line number, dial code feature, or auto dial number  
Wake  
ID-Inspect  
ID-Name  
DND  
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction  
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)  
Do Not Disturb (F 01)  
Priv  
Privacy (F 07)  
VMSCover  
VIOB  
VMS Cover (F 15)  
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)  
Account Code Entry (F 12)2  
PARTNER-18D only  
ACE  
Background Music (F 19)2  
Music  
2,4  
CF-XX XX  
Park  
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)  
3
Call Park (I XX)  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Requires  
Auto Dial  
button for  
each  
Pickup-XX  
Drop  
Call Pickup(I 6 XX)  
Conference Drop (F 06)  
Contact Closure 1 (F 41) 2  
extension.  
CC1  
Button with  
lights is  
recom-  
mended, but  
not required.  
Extension  
number can  
be pro-  
2
CC2  
DLPA  
DLPI  
Contact Closure 2 (F 42)  
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)  
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)  
Exclusive Hold (F 02)  
ExHold  
FAX-XX  
GCall-g  
Hunt-g  
2
Fax Management (I XX)  
Group Calling-Ring/Page (I 7 G or  
I
*7 G)  
grammed  
as Auto Dial  
button.  
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or  
I
*77 G)  
P/U Grp-g  
Ext-XX  
Group Pickup (I 66 G)  
4.  
You can  
2
Intercom Autodial (I XX or  
I
*XX)  
program the  
origination  
extension  
only or both  
the  
LNR  
Loudspk  
Last Number Redial (F 05)  
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)  
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 2  
MS-XX  
origination  
and  
Intercom  
Intercom  
5
MsgOff-XX  
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)  
destination  
extension.  
You can  
program the  
extension  
number.  
Message Light On (F 09 XX) 5  
MsgOn-XX  
Ext.  
Recall  
SNR  
SPage  
Recall (F 03)  
5.  
Save Number Redial (F 04)  
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)  
2
Lock  
TT-EN  
Station Lock (F 21)  
Specify Automatic Line Selection:  
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)  
Identify extensions programmed as shown:  
VMMsgs-777  
VMBox  
Voice Mail Messages Button(I 777)  
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)  
F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Lucent Technologies  
PAGE  
Bell Labs Innovations  
Form C3: PARTNER-18/18D Phone  
3 of 8  
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.  
For additional instructions, see pages 8 through 13.  
Check Desired Features  
Also write in extension or group number  
Night Service Button {#503}  
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114}  
Wake Up Service Button {#115}  
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)  
NightSvc  
OCR  
SAMPLE  
1
Template Instructions  
Wake  
If desired, write in line number, dial code feature, or auto dial number  
ID-Inspect  
ID-Name  
DND  
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction  
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)  
Do Not Disturb (F 01)  
Privacy (F 07)  
Priv  
VMSCover  
VIOB  
VMS Cover (F 15)  
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)  
Account Code Entry (F 12)2  
Background Music (F 19) 2  
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)2,4  
Call Park(I XX) 3  
ACE  
PARTNER-18D only  
Music  
CF-XX XX  
Park  
1. Requires  
Auto Dial  
button for  
each  
Pickup-XX  
Drop  
Call Pickup(I 6 XX)  
Conference Drop (F 06)  
extension.  
2
Contact Closure 1 (F 41)  
CC1  
2. Button with  
2
CC2  
Contact Closure 2 (F 42)  
lights is  
recom-  
mended, but  
not required.  
DLPA  
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)  
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)  
Exclusive Hold (F 02)  
DLPI  
Extension  
number can  
3.  
ExHold  
FAX-XX  
GCall-g  
Hunt-g  
P/U Grp-g  
Ext-XX  
LNR  
Fax Management(I XX) 2  
be pro-  
grammed  
as Auto Dial  
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or  
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or  
Group Pickup (I 66 G)  
I
*7 G)  
I
*77 G)  
button.  
4. You can  
2
program the  
Intercom Autodial (I XX or  
Last Number Redial (F 05)  
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)  
I
*XX)  
origination  
extension  
only or both  
Loudspk  
MS-XX  
MsgOff-XX  
MsgOn-XX  
Recall  
SNR  
the  
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 2  
origination  
5
and  
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)  
Intercom  
Intercom  
destination  
extension.  
5
Message Light On (F 09 XX)  
Ext.  
Recall (F 03)  
5.  
You can  
program the  
extension  
Save Number Redial (F 04)  
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)  
Station Lock (F 21)2  
SPage  
Lock  
number.  
Specify Automatic Line Selection:  
TT-EN  
VMMsgs-777  
VMBox  
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)  
Voice Mail Messages Button(I 777)  
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)  
Identify extensions programmed as shown:  
Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom buttom XX = Extension  
F =  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Form 1: Language  
Language Mode:  
Monolingual  
Bilingual  
Monolingual Mode–System Language:  
U.S. English ✔  
U.K. English  
Latin American Spanish  
Canadian French  
Other–specifiy  
Bilingual Mode–Primary Language:  
U.S. English ✔  
U.K. English  
Latin American Spanish  
Canadian French  
Other–specify  
Billingual Mode–Secondary Language:  
U.S. English  
U.K. English  
Latin American Spanish ✔  
Canadian French  
Other–specify  
Completing this Form  
General Information  
Check “Billingual” if the Language Mode  
Language Mode  
Factory defaults are identified by the  
symbol.  
should be set to Bilingual. If you check Bilingual, also see  
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, make sure you record  
the Automated Attendant Day Menu Prompts and Night Menu  
Prompts and Announcements (if any) in both the Primary and  
Secondary Languages. AIso, subscribers can record two  
personal greetings—one in the Primary Language and another  
in the Secondary Language.  
below; if not, see  
.
Check the Primary  
Monolingual Mode—System Language  
language desired if different from the default.  
Check the Primary  
Billingual Mode—Primary Language  
Language desired if different from the default.  
Subscribers can have a Mailbox Language different from the  
languages selected here. Mailbox Language is specified on  
Billingual Mode—Secondary Language  
Check the  
Secondary Language desired if different from the default.  
Programming Language  
To program the Language Mode, as well as the System  
Language in Monolingual Mode or the Primary and Secondary  
Languages in Bilingual Mode, dial [ 1 ] from the Programming  
Main Menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Form 2: Mailbox Assignments  
Mailbox  
Mailbox  
Language  
Outcalling  
Assigned  
Subscriber Name  
Mailbox  
Mailbox  
Language  
Outcalling  
Assigned  
Subscriber Name  
10 ✔  
(26  
(27  
(28  
(29  
(30  
)
)
)
)
)
(11 )  
(12 )  
(13 )  
(14 )  
(15 )  
(16 )  
(31  
(32  
(33  
(34  
)
)
)
)
(17  
)
(18 )  
(19 )  
(20 )  
(35  
(36  
(37  
(38  
(39  
(40  
)
)
)
)
)
)
(21 )  
(22 )  
(23 )  
(24 )  
(25 )  
General Information  
Completing this Form  
Mailbox To assign a mailbox to an extension other than the  
factory default, cross out the factory default and write in the  
extension to be used.  
Factory defaults are identified by the  
symbol.  
The system comes with a predetermined number of mailboxes.  
The optional Mailbox Expansion Card doubles the capacity.  
For PARTNER PLUS, use an extension number from 11-33.  
Mailbox 10 is reserved for the receptionist at extension 10 and  
cannot be changed.  
For PARTNER Advanced Communications System, use an  
extension number from 11-41.  
Mailbox 10 provides 60 minutes of message recording time. All  
other mailboxes provide 20 minutes of message recording time.  
For PARTNER II or PARTNER 48, use an extension number  
from 11-57.  
For system security, mailboxes should be deleted where they  
are not needed; for example, mailboxes should be deleted for  
extensions in use by auxiliary equipment (such as a fax or  
doorphone) and the extensions assigned to the VMS Hunt  
Group.  
To mark an unused mailbox for deletion without assigning an  
extension, cross out the factory default.  
Subscriber Name For every mailbox in use, write the name of  
the mailbox subscriber.  
Guest mailboxes can be created for users who don’t have their  
own phone by assigning an unused extension number as the  
mailbox number. Unused extension numbers include: 1) vacant  
extension jacks in installed 206 modules and 2) extensions in  
your DIAL plan higher than the last extension jack in the last  
more information.  
Mailbox Language For each mailbox that requires a language  
different from the System Language or Primary Language  
Outcalling Assigned For each mailbox in use, indicate  
whether Outcalling is assigned.  
Programming Mailboxes  
You can change a mailbox assignment by deleting an existing  
mailbox and creating a new one.  
To program mailboxes, dial [ 4 ] from the Programming Main menu.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Form 3: Menu Definition  
Required for Automated Attendant Service  
Description  
Range of Extensions  
for Direct Extension  
Transfer  
Selector  
Code  
Ext. # or Group # for  
Selector Code Transfer,  
or Announcement #  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(10–19  
(20–29  
(30–39  
)
)
)
(71–74, 771–776  
)
Transfer to Mailbox 10  
General Information  
Completing this Form  
Factory defaults are identified by the  
symbol.  
For Direct Extension Transfer...  
Description Write “Direct Extension Transfer.”  
This Menu Definition applies to both the Day and Night Menu  
prompts.  
Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer  
Leave the factory default.  
The Selector Code is the first digit dialed by the caller in  
response to the menu prompts.  
Ext. # or Group # for Selector Code Transfer ...Leave blank.  
In Direct Extension Transfer, Selector Codes 1–5 and 7  
represent the first digit for a range of extensions. These Selector  
Codes let callers dial extension numbers directly.  
For Selector Extension Transfer...  
Write the name of the person or group to receive  
Description  
the transfer.  
In Selector Code Transfer, Selector Codes 1–9 represent a  
specific extension, Group Calling number, (if available) or Hunt  
Group number to which the caller will be transferred. Use the  
following values:  
Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer  
Cross out the factory default if you want the caller to dial the  
corresponding Selector Code to transfer to the extension,  
announcement, or group identified in  
below.  
10–33 or 771–776  
PARTNER Plus:  
PARTNER Advanced:  
PARTNER II:  
Ext. #, or Group # for Selector Code Transfer...Write the  
extension, announcement, or group number to receive the  
transfer.  
11–41, 71–74, or 771–776  
10–57, 71–74, or 771–776  
10–57, 71, or 771–776  
PARTNER 48:  
For Announcement...  
Selector Code Transfer lets callers dial a single digit to reach a  
single extension or group, such as the VP of Sales at extension 37  
or the order processing operators assigned to Hunt Group 774.  
Description  
Write “Announcement.”  
Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer  
Cross out the factory default if you want the caller to dial the  
corresponding Selector Code to hear the Announcement  
Selector Code 9 lets callers transfer directly to mailbox 10  
(receptionist mailbox) where they can leave a message.  
identified in  
below.  
The Description and Selector Code number from this form will  
be used to complete the Day and Night Menu Prompts (Forms  
Write the Announcement number (1 or 2).  
Announcement #  
For Announcement entries in Description, Selector Code, and  
Announcement # of this form will be used to complete Forms  
3A and 3B.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Form 4: Day Menu Prompt—  
System Language or Primary Language  
Required if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only or Always  
Completing this Form  
General Information  
Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call  
during normal business hours, including the instructions to the  
caller for selecting menu options.  
The Day Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt  
Schedule is set to Day Only or Always and Night Service is off.  
The Day Menu Prompt and the Night Menu Prompt use the  
same Menu Definition.  
Suggested options include:  
The Day Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of  
menu options.  
“Remain on the line for assistance.”  
“Dial 0 for assistance.”  
The welcome should introduce the company. For example,  
“To hear this menu again, dial * 4.”  
“Thank you for calling the Any Travel Agency”  
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, let callers know they can  
Recording the Day Menu Prompt  
switch the language they hear while on the call. For example,  
“Para español, marque * 1.”  
To record the Day Menu Prompt, dial [ 3 ] from the Programming  
The menu options should contain instructions that correspond  
Main Menu.  
If callers can dial extension numbers (Direct Extension  
Transfer), the prompt should instruct callers to dial the  
extension number. For example, “If you know the extension  
of the person you want to reach, dial it now.”  
If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or  
group (Selector Code Transfer), the prompt should provide  
instructions such as “To speak to someone in sales, press 6.”  
If callers can can choose an Announcement, include that  
information. For example, “For directions to our office, press 4.”  
It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5  
or less to avoid confusing the caller.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Form 4A: Day Menu Prompt—Secondary Language  
Required for Bilingual Mode only if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only or Always  
Completing this Form  
General Information  
Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call  
during normal business hours, including the instructions to the  
caller for selecting menu options.  
The Day Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt  
Schedule is set to Day Only or Always and Night Service is off.  
The Day Menu Prompt and the Night Menu Prompt use the  
same Menu Definition.  
Suggested options include:  
The Day Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of  
menu options.  
“Remain on the line for assistance.”  
“Dial 0 for assistance.”  
The welcome should introduce the company. For example,  
“Thank you for calling the Any Travel Agency”  
“To hear this menu again, dial * 4.”  
Let callers know they can switch back to the Primary Language.  
For example, “For English, press * 1.”  
Recording the Day Menu Prompt  
The menu options should contain instructions that correspond  
To record the Day Menu Prompt, dial [ 3 ] from the Programming  
Main Menu.  
If callers can dial extension numbers (Direct Extension  
Transfer), the prompt should instruct callers to dial the  
extension number. For example, “If you know the extension  
of the person you want to reach, dial it now.”  
If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or  
group (Selector Code Transfer), the prompt should provide  
instructions such as “To speak to someone in sales, press 6.”  
If callers can can choose an Announcement, include that  
information. For example, “For directions to our office, press 4.”  
It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5  
or less to avoid confusing the caller.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Form 5: Night Menu Prompt—  
System Language or Primary Language  
Required if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Night Only or Always  
If Selector Code 9 is left as the default, the prompt should  
instruct callers to press 9 to leave a message with the  
receptionist.  
General Information  
The Night Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt  
Schedule is set to Night Only or Always and Night Service is  
on. The Night Menu Prompt and the Day Menu Prompt use the  
same Menu Definition.  
It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5  
or less to avoid confusing the caller.  
The Night Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of  
Completing this Form  
menu options.  
Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call  
after normal business hours, including instructions to the caller for  
selecting menu options.  
The welcome should introduce the company. For example,  
“You have reached the Any Travel Agency. Our hours are 9 AM  
to 5 PM, Monday through Friday.”  
Suggested options include:  
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, let callers know they can  
switch the language they hear while on the call. For example,  
“Dial 9 or remain on the line to leave a message.”  
“To hear this menu again, dial * 4.”  
“Para español, marque * 1.”  
The menu options should contain instructions that correspond  
Recording the Night Menu Prompt  
If callers can dial extension numbers (Direct Extension  
Transfer), the prompt should instruct callers to dial the  
extension number. For example, “If you know the extension  
of the person you want to reach, dial it now and leave a  
message.”  
To record the Night Menu Prompt, dial [ 3 ] from the  
Programming Main Menu.  
If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or  
group (Selector Code Transfer), the prompt should provide  
instructions such as “To leave a message for Pat, press 6.”  
Keep in mind that there are no group mailboxes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Form 5A: Night Menu Prompt—Secondary Language  
Required for Bilingual Mode only if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Night Only or Always  
If Selector Code 9 is left as the default, the prompt should  
General Information  
instruct callers to press 9 to leave a message with the  
receptionist.  
The Night Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt  
Schedule is set to Night Only or Always and Night Service is  
on. The Night Menu Prompt and the Day Menu Prompt use the  
same Menu Definition.  
It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5  
or less to avoid confusing the caller.  
The Night Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of  
menu options.  
Completing this Form  
Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call  
after normal business hours, including instructions to the caller for  
selecting menu options.  
The welcome should introduce the company. For example,  
“You have reached the Any Travel Agency. Our hours are 9 AM  
to 5 PM, Monday through Friday.”  
Suggested options include:  
Let callers know they can switch back to the Primary Language.  
For example, “For English, press * 1.”  
“Dial 9 or remain on the line to leave a message.”  
“To hear this menu again, dial * 4.”  
The menu options should contain instructions that correspond  
If callers can dial extension numbers (Direct Extension  
Transfer), the prompt should instruct callers to dial the  
extension number. For example, “If you know the extension  
of the person you want to reach, dial it now and leave a  
message.”  
Recording the Night Menu Prompt  
To record the Night Menu Prompt, dial [ 3 ] from the  
Programming Main Menu.  
If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or  
group (Selector Code Transfer), the prompt should provide  
instructions such as “To leave a message for Pat, press 6.”  
Keep in mind that there are no group mailboxes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Glossary  
C
A
Call Answer Service  
Announcement  
A component of the voice messaging system that lets  
callers leave a message at an unanswered extension or  
transfer to another extension.  
An informative message that provides frequently  
requested information. It is recorded by the System  
Manager and plays to callers who select it from an  
Automated Attendant’s Menu.  
Calling Group  
A group of extensions that can be called simultaneously  
by dialing a group calling code. This feature may not be  
available on your system; check your Programming and  
Use guide. See also Hunt Group.  
Auto Dial button  
A programmable button on a system phone that lets the  
user dial a series of digits simply by pressing that button.  
An Auto Dial button can be used to dial the voice  
messaging system with one touch. See also  
Centralized Telephone Programming  
A method of telephone programming that lets you  
program individual extensions in the system from a  
system display phone at extension 10 (or 11 if available).  
Centralized Telephone Programming is an alternative to  
Extension Programming.  
Automated Attendant Service  
A component of the voice messaging system that  
consists of a menu definition and prompt. It provides  
outside callers with options enabling them to reach an  
extension, a Hunt Group, or (for PARTNER II systems) a  
Calling Group, by pressing a single digit or by dialing an  
extension or group number.  
Control Unit  
Hardware that connects lines coming into the building to  
the extensions in the system and also provides system  
features.  
Auxiliary equipment  
Telecommunications equipment (other than system  
phones) that can be connected to the control unit.  
Auxiliary equipment includes industry standard devices  
that can connect directly to the public telephone network  
(such as doorphones or fax machines) as well as devices  
that require the interface provided by the control unit  
(such as a loudspeaker paging system).  
Communications system  
The control unit and system phones, plus all other  
telecommunications devices that are connected to  
the control unit. Certain releases of PARTNER Plus,  
PARTNER II, PARTNER 48, and PARTNER Advanced  
communications systems can be used with the PARTNER  
MAIL VS system.  
Automatic VMS Cover  
A communications system feature that provides voice  
mail coverage for a subscriber’s unanswered transferred  
and intercom calls.  
D
Delayed Call Handling  
A communications system feature that allows the  
communications system to send incoming outside calls to  
the Automated Attendant Service if the receptionist does  
not answer by the third ring. See also Immediate Call  
B
Bilingual Mode  
A Language Mode setting that allows messages and  
prompts to be played in either of two languages. See  
Dial plan  
The range of extensions provided for a specific system.  
The PARTNER Plus system includes extensions 10-33;  
the PARTNER ACS includes extensions 10-41; the  
PARTNER II and PARTNER 48 systems include  
extensions 10-57.  
Do Not Disturb  
A communications system feature that can be used in  
conjunction with automatic or manual voice coverage to  
send callers immediately to a subscriber’s mailbox rather  
than ringing the extension first.  
GL-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Glossary  
E
H
Extension  
Hunt Group  
An endpoint in the system (numbered 10-33 for PARTNER  
A group of extensions that takes incoming or transferred  
Plus system; 10-41 for PARTNER ACS; 10-57 for  
PARTNER II and PARTNER 48 systems) that connects  
telephones or standard devices, which can be dialed  
using the Intercom button. See also Extension number  
calls in round-robin fashion. Calls to the Hunt Group are  
directed to the first available extension in the group, with  
the extension that answered most recently being the last  
one in the hunt order. See also Calling Group and VMS  
Extension coverage  
A feature that allows callers to leave messages or transfer  
to another extension when the extension called is busy or  
not answered, and Automatic VMS Cover is on.  
I
Extension jack  
Immediate Call Handling  
The six jacks on the lower half of a 206 module that allow  
you to connect phones (or other telecommunications  
devices) to the control unit.  
A communications system feature that allows the  
Automated Attendant Service to answer every incoming  
outside call on specified lines and play the Automated  
Attendant Service day or night menu. See also Delayed  
Extension Line Coverage  
A voice messaging system feature that lets a subscriber’s  
extension (mailbox) be assigned as the owner of a  
covered line. When a call comes in on the covered line,  
the system routes the caller to the mailbox specified as  
the line owner if the call is not answered. See also Line  
Coverage Extension.  
Industry-standard device  
A telephone or other telecommunications device that can  
be connected directly to the public telephone network.  
Intercom call  
Extension number  
A call that is made to another system extension.  
The number assigned to each extension jack on a 206  
module. Extension jack numbers run consecutively from  
10 through 33 for the PARTNER Plus system, 10 through  
41 for the PARTNER ACS, and 10 through 57 for the  
PARTNER II and PARTNER 48 systems. They are used  
for intercom calling.  
L
Language Mode  
Extension Programming  
Line Coverage Extension  
A method of telephone programming that lets users  
program their own extensions from their system phones.  
A communications system feature that directs incoming  
calls on a specific line to a specific extension.  
Line jack  
The location on 206 and 400 modules that allow you to  
connect outside lines to the control unit.  
G
Line number  
The number assigned to each line jack on a 206 or 400  
module. Line jack numbers run consecutively from 01  
through 12 (for a PARTNER Plus system), 01 through 15  
(for a PARTNER ACS), or from 01 through 24 (for  
PARTNER II and PARTNER 48 systems).  
Group Call Distribution  
A communications system feature that directs incoming  
calls on specified lines to a Hunt Group for either  
Automated Attendant Service or Line Coverage. See also  
Line Ownership  
A voice messaging system feature that lets you program  
VMS Line Coverage. See also Group Call Distribution and  
G L-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Glossary  
P
M
Primary Language  
M ailb ox  
In Bilingual Mode, the language callers initially hear when  
they call in to the voice messaging system. See also  
Secondary Language.  
A storage area for messages associated with a system  
subscriber.  
Mailbox Language  
Programmable button  
The language assigned to a subscriber’s mailbox.  
A system phone button that does not have a line  
assigned; it can be set up to dial a number or access a  
feature.  
Mailbox Password  
A code of up to four digits that subscribers enter to log in  
to the voice messaging system. A password is used to  
keep messages confidential.  
Programming extension  
An extension from which you can program the  
communications system. It can be either extension 10 (or  
11 if available).  
Menu Definition  
A voice messaging system feature that lets you customize  
the Automated Attendant Service transfer options  
available to outside callers.  
Menu Prompt  
The customized day or night message that an outside  
caller hears after the Automated Attendant Service  
answers the call.  
R
Receptionist  
Monolingual Mode  
The person who primarily is responsible for answering  
outside calls. This is the person at extension 10.  
A Language Mode setting that allows messages and  
prompts to be played in one of several available  
languages. See also Bilingual Mode.  
Music On Hold system  
Equipment that lets you play recorded music or  
messages to callers who are placed on hold. A music-  
on-hold audio source must be connected to the  
processor module in the control unit.  
S
Secondary Language  
In Bilingual Mode, the language callers have the option of  
hearing when they call in to the voice messaging system.  
See also Primary Language.  
Selector Code  
N
A single digit (1-9) used to define transfer options for  
outside callers on the Automated Attendant Service  
menu. See also Menu Definition and Menu Prompt.  
Night Service  
A communications system feature that is used in  
conjunction with Automated Attendant Service to activate  
the Night Menu Prompt.  
Send All Calls  
A communications system feature that lets subscribers  
use Do Not Disturb to send callers immediately to their  
mailbox (calls do not ring the extension first) provided  
voice mail coverage is on at the extension.  
Standard phone  
O
An industry-standard touch-tone or rotary phone such as  
you might have in your home. Some standard phones  
include special feature buttons for frequently used calling  
functions. See also Industry-standard device.  
On-touch Intercom Calling button  
Outcalling  
Subscriber  
A user who is assigned a mailbox.  
System Language  
A voice messaging system feature that, when assigned to  
a subscriber, allows the subscriber to have the system  
call a pager or telephone number according to a  
predefined schedule whenever a new message is  
received in the subscriber’s voice mailbox.  
In Monolingual Mode, the language callers hears when  
they call in to the voice messaging system.  
GL-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Glossary  
System Manager  
VMS Hunt Schedule  
The person responsible for managing both the  
communications and voice messaging systems.  
System phone  
A communications system feature that allows you to set  
the communications system to route outside calls to the  
Automated Attendant Service always, only when the Night  
Service button at the receptionist’s extension is on, or  
only when the Night Service button is off.  
A telephone that is specifically designed for use with  
PARTNER systems. Models include the PARTNER-34D,  
PARTNER-18D, PARTNER-18, PARTNER-6, MLS-34D,  
MLS-18D, MLS-12, MLS-12D, MLS-6, MDC 9000, and  
MDW 9000 phones.  
VMS Line Coverage  
A voice messaging system feature that lets the System  
Manager associate a personal line with a specific  
subscriber’s mailbox for voice mail coverage. See also  
System programming  
Procedures that allow you to customize the  
communications system settings. System programming  
requires a system display phone and is done from  
extension 10 (or 11 if available).  
Voice Mail Service  
A component of the voice messaging system that allows  
subscribers to listen to and delete messages, record  
personal greetings, and change their passwords. It also  
allows the System Manager to program the voice  
messaging system.  
T
Voice Mailbox  
Telephone programming  
Voice Mailbox Transfer button  
A button on a system phone that enables the user to  
transfer a call directly to a subscriber’s mailbox.  
Customizes extensions to meet the needs of individual  
users, including the assignment of features to  
programmable buttons. Telephone Programming can be  
done either centrally or from the user’s own extension.  
Voice messaging system (VMS)  
An optional device that automates call handling: answers  
calls and routes them to caller designated extension;  
permits callers to leave messages at unanswered  
extensions; and allows subscribers to retrieve their  
Tutor  
A voice messaging system feature that lets any  
communications system user access and listen to  
information about their phone and commonly-used  
communications system features.  
206 module  
A system module that contains jacks for connecting up to  
two outside lines and up to six extensions.  
V
VMS Cover button  
A button on a system phone that allows a subscriber to  
turn voice mail coverage on and off manually at that  
extension. See also Automatic VMS Cover.  
VMS Hunt Delay  
A communications system feature that lets you set the  
Automated Attendant to handle calls using either  
Immediate Call Handling or Delayed Call Handling. See  
VMS Hunt Group  
Hunt Group 7, reserved by the communications system to  
identify extensions associated with the voice messaging  
system hardware. See also VMS Hunt Delay and VMS  
Hunt Schedule.  
G L-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Index  
Communications system programming  
A
Automated Attendant Announcement  
Automated Attendant Service  
D
Day Menu Prompt  
B
Button programming  
E
C
Extension coverage  
Extensions  
Extensions coverage  
Call Answer Service  
Call handling  
Changing language  
CO Line Coverage  
F
IN-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
G
M
Group Call Distribution  
Mailbox Expansion Card  
Mailboxes  
Guest mailboxes  
Menu definition  
H
I
Installation  
N
K
Night Menu Prompt  
Night Service  
L
Line Ownership  
Login  
O
Outcalling  
Outcalling privileges  
IN -2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
P
T
PARTNER MAIL VS  
Transfer  
Password  
Transfer Return Extension  
Planning forms  
Problems  
Programming  
V
Programming Main Menu  
VMS extensions  
VMS Hunt Delay  
VMS Hunt Schedule  
R
Receptionist  
Voice mail coverage  
Reinitializing  
Voice Mail Service  
Voice Mailbox Transfer  
Voice messaging system  
S
System Manager  
Voice messaging system programming  
IN-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 7 7 )  
Call Voice Mail Service (Press  
Enter Login (Press  
Intercom  
)
9 9 #  
Enter Mailbox Password  
#
)
1 2 3 4  
for factory default and  
(Press  
Select Programming Main Menu  
)
(Press  
9
Line  
Ownership  
(Press[ 6 ])  
Mailboxes  
(Press[ 4 ])  
Automated  
Attendant  
(Press[ 3 ])  
Language  
(Press[ 1 ])  
Mailbox Number  
(Enter Number  
Scan Line  
Ownership  
(Press[ 2 ])  
Language  
Mode  
(Press[ 1 ])  
Day Menu  
(Press[ 1 ])  
+[ # ])  
Assign Line  
Ownership  
(Press[ 4 ])  
Monolingual  
Mode  
Yes  
No  
Mailbox  
Number  
Exists?  
Bilingual  
Mode?  
No  
Yes  
(Press[ 1 ])  
Modify Line  
Ownership  
(Press[ 6 ])  
Play Primary  
Day Prompt  
(Press[ 2 ][ 1 ][ 1 ])  
Play Day  
Prompt  
(Press[ 2 ][ 1 ])  
Bilingual  
Mode  
(Press[ 2 ])  
Create  
Mailbox  
(Press[ 4 ])  
Reinitialize  
Password  
(Press[ 3 ])  
Delete Line  
Ownership  
Play Secondary  
Day Prompt  
(Press[ 2 ][ 1 ][ 2 ])  
Play Menu  
System  
Language  
(Press[ 2 ])  
Definition  
&
Annc.  
Reinitialize  
Mailbox  
(Press[ ][ 3 ])  
*
(Press[ 2 ][ 2 ][ 1 ])  
(Press[ 4 ])  
Play Menu  
Definition & Annc.  
(Press[ 2 ][ 2 ])  
Modify Menu  
Definition and/or  
Day Prompt  
No  
Yes  
Bilingual  
Mode?  
Administer  
Outcalling  
(Press[ 5 ])  
System Reset–  
Save All  
(Press[ 6 ])  
(Press  
[ 9 ][ 8 ][ 9 ][ 7 ][ 3 ][ 7 ][ 3 ][ 8 ])  
Modify Menu  
Definition and/or  
Primary Day Prompt  
(Press[ 6 ])  
Play System  
Language  
(Press[ 2 ])  
Play Primary  
Language  
(Press[ 1 ][ 2 ])  
Program Mailbox  
Language  
(Press[ 6 ])  
Modify System  
Language  
(Press[ 6 ])  
Play Secondary  
Language  
(Press[ 2 ][ 2 ])  
Delete  
Mailbox  
Night Menu  
(Press[ 2 ])  
(Press[ ][ 3 ])  
*
Modify Primary  
Language  
(Prees[ 1 ][ 6 ])  
Yes  
No  
Bilingual  
Mode?  
Modify Secondary  
Language  
Play Primary  
Night Prompt  
(Press[ 2 ][ 1 ][ 1 ])  
Play  
Night Prompt  
(Press[ 2 ][ 1 ])  
(Press[ 2 ][ 6 ])  
Modify  
Night Prompt  
(Press[ 6 ])  
Play Secondary  
Night Prompt  
(Press[ 2 ][ 1 ][ 2 ])  
Modify Primary  
Night Prompt  
(Press[ 6 ][ 1 ])  
Modify Secondary  
Night Prompt  
(Press[ 6 ][ 2 ])  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming Flowchart  
A
START  
Yes  
Modify the Language Mode.  
system should be programmed for  
Bilingual Mode.  
extensions for the PARTNER MAIL VS  
system.  
V1  
No  
different Primary Language is  
specified. If so, modify the Primary  
different System Language is specified.  
If so, modify the System Language.  
V 2  
Use Hunt Group Extensions (#505) to  
assign the PARTNER MAIL VS  
extensions to Hunt Group 7.  
C1  
Language.  
V 3  
different Secondary Language is  
specified. If so, modify the Secondary  
Use Transfer Return Extension  
(#306)* to specify extension 10 as the  
transfer return extension for each of  
the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions.  
C 2  
Go To B  
Language.  
V3  
Go To B  
Go To A  
Key:  
Refers to the System Planner  
forms for the  
CS –  
Communications System.  
Refers to the forms for the  
Voice Messaging System.  
Refers to the quick reference  
programming procedure for  
the Communications System.  
VMS –  
C# –  
Refers to a quick reference  
V# –  
programming procedure for  
the Voice Messaging System.  
Note: C#/V# procedures follow this  
flowchart.  
* In some countries, the procedure code for Transfer Return Extension is #309. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications  
system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming Flowchart  
C
B
default mailboxes:  
Program the Menu Definition and Day  
Menu Prompt.  
Yes  
If there are extensions that do not  
Program the appropriate extension,  
announcement, or group numbers for  
Selector Code Transfer as specified  
determine if Selector Code Transfer or  
Announcement is used.  
require mailboxes, use Delete  
Mailboxes to remove the mailboxes  
from those extensions  
V17  
V 4  
Monolingual  
V 5  
If other extensions require  
Bilingual  
mailboxes, use Create Mailboxes to  
assign available mailboxes.  
V18  
Record the Announcement(s) as  
set for Bilingual Mode, also record the  
Announcement(s) in the Secondary  
see if a different Mailbox Language is  
specified for any active mailboxes. If  
V10  
Monolingual  
V11  
Bilingual  
so, modify Mailbox Language.  
V21  
No  
Yes Record the Day Menu Prompt as  
a Day Menu Prompt is used.  
set for Bilingual Mode, also record the  
Day Menu Prompt in the Secondary  
see if Outcalling is assigned for any  
active mailboxes. If so, assign  
outcalling.  
V 4  
Monolingual  
V22  
V 5  
Bilingual  
No  
Yes  
Record the Night Menu Prompt as  
Go To D  
a Night Menu Prompt is used.  
set for Bilingual Mode, also record the  
Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary  
V8  
Monolingual  
V 9  
Bilingual  
No  
REFER to the Programing and Use  
guide for the communications system  
for instructions on setting up Music On  
Hold.  
No  
Go To C  
*
A maximum of two Announcements can be recorded in Monolingual Mode. In Bilingual Mode, two Announcements can be recorded in the Primary  
Language and two Announcements can be recorded in the Secondary Language.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Programming Flowchart  
D
2, Line Coverage to see if VMS-  
AA is specified for any lines.  
Use Group Call Distribution (#206)*  
Yes to assign VMS-AA lines to Hunt  
Group 7.  
C 3  
No  
2, to check VMS Hunt Delay and  
VMS Hunt Schedule settings for  
the PARTNER MAIL VS system.  
Go To E  
Leave VMS Hunt Delay (#506) at  
factory setting (Immediate)  
Leave VMS Hunt Schedule (#507) at  
factory setting (Always)  
Program a Night Service Button  
(#503) at extension 10  
C 9  
Go To E  
Set Automatic Extension Privacy  
(#304) to Assigned for the VMS  
Yes  
Yes  
If Immediate and Always are  
checked, this site uses immediate  
call handling all the time (day and  
night).  
extensions.  
C10  
Set VMS Hunt Delay (#506) at  
Delayed  
No  
C 5  
Leave VMS Hunt Schedule (#507) at  
factory setting (Always)  
Program a Night Service Button  
Go To E  
If Delayed and Always are  
checked, this site uses delayed  
call handling all the time (day  
and night).  
(#503) at extension 10  
C 9  
Leave VMS Hunt Delay (#506) at  
factory setting (Immediate)  
No  
Set VMS Hunt Schedule (#507) to  
Yes  
If Immediate and Day Only are  
checked, this site uses immediate  
call handling only during the day.  
Day Only  
C6  
Go To E  
Program a Night Service Button  
(#503) at extension 10  
C 9  
Set Automatic Extension Privacy  
(#304) to Assigned for the VMS  
extensions.  
C10  
No  
Yes  
Set VMS Hunt Delay (#506) to  
Delayed  
Set VMS Hunt Schedule (#507)  
to Day Only  
If Delayed and Day Only are  
checked, this site uses delayed  
call handling only during the day.  
Go To E  
C 6  
C 9  
Program a Night Service  
Button (#503) at extension 10  
C10  
No  
Yes  
Leave VMS Hunt Delay (#506) at  
factory setting (Immediate)  
If Immediate and Night Only are  
checked, this site uses immediate  
call handling only during the night.  
Set VMS Hunt Schedule (#507) to  
Go To E  
Day Only  
C 6  
Program a Night Service Button  
(#503) at extension 10  
C 9  
Set Automatic Extension Privacy  
(#304) to Assigned for the VMS  
extensions.  
C10  
No  
Yes  
Set VMS Hunt Delay (#506) to  
Delayed  
If Delayed and Night Only are  
checked, this site uses delayed  
call handling only during the night.  
C 5  
C6  
C9  
Go To E  
Set VMS Hunt Schedule (#507)  
to Night Only  
Program a Night Service  
*
In some countries, the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is #205. Check  
the Programming and Use guide for the communications system.  
Button (#503) at extension 10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E
Yes  
Coverage to see if any lines are  
Use Group Call Distribution (#206)* to  
program the personal lines as VMS  
checked off in the VMS-Mail column.  
Line Coverage for Hunt Group 7.  
C3  
D to assign Line Ownership to  
specified lines.  
V24  
No  
Yes  
Use Line Coverage Extension (#208)  
to program line ownership for those  
Coverage to see if any extension  
numbers are specified in the VMS-  
Mail column.  
extensions.  
C 4  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Automatic VMS Cover (#310) is  
assigned for any extensions.  
Assign Automatic VMS Cover (#310)  
to those extensions.  
C 7  
No  
Use VMS Cover Rings (#117) to  
see if a different number of VMS  
Cover Rings (#117)is specified.  
program the number of rings.  
C 8  
No  
Program a VMS Cover button on  
the system phone at those  
VMS Cover button is specified for any  
extensions.  
extensions.  
C11  
No  
Program a Do Not Disturb button on  
the system phone at each of those  
Do Not Disturb button is specified for  
any extensions.  
extensions.  
C12  
No  
Program a Voice Mailbox Transfer  
button on the system phone at those  
Voice Mailbox Transfer button is  
specified for any extensions.  
extensions.  
C13  
No  
Program a Voice Mail Messages  
button on all subscribers’ system  
phones for one-touch access to the  
voice messaging system.  
C14  
*
In some countries, the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is #205. Check the  
Programming and Use guide for the communications system.  
No  
VMS Cover Rings (#117) may not be available on your system. Check the Programming and  
Use guide for the communications system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PARTNER MAIL VS® System Programming Reference  
To Program the PARTNER MAIL VS System  
TO RETURN TO THE PROGRAMMING  
MAIN MENU  
TO REPLAY A MENU  
TO START PROGRAMMING  
PRESS [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ]  
PRESS [ 9 ] [ 9 ] and [ # ]  
PRESS [  
] [ 4 ]  
PRESS [  
] [ 7 ]  
ENTER your Password  
(factory setting is 1234) and [ # ]  
PRESS [ 9 ] to access the Programming  
TO RETURN TO A PREVIOUS MENU  
TO EXIT PROGRAMMING  
PRESS [  
] [ # ]  
PRESS [  
] [  
] [ 9 ]  
Main Menu  
Automated Attendant  
Automated Attendant  
Language  
PRESS [ 3 ] to program Automated  
PRESS [ 3 ] to program Automated  
PRESS [ 1 ] to program Language  
Attendant Service  
Attendant Service  
TO CHANGE SELECTOR CODE  
TRANSFER TO DIRECT EXTENSION  
TRANSFER—MONOLINGUAL MODE  
TO MODIFY THE MENU DEFINITION  
AND DAY MENU PROMPT—  
MONOLINGUAL MODE  
TO MODIFY THE LANGUAGE MODE  
PRESS [ 1 ] for Language Mode  
PRESS [ 1 ] for Monolingual Mode or  
[ 2 ] for Bilingual Mode  
PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu  
PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu  
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify  
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify  
ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9  
PRESS [ 9 ] to modify  
V1  
ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9  
PRESS [ 9 ] to modify  
PRESS [ 5 ] for Direct Extension Transfer  
TO MODIFY THE SYSTEM  
LANGUAGE—MONOLINGUAL MODE  
PRESS [ 2 ] for System Language  
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify  
ENTER the number of the desired  
System Language  
PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm  
PRESS [ 1 ] for Selector Code Transfer  
To program another Selector Code for  
Direct Extension Transfer,  
repeat  
ENTER an extension, Hunt Group, or  
Calling Group number and [ # ]  
To program another Selector Code for  
Selector Code Transfer, repeat  
PRESS [  
] [ # ] to approve  
PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Day Menu  
PRESS [  
] [ # ] to approve  
Prompt  
PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Day Menu  
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording  
V2  
Prompt  
PRESS [  
] [ # ] to approve all changes  
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording  
V12  
PRESS [  
] [ # ] to approve all changes  
TO MODIFY THE PRIMARY AND  
SECONDARY LANGUAGES—  
BILINGUAL MODE  
V 4  
TO CHANGE SELECTOR CODE  
TRANSFER TO ANNOUNCEMENT—  
MONOLINGUAL MODE  
PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu  
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify  
PRESS [ 2 ] for System Language  
PRESS [ 1 ] for Primary Language  
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify  
ENTER the number of the desired  
System Language  
TO MODIFY ANNOUNCEMENT—  
MONOLINGUAL MODE  
PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu  
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify  
ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9  
ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9  
PRESS [ 9 ] to modify  
PRESS [ 3 ] for Announcement  
PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm  
PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm  
PRESS [ 3 ] to play the Announcement  
PRESS [  
] [ # ]  
ENTER an Announcement number  
PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Announcement  
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording  
PRESS [ 2 ] for Secondary Language  
recorded for the Selector Code  
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify  
ENTER the number of the desired  
System Language  
ENTER an Announcement number  
PRESS [ 1 ] to rerecord the  
Announcement  
PRESS [  
PRESS [  
] [ # ] to approve  
PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm  
] [ # ] to continue without  
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording  
V3  
programming another Selector  
PRESS [  
PRESS [  
] [ # ] to move up a menu level  
] [ # ] to continue without  
Code, or  
To program another Selector Code,  
repeat  
PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Day Menu  
Prompt  
programming Selector Codes  
PRESS [ # ] to approve all changes  
V10  
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording  
PRESS [  
] [ # ] to approve all changes  
V14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PARTNER MAIL VS® System Programming Reference  
To Program the PARTNER MAIL VS System  
TO RETURN TO THE PROGRAMMING  
MAIN MENU  
TO REPLAY A MENU  
TO START PROGRAMMING  
PRESS [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ]  
PRESS [ 9 ] [ 9 ] and [ # ]  
PRESS [  
] [ 4 ]  
PRESS [  
] [ 7 ]  
ENTER your Password  
(factory setting is 1234) and [ # ]  
PRESS [ 9 ] to access the Programming  
TO RETURN TO A PREVIOUS MENU  
TO EXIT PROGRAMMING  
PRESS [  
] [ # ]  
PRESS [  
] [  
] [ 9 ]  
Main Menu  
Automated Attendant  
Automated Attendant  
Automated Attendant  
PRESS [ 3 ] to program Automated  
PRESS [ 3 ] to program Automated  
Attendant Service  
PRESS [ 3 ] to program Automated  
Attendant Service  
Attendant Service  
TO MODIFY ANNOUNCEMENT—  
BILINGUAL MODE  
PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu  
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify  
TO CHANGE SELECTOR CODE  
TRANSFER TO ANNOUNCEMENT—  
BILINGUAL MODE  
TO MODIFY THE MENU DEFINITION  
AND DAY MENU PROMPT—  
BILINGUAL MODE  
PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu  
PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu  
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify  
ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9  
PRESS [ 9 ] to modify  
PRESS [ 3 ] for Announcement  
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify  
ENTER a Selector Code [ 1 ] through [ 9 ]  
PRESS [ 9 ] to modify  
ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9  
PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm  
PRESS [ 3 ] to play the Announcement  
recorded for the Selector Code  
PRESS [ 1 ] for Selector Code Transfer  
ENTER an Announcement number  
PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Announcement  
ENTER an Announcement number  
PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Announcement  
in the Primary Language  
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording  
ENTER an extension, Hunt Group, or  
Calling Group number and [ # ]  
in the Primary Language  
To program another Selector Code for  
Selector Code Transfer, repeat  
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording  
PRESS [  
] [ # ] to approve  
PRESS [  
] [ # ] to approve  
PRESS [  
] [ # ] to approve  
PRESS [ 2 ] to record the Announcement  
PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Day Menu  
Prompt in the Primary  
Language  
PRESS [ 2 ] to record the Announcement  
in the Secondary Language  
in the Secondary Language  
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording  
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording  
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording  
PRESS [  
PRESS [  
PRESS [  
] [ # ] to approve  
PRESS [  
] [ # ] to approve the  
Announcements  
] [ # ] to continue without  
PRESS [  
] [ # ] to approve  
] [ # ] to move up a menu level  
] [ # ] to move up another menu  
PRESS [  
PRESS [ 2 ] to record the Day Menu  
Prompt in the Secondary  
Language  
programming another Selector  
Code, or  
level  
PRESS [ # ] to approve all changes V11  
PRESS [  
] [ # ] to program another  
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording  
Selector Code, repeat  
PRESS [  
] [ # ] to approve  
TO CHANGE SELECTOR CODE  
TRANSFER TO DIRECT EXTENSION  
TRANSFER—BILINGUAL MODE  
PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Day Menu  
PRESS [ # ] to approve all changes  
Prompt in the Primary Language  
V5  
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording  
PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu  
PRESS [  
] [ # ] to approve  
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify  
PRESS [ 2 ] to record the Day Menu  
Prompt in the Secondary  
Language  
ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9  
PRESS [ 9 ] to modify  
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording  
PRESS [ 5 ] for Direct Extension Transfer  
PRESS [  
] [ # ] to approve-  
To program another Selector Code for  
Direct Extension Transfer,  
repeat  
V15  
PRESS [ # ] to approve all changes  
PRESS [  
] [ # ] to approve  
TO PLAY THE MENU DEFINITION–  
MONOLINGUAL MODE  
PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Day Menu  
Prompt in the Primary Language  
PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu  
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording  
PRESS [ 2 ] for playback of the  
PRESS [  
] [ # ] to approve  
Day Menu definition  
PRESS [ 2 ] to record the Day Menu  
Prompt in the Secondary  
Language  
PRESS [ 2 ] for playback of the Selector  
Codes  
PRESS [ 1 ] to play the recorded  
Announcement assigned to the  
Selector Code, or  
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording  
PRESS [  
] [ # ] to approve  
PRESS [ # ] to approve all changes  
V6  
PRESS [ # ] to skip  
V13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PARTNER MAIL VS® System Programming Reference  
To Program The PARTNER MAIL VS System  
TO RETURN TO THE PROGRAMMING  
MAIN MENU  
TO REPLAY A MENU  
TO START PROGRAMMING  
PRESS [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ]  
PRESS [ 9 ] [ 9 ] and [ # ]  
PRESS [  
] [ 4 ]  
PRESS [  
] [ 7 ]  
ENTER your Password  
TO RETURN TO A PREVIOUS MENU  
(factory setting is 1234) and [ # ]  
TO EXIT PROGRAMMING  
PRESS [  
] [ # ]  
PRESS [ 9 ] to access the Programming  
PRESS [  
] [  
] [ 9  
]
Main Menu  
Line Ownership  
Mailboxes  
Automated Attendant  
PRESS [ 6 ] to program Line Ownership  
PRESS [ 4 ] to program Mailboxes  
PRESS [ 3 ] to program Automated  
Attendant Service  
TO SCAN LINE OWNERSHIP  
TO PLAY A MAILBOX’S STATUS  
PRESS [ 2 ] to scan  
ENTER a mailbox number and [ # ], or  
TO PLAY THE MENU DEFINITION–  
BILINGUAL MODE  
PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu  
PRESS [ # ] for the first mailbox  
ENTER the line number and [ # ], or  
PRESS [ # ] to scan the first line  
number that has an owner  
PRESS [ # ] to play the next existing  
V16  
mailbox’s status  
PRESS [ 2 ] for playback of the  
Day Menu definition  
PRESS [ 2 ] for playback of the Selector  
LISTEN to the line owner’s name and  
mailbox number  
TO DELETE A MAILBOX  
ENTER a mailbox number and [ # ]  
PRESS [ # ] to scan the next line  
Codes  
V23  
PRESS [ 1 ] to play the Primary Language  
Announcement assigned to the  
Selector Code, or  
PRESS [  
] [ 3 ] to delete the mailbox  
V17  
PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm  
TO ASSIGN LINE OWNERSHIP  
PRESS [ 4 ] to assign  
ENTER the line number and [ # ]  
ENTER the mailbox number and [ # ]  
PRESS [ 2 ] to play the Secondary  
Language Announcement  
assigned to the Selector Code,  
or  
TO CREATE A MAILBOX  
ENTER the new mailbox number and [ # ]  
PRESS [ 4 ] to create the new mailbox  
V24  
PRESS [ # ] to skip  
V18  
V 7  
TO MODIFY LINE OWNERSHIP  
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify  
ENTER the line number and [ # ]  
TO REINITIALIZE A PASSWORD  
ENTER a mailbox number and [ # ]  
PRESS [ 3 ] to reset the password to 1234  
V19  
TO MODIFY THE NIGHT MENU  
PROMPT—MONOLINGUAL MODE  
PRESS [ 2 ] for Night Menu  
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify  
ENTER the new owner’s mailbox  
number and [ # ]  
V25  
V26  
PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Night Menu  
Prompt  
TO REINITIALIZE A MAILBOX  
ENTER the mailbox number and [ # ]  
PRESS [ 4 ] to reinitialize the mailbox  
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording  
TO DELETE LINE OWNERSHIP  
PRESS [  
] [ # ] to approve  
PRESS [  
] [ 3 ] to delete  
V 8  
V20  
ENTER the line number and [ # ]  
PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm  
PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm  
TO MODIFY THE NIGHT MENU  
PROMPT—BILINGUAL MODE  
TO MODIFY A MAILBOX’S LANGUAGE  
ENTER the mailbox number and [ # ]  
PRESS [ 6 ] to program Language  
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify  
PRESS [ 2 ] for Night Menu  
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify  
PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Night Menu  
ENTER the number of the desired  
language  
Prompt in the Primary Language  
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording  
PRESS [ ] [ # ] to approve  
V21  
PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm  
PRESS [ 2 ] to record the Night Menu Prompt  
TO ASSIGN/REMOVE OUTCALLING  
FOR A MAILBOX  
in the Secondary Language  
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording  
ENTER the mailbox number and [ # ]  
PRESS [ 5 ] to administer Outcalling  
PRESS [ 9 ] to assign Outcalling, or  
PRESS [ 6 ] to remove Outcalling  
PRESS [  
] [ # ] to approve  
PRESS [ # ] to approve all changes  
V9  
To assign/remove Outcalling for another  
mailbox, repeat  
V22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PARTNER MAIL VS® System Programming Reference  
To Program the Communications System for PARTNER MAIL VS  
Place the Programming Overlay on the dial pad of the system display phone at extension 10*  
TO START SYSTEM PROGRAMMING  
PRESS [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ]  
TO USE A SPECIFIC PROCEDURE  
TO CYCLE THROUGH AVAILABLE  
SETTINGS  
DIAL  
[ # ] and three-digit procedure  
code  
PRESS [ Next Data ] or [ Prev Data ]  
PRESS [ System Program ]  
Example: [ # ] [ 5 ] [ 0 ] [ 5 ] for Hunt Group  
PRESS [ System Program ]  
Extensions  
ENTER System Password if required  
TO RETURN TO FACTORY SETTINGS  
PRESS [ Remove ]  
TO CYCLE THROUGH SYSTEM  
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES  
TO END SYSTEM PROGRAMMING  
PRESS [ Next Procedure ] or  
PRESS [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ]  
[ Prev Procedure ]  
AUTOMATIC VMS COVER  
HUNT GROUP EXTENSIONS  
GROUP CALL DISTRIBUTION  
DIAL  
#206††  
DIAL  
DIAL  
DIAL  
DIAL  
#505  
#310  
an extension number  
PRESS [ 7 ] for the VMS Hunt Group  
PRESS [ 7 ] for the VMS Hunt Group  
DIAL  
DIAL  
1
2
= Assigned  
= Not Assigned  
the extension number  
a line number  
DIAL  
DIAL  
1 = Assigned to group  
1
2
3
= Assigned  
= Not Assigned  
= VMS Line Cover  
PRESS [ Next Item ] to program another  
2 = Not assigned to group ✔  
PRESS [ Next Item ] to program the next  
extension  
C 7  
extension  
PRESS [ Next Item ] to program another  
line  
C1  
VMS COVER RINGS  
C3  
DIAL  
DIAL  
#117**  
TRANSFER RETURN EXTENSION  
one digit (1-9) for the number of  
rings before the call is sent to  
the voice messaging system)  
#306†  
LINE COVERAGE EXTENSION  
DIAL  
DIAL  
DIAL  
DIAL  
#208**  
a line number  
an extension number  
DIAL  
DIAL  
the extension number  
10 (the receptionist’s extension)  
= 3 rings  
C 8  
PRESS [ Next Item ] to program the next  
extension  
PRESS [ Next Item ] to program another  
line  
NIGHT SERVICE BUTTON  
C 2  
PRESS [ Remove ] to unassign ownership  
DIAL  
DIAL  
#503  
C4  
1
2
= Assigned  
= Not Assigned  
3 = Select button** then PRESS  
a programmable button (to  
assign Night Service to that  
button)  
VMS HUNT DELAY  
DIAL  
#506  
DIAL  
1 = Immediate ✔  
2 = Delayed  
If you use option 3 after a Night  
Service button has been assigned,  
the Night Service button moves  
from the old button to the new  
button you select.  
C5  
VMS HUNT SCHEDULE  
C 9  
DIAL  
DIAL  
#507  
1
= Always  
2 = Day Only  
AUTOMATIC EXTENSION PRIVACY  
3 = Night Only  
DIAL  
DIAL  
DIAL  
#304  
C 6  
the extension number  
1 = Assigned  
2
= Not Assigned  
PRESS [ Next Item ] to program another  
extension  
= Factory Setting  
C10  
= Button with Lights Required  
*
Some systems allow programming from extension 11. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system.  
In some countries, the procedure code for Transfer Return Extension is #309. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications  
system.  
††  
In some countries, the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is #205. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system.  
**  
Line Coverage Extension (#208), VMS Cover Rings (#117), and option 3 of the Night Service Button (#503) procedure may not be available on your  
system. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PARTNER MAIL VS® System Programming Reference  
To Program the Communications System for PARTNER MAIL VS  
Place the Programming Overlay on the dial pad of the system display phone at extension 10*  
TO ERASE A FEATURE OR AUTO  
DIAL BUTTON  
PRESS the programmed button  
TO PROGRAM ANOTHER FEATURE  
AT THE SAME EXTENSION  
After you program one feature, continue  
with the instructions in the box for the  
next feature.  
TO START CENTRALIZED  
TELEPHONE PROGRAMMING  
PRESS [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ]  
PRESS [ Mic ]  
PRESS [ System Program ] [ System Program ]  
PRESS [ Central Tel Program ]  
DIAL  
TO END CENTRALIZED TELEPHONE  
PROGRAMMING  
the extension number to be  
programmed  
TO CHANGE SETTINGS FOR  
ANOTHER EXTENSION  
Buttons on which lines are assigned for the  
extension light up to show the current Line  
Ringing setting; remaining buttons can be  
programmed with Auto Dial numbers or  
features.  
PRESS [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ]  
PRESS [ Central Tel Program ]  
DIAL  
the new extension’s number  
VOICE MAIL MESSAGES AUTO DIAL  
BUTTON  
PRESS a programmable button  
VOICE MAILBOX TRANSFER  
PRESS a programmable button  
PRESS [ Feature ] [ 1 ] [ 4 ]††  
VMS COVER  
PRESS a programmable button with  
lights  
PRESS [ Feature ] [ 1 ] [ 5 ]†  
PRESS left [ Intercom ]  
C13  
[ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ]  
DIAL  
C11  
C14  
DO NOT DISTURB  
PRESS a programmable button with  
lights  
PRESS [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 1 ]  
C12  
= Button with Lights Required  
*
Some systems allow programming from extension 11. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system.  
In some countries, the procedure code for Transfer Return Extension is #309. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications  
system.  
††  
In some countries, the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is #205. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

KWC Indoor Furnishings Z53292093122 User Manual
Lasko Fan 2418QM User Manual
LevelOne Network Card WUA 0605 User Manual
LG Electronics Blu ray Player BP340 User Manual
LG Electronics Personal Computer M197WA User Manual
Makita Cordless Saw SR1800 User Manual
Manitowoc Ice Plumbing Product 7600853 User Manual
Masterbuilt Smoker 20070910 User Manual
Memorex VCR MVR2040 A User Manual
MicroFridge Double Oven FGB24L2EC User Manual